2020 Renegade

2 02 0 REN EGAD E
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
202 0 RE N E G A D E
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE

OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_N
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
Third Edition
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
used in substitution therefore. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by comply with all local laws.
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s convenient reference source for common questions.
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
use public transportation.
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area WARNING!
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 8 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................................................11 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................78 3
4 SAFETY .......................................................................................................................................... 99 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 156 5
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 238 6
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 279 7

8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................324 8
9 MULTIMEDIA .............................................................................................................................. 332
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................466
10
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................ 470
11
INTRODUCTION SENTRY KEY.......................................................... 19 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK

Key Programming ....................................... 19 TIPS .......................................................................36
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................. 9
Replacement Keys....................................... 19 Introducing Voice Recognition.................... 36
Essential Information .................................... 9 General Information .................................... 19 Get Started................................................... 36
Symbols .......................................................... 9 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED..... 20 Basic Voice Commands .............................. 37
ROLLOVER WARNING ........................................... 9
To Arm The System ..................................... 20 General Information .................................... 37
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................10 To Disarm The System ............................... 21 Additional Information................................. 38
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS.........10 Disabling ...................................................... 21 MIRRORS...............................................................38
DOORS................................................................... 21 Inside Day/Night Mirror .............................. 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Door Locks...................................... 21 Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ........... 38
KEYS ......................................................................11 Power Door Locks ....................................... 22 Outside Mirrors ........................................... 38
Key Fob With Remote Control..................... 11 Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 40
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................15 Equipped) ..................................................... 23 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped .. 40
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition..................... 15 Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................40
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...16 Equipped ...................................................... 26 Headlights ................................................... 40
How To Use Remote Start ........................... 16 Dead Lock Device — If Equipped ................ 26 Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
Remote Start Cancel Message — Child Locks .................................................. 27 If Equipped .................................................. 40
If Equipped ................................................... 17 SEATS ................................................................... 28 High Beams ................................................. 40
To Enter Remote Start Mode ...................... 17 Manual Front Seats ..................................... 28 Flash-To-Pass............................................... 41
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving Manual Rear Seat Adjustment ................... 29 Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......... 41
The Vehicle................................................... 17 Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped.... 31 Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Heated Seats — If Equipped ....................... 32 If Equipped .................................................. 41
Vehicle .......................................................... 17 Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40 ..... 33 Parking Lights .............................................. 41
Remote Start Comfort Systems — HEAD RESTRAINTS .............................................. 33 Headlight Delay .......................................... 42
If Equipped .................................................. 18 Front Head Restraints ................................. 34 Front Fog Lights — If Equipped .................. 42
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De-Icer And Rear Head Restraints.................................. 34 Turn Signals ................................................. 42
Rear Defrost Activation — If Equipped........ 18 STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 35 Lane Change Assist ..................................... 43
General Information .................................... 18 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 35 Courtesy Lights ............................................ 43
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 35 INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................43
Courtesy Lights ............................................ 43
WIPERS AND WASHERS ....................................45 HOOD .................................................................... 66 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

Front Wiper Operation ................................. 45 To Open The Hood ....................................... 66 MESSAGES ............................................................86
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........... 46 To Close The Hood....................................... 66 Red Warning Lights ..................................... 87
Rear Wiper Operation .................................. 47 LIFTGATE ............................................................... 67 Yellow Warning Lights ................................. 90
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped .... 48 Opening ........................................................ 67 Yellow Indicator Lights ................................ 94
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...........................................48 Closing.......................................................... 68 White Indicator Lights ................................. 95
Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations — Cargo Area Features.................................... 68 Blue Indicator Lights ................................... 95
Passenger Compartment ............................ 48 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT........................................ 71 Green Indicator Lights................................. 96
Manual Climate Controls Overview ............ 49 Glove Compartment .................................... 71 Gray Indicator Lights ................................... 96
Automatic Climate Control Overview .......... 51 Sun Visors .................................................... 71 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) ........96
Climate Voice Commands ........................... 57 USB/Media Player Control .......................... 72 Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Operating Tips ............................................. 58 Power Outlets............................................... 73 Cybersecurity ............................................... 97
WINDOWS..............................................................60 Power Inverter — If Equipped ...................... 74 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Power Window Controls............................... 60 Cigar Lighter — If Equipped ......................... 75 PROGRAMS ...........................................................97
Auto-Down Feature ..................................... 60 Ashtray — If Equipped.................................. 75
Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse Front Armrest ............................................... 76 SAFETY
Protection — If Equipped ............................. 61 Cupholders .................................................. 76 SAFETY FEATURES ...............................................99
Reset Auto-Up .............................................. 61 Handle Grip .................................................. 76
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 99
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 61 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............ 77
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System.... 100
POWER MY SKY SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED......61
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ....................... 107
Power My Sky Operation ............................. 61 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
Emergency Open/Close............................... 63 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ....................................... 78 If Equipped................................................. 107
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 63 Instrument Cluster Descriptions................. 79 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
POWER GLASS SUNROOF WITH POWER INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ..................... 80 Mitigation Operation — If Equipped.......... 112
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED ........................................64 Instrument Cluster Display Location And Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Opening ........................................................ 64 Controls ........................................................ 80 (TPMS)........................................................ 117
Closing .......................................................... 64 Oil Change Reset ......................................... 81 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ................. 123
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 65 Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ... 82 Occupant Restraint Systems ....................123
Power Sun Shade ........................................ 65 TRIP COMPUTER .................................................. 86 Important Safety Precautions...................123
Auto Reverse Feature.................................. 65 Seat Belt Systems ..................................... 124
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 66
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...130 NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF Resume Speed .......................................... 178
Child Restraints .........................................141 EQUIPPED ..........................................................165 Deactivation...............................................178
Transporting Pets.......................................153 Gear Selector .............................................166 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
SAFETY TIPS ....................................................... 153 Gear Ranges ..............................................167 IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 178
Transporting Passengers ..........................153 Transmission Limp Home Mode...............170 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Exhaust Gas ..............................................153 Ignition Park Interlock ...............................171 Operation ...................................................180
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock To Activate/Deactivate.............................. 180
Vehicle .......................................................154 System........................................................171 Activating Adaptive Cruise Control
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make FOUR WHEEL DRIVE ..........................................171 (ACC)...........................................................180
Outside The Vehicle ...................................155 Four Wheel Drive (4x4)..............................171 To Set A Desired ACC Speed.....................181
SELEC-TERRAIN..................................................173 To Cancel ...................................................181
STARTING AND OPERATING Mode Selection Guide ...............................173 To Turn Off ................................................. 181
STARTING THE ENGINE..................................... 156 ACTIVE GRILLE SHUTTERS — IF EQUIPPED ....174 To Resume ................................................. 182
Tip Start Feature .......................................156 POWER STEERING .............................................174 To Vary The Speed Setting ........................ 182
If Engine Fails To Start .............................156 STOP/START SYSTEM .......................................174 Setting The Following Distance In ACC .... 183
Cold Weather Operation............................157 Automatic Mode.........................................174 Overtake Aid...............................................184
Extended Park Starting..............................157 Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu........185
After Starting — Warming Up The Autostop .....................................................175 Display Warnings And Maintenance ........185
Engine.........................................................158 To Start The Engine While In Autostop Precautions While Driving With ACC......... 187
Stopping The Engine..................................158 Mode...........................................................175 General Information ..................................189
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
If Equipped .................................................158 System........................................................176 Mode ..........................................................189
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 158 To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start REAR PARKSENSE — IF EQUIPPED................. 191
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) ......................... 159 System........................................................176 Rear ParkSense Sensors ..........................191
Auto Park Brake .........................................161 System Malfunction...................................176 Enabling And Disabling Rear
SafeHold.....................................................161 SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ....................176 ParkSense.................................................. 192
Brake Service Mode ..................................162 Activation....................................................177 Operation With A Trailer ............................ 193
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED .... 163 Setting A Desired Speed ...........................177 Service The Rear ParkSense System .......193
Shifting .......................................................163 Varying The Speed.....................................177 ParkSense System Usage Precautions .... 193
Downshifting ..............................................164 Accelerating For Passing...........................178
FRONT AND REAR PARKSENSE — TRAILER TOWING...............................................226 Body Computer Fuse Center.....................259
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 194 Common Towing Definitions .....................227 Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution
ParkSense Sensors ...................................195 Trailer Hitch Classification ........................228 Unit ............................................................. 261
ParkSense Warning Display......................195 Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ....................... 262
ParkSense Display.....................................195 Weight Ratings)..........................................229 Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage .......... 262
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........199 Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................229 Preparations For Jacking .........................263
Service The ParkSense Park Assist Towing Requirements ...............................230 Jacking Instructions ..................................264
System........................................................200 Towing Tips.................................................232 Road Tire Installation ................................267
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............200 RECREATIONAL TOWING ..................................233 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ................... 268
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....200 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Tire Service Kit Storage............................. 268
Side Distance Warning (SDW) System .....201 Vehicle ........................................................233 Tire Service Kit Components And
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — Recreational Towing ..................................234 Operation ...................................................268
IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 204 DRIVING TIPS......................................................234 Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions .......... 269
Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense On-Road Driving Tips .................................234 Replacing The Sealant .............................. 270
Active Park Assist System .........................204 Off-Road Driving Tips.................................235 JUMP STARTING ................................................ 270
Parallel Parking Space Assistance Preparations For Jump Start.....................270
Operation/Display......................................205 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Jump Starting Procedure ..........................271
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................238 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY —
Operation/Display......................................209 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED.....238 IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 272
Exiting The Parking Space.........................214 General Information ..................................242 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS.......................... 273
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 218 BULB REPLACEMENT ........................................242 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ........................... 274
LaneSense Operation................................218 General Information ..................................242 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 275
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................218 Replacement Bulbs ...................................243 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ....................... 276
LaneSense Warning Message ..................218 Replacing Exterior Bulbs ...........................244 Front Wheel Drive (FWD)...........................276
Changing LaneSense Status.....................222 Replacing Interior Bulbs............................252 Four Wheel Drive (4WD)............................ 277
REAR BACK UP CAMERA.................................. 222 FUSES ..................................................................255 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ......277
ADDING FUEL ..................................................... 223 General Information ..................................255 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................ 225 Access To The Fuses .................................255 (EARS) ................................................................ 278
Certification Label......................................225 Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 278
Unit .............................................................256
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Tire Chains And Traction Devices ............316 E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles......326
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............317 CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ..326
SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................. 279
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM MMT In Gasoline........................................327
Maintenance Plan......................................280
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .....................................318 Materials Added To Fuel ...........................327
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 287
Treadwear ..................................................318 Fuel System Cautions................................327
1.3L Turbo Engine .....................................287
Traction Grades .........................................319 Carbon Monoxide Warnings .....................328
2.4L Engine ................................................288
Temperature Grades .................................319 FLUID CAPACITIES............................................. 329
Checking Oil Level......................................289
STORING THE VEHICLE......................................319 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS................................ 330
Cooling System ..........................................289
BODYWORK ........................................................320 Engine ........................................................ 330
Adding Washer Fluid..................................290
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......320 Chassis ...................................................... 331
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................290
Pressure Washing......................................290 Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........321
Preserving The Bodywork..........................321 MULTIMEDIA
DEALER SERVICE .............................................. 291
Engine Oil ..................................................291 INTERIORS .........................................................322 CYBERSECURITY ............................................... 332
Engine Oil Filter..........................................292 Seats And Fabric Parts ..............................322 UCONNECT SETTINGS ....................................... 333
Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................292 Plastic And Coated Parts...........................322 Customer Programmable Features —
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................292 Leather Parts .............................................322 Uconnect 3 Settings ..................................333
Body Lubrication ........................................293 Glass Surfaces ..........................................323 Customer Programmable Features —
Windshield Wiper Blades .........................293 Uconnect 4 Settings .................................344
Exhaust System ........................................295
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Customer Programmable Features —
Cooling System ..........................................296 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION .................................324 Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Brake System .............................................299 Vehicle Identification Number ..................324 Settings ...................................................... 356
Manual Transmission — If Equipped ........300 BRAKE SYSTEM..................................................324 UCONNECT INTRODUCTION.............................. 371
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ...301 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE Identifying Your Radio ............................... 371
RAISING THE VEHICLE ...................................... 302 SPECIFICATIONS ................................................324 Drag & Drop Menu Bar.............................. 373
TIRES ................................................................... 302 Torque Specifications................................324 Safety And General Information ............... 374
Tire Safety Information..............................302 FUEL REQUIREMENTS .......................................325 UCONNECT MODES ........................................... 376
Tires — General Information......................309 1.3L Turbo Engine .....................................325 Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................. 376
Tire Types ...................................................313 2.4L Engine ................................................325 Radio Mode ...............................................377
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................314 Reformulated Gasoline .............................326 Media Mode ..............................................389
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .....................315 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................326 Phone Mode ..............................................393
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ...........................458 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
EQUIPPED ........................................................... 408 SiriusXM Guardian™ Business Hours: ....458 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
Android Auto™ ...........................................408 Connected Services SOS FAQs .................458
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 466
Apple CarPlay® ..........................................411 Connected Services Roadside Assistance
Prepare For The Appointment .................. 466
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips FAQs ...........................................................458
Prepare A List.............................................466
And Tricks ...................................................414 Connected Services Send & Go FAQs .....458
Be Reasonable With Requests ................. 466
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED (UCONNECT Connected Services Vehicle Finder
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 466
4C NAV WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY ONLY) ....... 415 FAQs ...........................................................459
FCA US LLC Customer Center ...................467
Operating Navigation ................................415 Connected Services Stolen Vehicle
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ........... 467
Where To? .................................................415 Assistance FAQs .......................................459
In Mexico Contact ......................................467
View Map ...................................................428 Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............467
Information ................................................437 Unlock FAQs ..............................................460
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Emergency .................................................439 Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................467
Map Updates .............................................440 FAQs............................................................460
Service Contract .......................................467
SiriusXM® Travel Link ..............................440 Connected Services Account FAQs...........460
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 468
SiriusXM® Traffic Plus ..............................441 Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start
FAQs ...........................................................463 MOPAR PARTS................................................... 468
CONNECTED SERVICES— IF EQUIPPED ......... 441
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES ....463 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 468
Introduction To SiriusXM Guardian™ ......441
Regulatory And Safety Information...........463 In The 50 United States And
Getting Started With SiriusXM
Washington, D.C. .......................................468
Guardian™ .................................................442
In Canada...................................................468
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ .......................444
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 469
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Account.......................................................457
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles and
maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your vehicle. If equipped, the
two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe conditions suited
for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s Manual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Your
driving skills will improve with experience. When driving off-road, or working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome
the natural laws of physics. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of
the services that FCA US LLC offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty coverage, and the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its
validity. Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important warnings in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information which is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any
content introduced throughout the Owner's Information, that may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If
Equipped”. All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant
improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® vehicle best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR®
parts, and care about your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Essential Information
1
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle's
equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to be observed when using this component. Refer to “Warning/
Indicator Lights and Messages” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further information on the symbols used in your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of
gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all
vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle
safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
10
Rollover Warning Label

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal
use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In
a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains
CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death.
11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The
2
ignition system consists of a key fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/STOP
push button ignition system. The Remote
Keyless Entry system consists of a key fob and
Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located next Key Fob Emergency Key Release
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic 1 — Emergency Key Release Button
device; these devices may block the key fob’s 2 — Emergency Key
wireless signal. Keyless Ignition Key Fob
1 — Unlock In case the ignition switch does not change with
Key Fob With Remote Control 2 — Lock the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
The key fob with Remote Control contains a 3 — Remote Start or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) feature. The 4 — PANIC can be verified by referring to the instrument
Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock cluster, which will display directions to follow.
or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the
Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 1st Push Of Key Fob Unlock Button Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Push and release the unlock button on the key This feature lets you program the system to Passive Entry
fob once to unlock the driver's door or twice unlock either the driver's door or all doors on If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is
within five seconds to unlock all doors and the the first push of the unlock button on the key open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock
liftgate. fob. To change the current setting, refer to again automatically if the key fob is left inside
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further the passenger compartment, otherwise the
first push of the unlock button. Refer to information. doors will stay locked.
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further NOTE: Replacing The Battery In The Key With
information. If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, Remote Control
NOTE: refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in The recommended replacement battery is one
If the vehicle is unlocked by a key fob, and no “Doors” in this chapter for further information. CR2032 battery.
door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
will re-lock and if equipped, the security alarm NOTE:
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
will arm.  Perchlorate Material — special handling may
to lock all doors and liftgate.
The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system chirp to acknowledge the signal. Refer to tion.
will be activated. “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
programmable information.  Do not touch the battery terminals that are
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, on the back housing or the printed circuit
refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry” in board.
“Doors” in this chapter for further information.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the

mechanical latch on the back of the key
fob sideways with your thumb and pull the
emergency key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal Key Fob Battery Replacement

3. Remove the battery by turning the back
cover over (battery facing downward) and
tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as
Emergency Key Removal a table or similar and replace the battery.
1 — Emergency Key Release Button When replacing the battery, match the (+)
2 — Emergency Key sign on the battery to the (+) sign on the
inside of the battery clip, located on the
2. Separate the key fob halves using the tip of back cover. Avoid touching the new battery
the emergency key, a #2 flat blade with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
screwdriver, or a coin and gently pry the two battery deterioration. If you touch a battery,
Separating Case With A Coin
halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not clean it with rubbing alcohol.
to damage the seal during removal. 4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming Additional Key Fobs NOTE: Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
Programming the key fob may be performed by dÌnnovation, Science and Economic
 When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
an authorized dealer. Development applicables aux appareils radio
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
Request For Additional Key Fobs you to an authorized dealer.
aux deux conditions suivantes:
NOTE:  Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
Only key fobs that are programmed to the to match the vehicle locks.
brouillage, et
vehicle electronics can be used to start and General Information
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
The following regulatory statement applies to all brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
programmed to any other vehicle.
vehicle: mettre le fonctionnement.
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N
WARNING! La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
 Always remove the key fobs from the siguientes dos condiciones:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
Rules and with Innovation, Science and 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
vehicle unattended.
Economic Development Canada license-exempt cause interferencia perjudicial y
 Always remember to place the ignition in RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
the OFF mode. following two conditions: 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
1. This device may not cause harmful pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
interference, and
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of NOTE:
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle 2. This device must accept any interference Changes or modifications not expressly
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has received, including interference that may approved by the party responsible for compli-
never been programmed. cause undesired operation. ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH NOTE:

The vehicle will not start if the key fob is located
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition inside the cargo area and the liftgate is opened.
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as long WARNING!
2
as the key fob is in the passenger compartment.  When leaving the vehicle, always remove
The push button ignition has three operating the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
positions. The three positions are OFF, ON, and vehicle.
RUN.  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
START/STOP Ignition Button
NOTE: with access to an unlocked vehicle.
The push button ignition can be placed in the
If the ignition switch does not change with the following positions:  Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
push of a button, the key fob may have a low or tended is dangerous for a number of
OFF
depleted battery. In this situation, a back up reasons. A child or others could be seriously
method can be used to operate the ignition  The engine is stopped.
or fatally injured. Children should be
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the  No electrical devices are available. warned not to touch the parking brake,
emergency key) of the key fob against the brake pedal or the gear selector.
START/STOP ignition button and push to ON
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the
operate the ignition switch.  The vehicle is not running.
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
 Some electrical devices are available dren, and do not leave the ignition in the ON
or RUN mode. A child could operate power
RUN windows, other controls, or move the
 Driving position. vehicle.
 All the electrical devices are available.  Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
How To Use Remote Start  Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
CAUTION! pushed)
 Push Remote Start button on the key fob
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
twice within five seconds. Pushing the  Battery at an acceptable charge level
thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehi- Remote Start button a third time shuts the
cle and lock all doors when leaving the vehi- engine off.  PANIC button not pushed
cle unattended.
 To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button,  System not disabled from previous remote
NOTE: and place the ignition in the ON/RUN posi- start event
For further information, refer to "Starting The tion.  Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
Engine" in "Starting And Operating".
 With remote start, the engine will only run for  Ignition in STOP/OFF position
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED 15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.  Fuel level meets minimum requirement
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside  The vehicle must be manually started with a  Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
the vehicle while still maintaining push of the START/STOP ignition button after
security. The system has a range of two consecutive timeouts. WARNING!
approximately 328 ft (100 m). All of the following conditions must be met  Do not start or run an engine in a closed
NOTE: before the engine will remote start: garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
 Gear Selector in PARK contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
 The vehicle must be equipped with an auto- odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
matic transmission to be equipped with  Doors closed poisonous and can cause serious injury or
Remote Start. death when inhaled.
 Hood closed
 Obstructions between the vehicle and key  Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
 Liftgate closed tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
fob may reduce this range.
 Hazard switch off door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped NOTE: To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
The following messages will display in the Vehicle
 If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote low, the vehicle will start and then shut down Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and
start or exits remote start prematurely: in 10 seconds. release the unlock button on the key fob to
 Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open  The park lamps will turn on and remain on
unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using 2
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open during Remote Start mode.
 handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm
 For security, power window and power (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
 Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
sunroof operations are disabled when the 15 minute cycle, push and release the START/
 Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. STOP ignition button.
 Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold  The engine can be started two consecutive NOTE:
times (two 15 minute cycles) with the key For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
 Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
fob. However, the ignition must be placed in Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
 Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To the ON/RUN position before you can repeat message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Reset the start sequence for a third cycle. Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the ignition START/STOP
The message will stay active until the ignition is To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
ignition button.
placed in the ON/RUN position. The Vehicle
To Enter Remote Start Mode Push and release the remote start button one
time or allow the engine to run for the entire
Push and release the Remote Start button on
15 minute cycle.
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash NOTE:
twice, and the horn will chirp. Then the engine To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will start, and the vehicle will remain in the will disable for two seconds after receiving a
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. valid remote start request.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If General Information 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
Equipped brouillage, et
The following regulatory statement applies to all
When Remote Start is activated, the heated Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
steering wheel and driver heated seat features vehicle: brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
will automatically activate when ambient FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C). These IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN mettre le fonctionnement.
features will stay on through the duration of
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
Remote Start.
Rules and with Innovation, Science and siguientes dos condiciones:
Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for Economic Development Canada license-exempt
further information. RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer following two conditions: cause interferencia perjudicial y
And Rear Defrost Activation — If Equipped 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
1. This device may not cause harmful
When remote start is active and the outside interference, and cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
ambient temperature is less than 40°F (4.4°C), pueda causar su operación no deseada.
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer and the Rear 2. This device must accept any interference
Defrost will be enabled. Exiting remote start will received, including interference that may NOTE:
resume previous operation, except if the cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly
Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active. The approved by the party responsible for compli-
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR ance could void the user’s authority to operate
Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and operation dÌnnovation, Science and Economic
will continue. the equipment.
Development applicables aux appareils radio
Refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia" for exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
further information. aux deux conditions suivantes:
SENTRY KEY If the vehicle security light turns on during

normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there  Always remove the key fobs from the
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
engine. The system does not need to be armed have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by vehicle unattended.
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless an authorized dealer. 2
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.  For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button CAUTION!
place the ignition in the OFF position.
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. compatible with some aftermarket remote NOTE:
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed starting systems. Use of these systems may Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate result in vehicle starting problems and loss of authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine security protection. programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
to crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
operate the vehicle. The system will shut the All of the key fobs provided with your new never been programmed.
engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
used to start the engine. electronics. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN Key Programming
to an authorized dealer.
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for Key fob programming is performed at an
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light authorized dealer. General Information
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
Replacement Keys The following regulatory statement applies to all
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
addition, if the light begins to flash after the NOTE: vehicle:
bulb check, it indicates that someone used an Only key fobs that are programmed to the
invalid key fob to start the engine. Either of FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
these conditions will result in the engine being operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN
shut off after two seconds. programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no To Arm The System
Rules and with Innovation, Science and cause interferencia perjudicial y
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar alarm:
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: 1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
in the OFF position.
interference, and NOTE: 2. Perform one of the following methods to
Changes or modifications not expressly lock the vehicle:
2. This device must accept any interference approved by the party responsible for compli-
received, including interference that may ance could void the user’s authority to operate  Push the lock button on the interior
cause undesired operation. the equipment. power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
dÌnnovation, Science and Economic
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED  Push the lock button on the exterior
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless key fob available in the same exterior
Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized zone. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go —
operation. While the vehicle security alarm is Passive Entry” in "Doors" in this chapter
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de armed, interior switches for door locks and for further information.
brouillage, et liftgate release are disabled. If something  Push the lock button on the key fob.
triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
will provide the following audible and visible 3. If any doors are open, close them.
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
signals:
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.  The horn will pulse.
 The turn signals will flash.

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:  The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash.
To Disarm The System The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect

your vehicle. However, you can create
DOORS
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
conditions where the system will give you a false Manual Door Locks
using any of the following methods:
alarm. If one of the previously described arming To lock each door, rotate the door lock button
 Push the unlock button on the key fob.
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security on each door trim panel forward. To unlock the
Grasp the Passive Entry door handle to alarm will arm, regardless of whether you are in 2
 doors, pull the inside door handle to the first
unlock the door. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle detent or rotate the door lock button until the
— Passive Entry” in "Doors" in this chapter for and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this lock symbol is no longer visible.
further information. occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the lock symbol is visible when the door is
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the shut, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure
 Place the ignition in the OFF mode to disarm
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle the key fob is not inside the vehicle before
the system.
security alarm will remain armed when the closing the door.
NOTE: battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
All doors and the liftgate can be programmed to
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
 The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate unlock on the use of one of the front door
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm interior handles. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
the vehicle security alarm. Disabling “Multimedia” for further information on
To completely disable the alarm (e.g. in the case programming locking and unlocking
 The vehicle security alarm remains armed
of long inactivity of the car), lock the doors by preferences.
during liftgate entry. If someone enters the
vehicle through the liftgate and opens any turning the emergency key in the exterior door Locking/Unlocking Doors From Outside
door, the alarm will sound. lock cylinder. With the doors closed, insert the emergency key
into the driver exterior door lock cylinder and
 When the vehicle security alarm is armed, NOTE:
turn to the right to lock the driver's door.
the interior power door lock switches will not If the batteries in the key fob discharge in the
unlock the doors. event of a failure to the system or to turn the To unlock the driver’s door, insert the
alarm off, place the ignition in the ON/RUN posi- emergency key into the driver exterior door lock
tion. cylinder and turn to the left to unlock the
driver's door.
Power Door Locks

WARNING! (Continued)
A power door lock switch is located on each of
 When leaving the vehicle, always remove the front door trim panels. Use this switch to
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your lock or unlock the doors, liftgate and fuel door.
vehicle. Always make sure the ignition is in
“OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the NOTE:
vehicle and lock the vehicle. Unsupervised The key fob may not be able to be detected by
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe the vehicle’s Keyless Enter-N-Go system if it is
personal injuries or death. located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other
Manual Door Lock  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or electronic device; these devices may block the
with access to an unlocked vehicle. key fob’s wireless signal and prevent the
NOTE: Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- Keyless Enter-N-Go system from starting the
The manual lock knob unlocks each individual tended is dangerous for a number of vehicle.
door separately. reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
WARNING! warned not to touch the parking brake,
 For personal security and safety in the brake pedal or the gear selector.
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors  Do not leave the key fob in or near the
before you drive as well as when you park vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
and leave the vehicle. dren, and do not leave the ignition in the ON
(Continued) or RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with  The key fob may not be able to be detected by NOTE:
the Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry system the vehicle’s Passive Entry system if it is If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,
if equipped. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go — located next to a mobile phone, laptop or all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
Passive Entry” in this section for further other electronic device; these devices may front driver’s door handle. To select between
information. block the key fob’s wireless signal and “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
prevent the Passive Entry system from Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” 2
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If
locking/unlocking the vehicle. in “Multimedia” for further information.
Equipped)
To Unlock From The Driver's Side To Unlock From The Passenger Side
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature (1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s front driver door handle to unlock the driver's front passenger door handle to unlock all four
door(s) without having to push the key fob lock door automatically. doors and the liftgate automatically.
or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
 Passive Entry can be enabled or disabled. driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
for further information. Press”).
 If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
affected, resulting in a slower response time. within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
front door handles, push the door handle lock
 If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry button to lock all four doors.
door handle, and no door is opened within
60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if
equipped, the security alarm will arm.
Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the NOTE: 2. A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle lock button. This could unlock the door handle while a door is open.
 The Passive Entry system will not operate if
door(s).
the key fob battery is depleted. 3. A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
 After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or When any of these situations occur, after all
unlock the doors using any Passive Entry open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
door handle. This is done to allow you to be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the inside the vehicle, and it does not find any
door handle without the vehicle reacting and Passive Entry key fobs outside the vehicle, then
unlocking. the vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using NOTE:
the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
door panel. valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key fob is
Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe) detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally not unlock the doors when any of the following
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your conditions are met:
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
 The doors are manually locked using the door
with an automatic door unlock feature.
lock knobs.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
Passive Entry. There are three situations that  There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking vehicle: Passive Entry door handle.
1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive

Entry key fob while a door is open.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
liftgate, push the Electronic Liftgate release to
open with one fluid motion.
2
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of electronic Liftgate Release/Passive Entry Emergency Key Release
liftgate release. 1 — Electronic Liftgate Release 1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Liftgate Passive Entry Location 2 — Emergency Key
NOTE:
 The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock Emergency Unlocking Driver Door NOTE:
the liftgate and the doors. The liftgate unlock If the key fob battery is low or depleted, the The emergency key can be inserted into the
feature is built into the electronic liftgate emergency key can be used to unlock the driver door lock cylinder from either direction.
release. side door lock cylinder.
To release the emergency key, proceed as
 If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is
follows:
programmed in the instrument cluster
display, if equipped, only the liftgate will 1. Slide the emergency key release button to
unlock when you push the Electronic the side.
Release. If "Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" is
programmed in Uconnect, the liftgate will 2. Remove the emergency key from the key
unlock when you push the electronic unlock/ fob with Remote Control housing.
lock button on the liftgate. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia.”
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
WARNING! Rules and with Innovation, Science and cause interferencia perjudicial y
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Economic Development Canada license-exempt
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
with access to an unlocked vehicle. RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
following two conditions:
tended is dangerous for a number of pueda causar su operación no deseada.
reasons. A child or others could be severely 1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and NOTE:
injured or killed. Children should be warned
Changes or modifications not expressly
not to touch the parking brake, brake 2. This device must accept any interference approved by the party responsible for compli-
pedal, or the gear selector. Do not leave the received, including interference that may ance could void the user’s authority to operate
key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a loca- cause undesired operation. the equipment.
tion accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If
child could start the vehicle, operate power dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Equipped
windows, other controls, or move the Development applicables aux appareils radio
vehicle. If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will
unlock all the doors when any door is opened if
 Do not leave children or animals inside aux deux conditions suivantes:
the vehicle is stopped and in PARK.
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
heat buildup may cause them to be
brouillage, et for further information.
severely injured or killed
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout Dead Lock Device — If Equipped
General Information brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le The Dead Lock Device is a safety device that
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro- prevents the use of the internal door handles of
mettre le fonctionnement. the vehicle and the power door lock switch.
vehicle: La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las This device prevents the doors from opening
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N siguientes dos condiciones: within the passenger compartment.
Arming The Dead Lock Device Child Locks NOTE:

 The device works on all doors and requires To provide a safer environment for small  When the Child-Protection Door Lock system
two pushes of the lock button on the key fob. children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors is engaged, the door can only be opened by
For vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, the are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock using the outside door handle even though
device will also work by pushing the lock system.
button on the driver’s or passenger’s side
the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi- 2
To use the system, open each rear door, use a tion.
exterior door handle.
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
 After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
 The arming of the device is indicated by three rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position. Lock system, always test the door from the
flashes of the turn signals. When the system on a door is engaged, that inside to make certain it is in the desired
door can only be opened by using the outside position.
 The device does not operate if one or more
door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
doors are not properly closed. After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
unlocked position. 
Disarming The Device system, always test the door from the inside
 The device will automatically disarm by
to make certain it is in the desired position.
pushing the unlock button on the key fob. For  For emergency exit with the system engaged,
vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, the rotate the lock/unlock dial to the unlocked
device will also disarm by using the driver or position, roll down the window, and open the
passenger Passive Entry door handle to door with the outside door handle.
unlock and open the door.
 Placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a colli-
Child-Protection Door Lock Location sion. Remember that the rear doors can only
be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
SEATS Manual Front Seats Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward

Adjustment
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint WARNING! On models equipped with manual seats, the
System of the vehicle.
 Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats,
WARNING! is dangerous. The sudden movement of the near the floor. While sitting in the seat, lift up on
seat could cause you to lose control. The the bar and move the seat forward or rearward.
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, Release the bar once you have reached the
seat belt might not be adjusted properly
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, desired position. Then, using body pressure,
and you could be injured. Adjust the seat
people riding in these areas are more likely
only while the vehicle is parked. move forward and rearward on the seat to be
to be seriously injured or killed.
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of
that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
against your chest. In a collision you could
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
slide under the seat belt and be seriously or
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
even fatally injured. Use the recliner only
ously injured or killed.
when the vehicle is parked.
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar

Height Adjustment mid-track position. Be sure that the front

The driver’s seat height can be raised or seats are fully upright and positioned
lowered by using a lever, located on the forward, this will allow the rear seat to fold
outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the down easily.
lever to raise the seat height or push downward  Prior to folding the rear seat, you must secure 2
on the lever to lower the seat height. the rear armrest in the upright position.
 You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the
Recline Adjustment Lever seats are left folded for an extended period
of time. This is normal and by simply opening
Manual Rear Seat Adjustment the seats to the open position, over time the
seat cushion will return to its normal shape.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the WARNING!
top of the seatback. This could impair visibil-  It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
Height Adjustment Lever ity or become a dangerous projectile in a sud- area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
den stop or collision. collision, people riding in these areas are
Manual Recline Adjustment
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on Split Rear Seats
the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the  Do not allow people to ride in any area of
The split rear seat has the ability to fold flat your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
desired position and release the lever. To return
which increases the storage of the rear cargo and seat belts.
the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and
area.
release the lever.  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
NOTE: and using a seat belt properly.
 Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may be

necessary to position the front seat to its
Cargo Area Enlargement 3. Move the seat belts to the outboard side of Seatback Repositioning
Folding both sides of the rear seat provides the seat and rest them on the seat belt
guide. NOTE:
additional storage in the rear cargo area. If interference from the cargo area prevents the
Proceed as follows: 4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the seatback from fully locking, you will have diffi-
left or right rear seatback completely culty returning the seat to its proper position.
1. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
forward.
2. Move the seat belts to the outboard side of 1. Move the seat belts to the seat belt guides
the seat. on the top edge of the seat to ensure the
seatbacks properly latch.
3. Pull the seatback release lever to fold both
sides of the rear seatbacks completely 2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back until
forward. they lock on both the latches. Verify the red
notches are no longer visible on the release
Partial Enlargement Of The Cargo Area lever. If the red notches are visible, the
Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area seatback is not secure.
allows you to carry a single passenger on the
right side of the rear seat, while the
Rear Seat Release
enlargement of the right side allows you to carry
1 — Seat Belt Guide
two passengers.
2 — Seatback Release Lever
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped). Refer
to “Cargo Area Features” in “Liftgate” in
this chapter for details.
2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.
Power Adjustment (Front) — If Equipped Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward Reclining The Seatback
The power seat controls are located on the The seat can be adjusted both forward and The angle of the seatback can be adjusted
outboard side of the seat, close to the floor. rearward. Push the seat switch forward or forward or rearward. Push the recline switch
rearward. The seat will move in the direction of forward or rearward, the seat will move in the
the switch. Release the switch when the desired direction of the switch. Release the switch when
2
position has been reached. the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down WARNING!
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or  Adjusting a seat while driving may be
down. Pull upward or push downward on the dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
seat switch; the seat will move in the direction could result in loss of control which could
of the switch. Release the switch when the cause a collision and serious injury or
desired position has been reached. death.
Power Seat Switches Tilting The Seat Up Or Down — If Equipped  Seats should be adjusted before fastening
1 — Power Seat Adjustment Switch The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted the seat belts and while the vehicle is
2 — Power Seat Recline Switch up or down. Pull upward or push downward on parked. Serious injury or death could result
3 — Power Lumbar Switch the front of the seat switch. The front of the seat from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
cushion will move in the direction of the switch.  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so
Use the switch to move the seat up/down, Release the switch when the desired position that the shoulder belt is no longer resting
forward/rearward, tilt (if equipped) and to set has been reached. against your chest. In a collision you could
the angle of the seatback.
slide under the seat belt, which could result
in serious injury or death.
 Press the heated seat button a second

CAUTION! WARNING!
time to turn the LO setting on.
Do not place any article under a power seat  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
or impede its ability to move as it may cause  Press the heated seat button a third time skin because of advanced age, chronic
damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may to turn the heating elements off. illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
become limited if movement is stopped by an tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
obstruction in the seat’s path. ical condition must exercise care when
automatically switch to LO-level after
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
approximately 145 minutes of continuous
Power Lumbar Adjustment— If Equipped even at low temperatures, especially if
operation. At that time, the display will change
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase used for long periods of time.
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
or decrease the lumbar support. Push the LO-level setting will turn off automatically after  Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
switch upward or downward to raise or lower the approximately 60 minutes. back that insulates against heat, such as a
lumbar support. blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
NOTE: heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated been overheated could cause serious
Power seat adjustments are only allowed when seats to operate. burns due to the increased surface
the ignition is in the ON position, and for about
temperature of the seat.
30 minutes after it is placed in the OFF position. Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,
Heated Seats — If Equipped
when turning on the vehicle the driver’s heated
The heated seat buttons are located in your seat will automatically turn on when
vehicle’s touchscreen or on the instrument temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C).
panel. Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or
You can choose between two heating levels: disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
 Press the heated seat button once to turn “Multimedia” for further information.
the HI setting on.
Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40 The center part of the rear seat can also be
used as a rear armrest with cupholders.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Pull the rear armrest tab to release it from the Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
seat and pull forward. of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint 2
is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
 All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
Rear Armrest With Cupholders their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
Armrest Tab Location WARNING! crash.
Be certain that the seatback is securely  Head restraints should never be adjusted
locked into position. If the seatback is not while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
securely locked into position the seat will not vehicle with the head restraints improperly
provide the proper stability for child seats adjusted or removed could cause serious
and/or passengers. An improperly latched injury or death in the event of a collision.
seat could cause serious injury.
Fold Center Armrest Forward

Front Head Restraints To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
WARNING! head restraint.
Your vehicle is equipped with front driver and
 All occupants, including the driver, should To lower the head restraint, push the
passenger head restraints.
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s adjustment button, located at the base of the
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the seat until the head restraints are placed in head restraint, and push downward on the head
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, their proper positions in order to minimize restraint.
push the adjustment button, located at the the risk of neck injury in the event of a
base of the head restraint, and push downward crash.
on the head restraint.
 Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
Rear Head Restraints

Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard Adjustment Buttons
head restraints and one center head restraint
for its rear passengers. The rear head restraints NOTE:
Head Restraint Adjustment Button can be raised or lowered. When the center seat The head restraints should only be removed by
is being occupied, the head restraint should be qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
NOTE:
in the raised position. When there are no If either of the head restraints require removal,
The head restraints should only be removed by
occupants in the center seat, the head restraint see an authorized dealer.
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal, can be lowered for maximum visibility for the
see an authorized dealer. driver.
STEERING WHEEL To lock the steering column in position, pull the

tilt/telescoping lever upward until fully
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column engaged. when turning on the vehicle the heated steering
This feature allows you to tilt the steering wheel will automatically turn on when
WARNING! temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C).
column upward or downward. It also allows you 2
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The Do not adjust the steering column while driv- Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or
tilt/telescoping lever is located below the ing. Adjusting the steering column while driv- disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
steering wheel at the end of the steering ing or driving with the steering column “Multimedia” for further information.
column. unlocked, could cause the driver to lose con-
trol of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warn- WARNING!
ing may result in serious injury or death.  Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
The steering wheel contains a heating element tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
that helps warm your hands in cold weather. ical conditions must exercise care when
The heated steering wheel has only one using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
especially if used for long periods.
wheel switch has been turned on, it will stay
on for an average of 80 minutes or more before  Do not place anything on the steering wheel
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
automatically shutting off. This time will vary that insulates against heat, such as a
To unlock the steering column, push the tilt/ blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
based on environmental temperatures. The
telescoping lever downward (toward the floor). and material. This may cause the steering
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel heater to overheat.
not turn on when the steering wheel is already
wheel upward or downward as desired. To
warm. The heated steering wheel control button
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
is located in your vehicle’s touchscreen or on
the steering wheel outward or push it inward as
the instrument panel.
desired.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in
the Apps menu of your 8.4-inch touchscreen,
Introducing Voice Recognition you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not,
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key system.
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to Get Started
control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
system. The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Uconnect 4 Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
 Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
 Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep,
Uconnect 3 then say your Voice Command.
 You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
Uconnect 4C NAV current category.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
Voice Recognition system’s status. brouillage, et
General Information 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this brouillage est susceptible d'en compro- 2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
Rules and with Innovation, Science, and siguientes dos condiciones:
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call and
following two conditions: cause interferencia perjudicial y
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin 1. This device may not cause harmful 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
Radio, Media, Navigation And Climate Functions interference, and cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
Basic Voice Commands 2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may NOTE:
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
approved by the party responsible for compli-
Push the VR button . After the beep, say: Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR ance could void the user’s authority to operate
 “Cancel” to stop a current voice session. dÌnnovation, Science and Economic the equipment.
 “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
Commands. aux deux conditions suivantes:
 “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Additional Information the mirror is set in the day position (toward the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the
windshield). right of the button does not illuminate.
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
Mirror Adjustment Dimming Mirror
MIRRORS
NOTE: NOTE:
Inside Day/Night Mirror
The mirror will automatically release in the This feature is disabled when the vehicle’s
The mirror can be adjusted up, down, left, and event of heavy contact with a passenger. transmission has been placed in REVERSE.
right. The mirror should be adjusted to center
on the view through the rear window. Headlight Auto Dimming Mirror — If Equipped Outside Mirrors
glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight Power Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped
by moving the lever under the mirror to the night glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the
The power mirror switch is located on the
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The feature on or off by pushing the button at the
driver’s door panel.
mirror should be adjusted while the lever under base of the mirror. A light to the left of the
button will illuminate to indicate when the To adjust the mirror, rotate the mirror selection
switch to the left or to the right and then push
the mirror adjustment switch in the four
directions indicated by arrows.
NOTE: Manual Adjustment Mirrors — If Equipped

 To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must To adjust the exterior mirrors, push the corners
be in the ON/RUN position. of the mirrors till desired alignment is obtained.
 The power mirror switches will remain active

for up to three minutes after the ignition is 2
placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
 Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the
control to the neutral position to avoid acci- Folding Exterior Mirror
dental movements. Power Folding/Unfolding Mirrors — If Equipped
Push the mirror fold/unfold switch briefly to fold
or unfold the exterior mirrors.
Manual Adjustment Mirror
To fold or unfold the exterior mirrors, the
Folding Mirror ignition must be in the ON/RUN position.
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the NOTE:
mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid The fold/unfold mirrors switch will remain
damage. The mirror has three detent positions: active for up to three minutes after the ignition
full forward, normal and full rearward. is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
Power Mirror Switch
1 — Mirror Selector Switch
2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
3 — Power Folding Mirror Switch
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped EXTERIOR LIGHTS Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — If

These mirrors are heated to melt frost Equipped
Headlights
or ice. This feature can be activated The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs), if enabled
whenever you turn on the Rear The headlight switch is located on the left side through Uconnect Settings, will turn on when
Window Defroster. Refer to “Climate Controls” of the instrument panel. The headlight switch the instrument cluster is on and remain on
in this chapter for further information. controls the operation of the headlights, side unless the headlights are turned on or the
marker and parking lights, daytime running instrument cluster is switched off.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
lights, fog lights and the dimming of the In the bulb lighting version, the DRLs will be
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on each instrument cluster and interior lighting. disabled during turn signal operation and
sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor
resume operation when the turn signal
down and swing the mirror cover upward. The
operation has ended.
lights will turn on automatically. Closing the
mirror cover will turn the light off. High Beams
To turn on the high beam headlights, push the
turn signal lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) and an indicator will illuminate in the
cluster. To turn off the high beams, pull the turn
signal lever rearward (toward the rear of the
vehicle).
Headlight Switch
Turning on the headlights will illuminate the
instrument cluster and the controls located on
the instrument panel.
Vanity Mirror
1 — Mirror Light
2 — Mirror Cover
automatic system off, move the headlight NOTE:

switch out of the AUTO position.
 The multifunction lever must be in the high
NOTE: beam position in order to activate the Auto-
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position matic High Beams.
before the headlights will come on in the auto-
 The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control 2
matic mode.
can be turned on or off using the Uconnect
Light Sensor System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
The light sensor is equipped with an infrared “Multimedia” for further information.
High Beam And Turn Signal Controls LED, located on the windshield. It detects  Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
changes in light intensity outside the vehicle, taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
NOTE:
based on the sensitivity of light set by using the cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
The headlights must be on for the high beams
menu on the display or on the Uconnect system. to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
to activate.
The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the amount obstructions on the windshield or camera
Flash-To-Pass of external light required for controlling the lens will cause the system to function improp-
lighting. erly.
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — When set to AUTO, the system automatically
lever toward you. This will cause the headlights If Equipped turns the headlights on or off based on ambient
to turn on at high beam and remain on until the light levels.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
lever is released.
system provides increased forward lighting at Parking Lights
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped night by automating high beam control through Rotate the headlight switch to the first detent to
This system automatically turns the headlights the use of a digital camera mounted on the turn on the parking lights. The parking light
on or off according to ambient light levels. To inside rearview mirror. This camera detects indicator in the instrument cluster display will
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch vehicle specific light and automatically switches illuminate.
clockwise to the last detent (AUTO position) for from high beams to low beams until the
automatic headlight operation. To turn the approaching vehicle is out of view.
Headlight Delay NOTE: Cornering Lights

The lights must be turned off within two minutes The cornering lights are a feature to improve
This feature provides the safety of headlight
of placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF position visibility at night while turning the vehicle. When
illumination for up to 90 seconds when leaving
to activate this feature. activated, a light incorporated in the front fog
your vehicle in an unlit area.
light will illuminate on the side of the vehicle the
The time delay of the headlights is programmable Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
steering wheel is rotated or the turn signal
between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds. Refer to The front fog light switch is built into the indicator is on. It can be activated through the
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further headlight switch. Uconnect System.
information.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
Headlight Delay Activation the parking lights or the low beam for further information.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition headlights and push the fog light
in the STOP/OFF position while the headlights button on the headlight switch. The front fog Turn Signals
are still on. The delay interval begins when the lights feature is latching, which means that Move the multifunction lever up or down and
headlight switch is turned off from the low beam every time that the button is pressed and the the arrows on each side of the instrument
position. fog lights are activated, the vehicle memorizes cluster flash to show proper operation of the
the request and re-activates the front fog lights
If the headlight switch is in AUTO position and front and rear turn signal lights.
every time that the parking lights or low beams
headlights were on before the ignition is STOP/
are active. To deactivate the feature, push the NOTE:
OFF, the delay interval begins automatically.
front fog button again. The front fog lights are In the bulb lighting version, if the Daytime Running
Headlight Delay Deactivation deactivated each time the parking or low beam Lights are on and a turn signal is activated, the
The feature is disabled by turning on the lights are deactivated or the ignition is placed in Daytime Running Lamp will turn off on the side of
headlights, the parking lights or by placing the the OFF position. the vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing. The
ignition in the RUN position. An indicator light in the instrument cluster Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on when the
If you shut off the lights before the ignition is illuminates when the fog lights are turned on. turn signal is turned off.
turned on, they will turn off in the normal NOTE:
manner. The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. Selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Lane Change Assist instrument panel lights, door map pocket lights, Front Lights
and cubby bin lights. The courtesy lights are mounted between the
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving
beyond the detent, and the turn signal (left or With the parking lights or headlights on, rotate sun visors above the rear view mirror. The light
right) will flash to signal other drivers of a lane the instrument panel dimmer control upward or switches are used to turn the lights on or off.
change, then automatically turn off. downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the instrument panel. The
2
Courtesy Lights instrument panel dimmer has two positions at
The Courtesy Lights feature allows you to activate the top of the thumb wheel. The first top detent
the low beam, parking lights, and sidemarker position puts the interior lighting into daytime
lights for 25 seconds when the vehicle is unlocked mode and the very top detent position
(through the key fob or the Passive Entry door illuminates all the interior lights. The bottom
handles [if equipped]). The Courtesy Lights detent position of the instrument panel dimmer
feature can be activated or deactivated through dims the internal backlights to their lowest
the Uconnect Settings. When a door is open with dimmable setting and disables the interior
the feature active, the activation of the lights is lights. Driver’s Courtesy Lights
extended for 10 seconds. The feature is disabled
when the vehicle is locked or when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy Lights
Interior Lights Dimmer Switch
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the ambient light located in the Headlight Switch Courtesy Light Switches
overhead console, door handle lights, lower 1 — Ambient Light Control 1— Left Switch
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer 2— Right Switch
To operate the courtesy lights, push either the Vehicles With Retractable Roof Timing Entering The Vehicle
driver or passenger light switch. For vehicles equipped with a retractable roof, The dome lights illuminate in the following ways:
NOTE: there are two interior lights located above the  When the doors are unlocked, the dome light
grab handles of the rear doors. will illuminate for approximately 27 seconds.
 Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
interior lights are turned off. This will prevent  When one of the doors is opened, the dome
the battery from discharging once the doors light will illuminate for approximately three
are closed. minutes.
 If a light is left on, it will automatically be  When the doors are closed, the dome light
turned off after approximately 15 minutes will automatically shut off after approxi-
after the ignition is in the OFF position. mately 27 seconds.
Rear Lights The timing stops once the ignition is placed in

Push the button on the rear dome light once to the ON/RUN position.
turn the light on, and the lights will remain on at all Rear Interior Light The dome light will turn off under any of the
times. Push the button a second time to turn the The lights come on by opening any of the doors. following conditions:
light off, and the lights will remain off at all times.  The dome light is disabled when the ignition
Dome Light Timing is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The Dome Light will automatically illuminate
 The dome lights will turn off automatically
when the doors are unlocked, the doors are
when the doors are locked.
opened or after the doors are closed.
 The dome lights will automatically turn off
after approximately 15 minutes of inactivity
to preserve the battery.
Rear Dome Light Button

Timing Exiting The Vehicle Windshield Washer Operation

The dome light will illuminate under the To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and
following conditions when the ignition is placed hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
to the OFF position and the key is removed: while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will
 The dome light will illuminate for 27 seconds turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the lever is released, and then resume the
2
after the ignition is placed in the OFF posi-
tion. intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the
 The opening of one of the doors (approxi-
off position, the wipers will operate for several
mately three minutes).
Windshield Wiper Lever wipe cycles, then turn off.
 After closing a door (approximately 27
seconds). CAUTION! WARNING!
Always remove any buildup of snow that pre- Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
The dome light timing is disabled when the
vents the windshield wiper blades from shield could lead to a collision. You might not
doors are locked.
returning to the “park” position. If the wind- see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
WIPERS AND WASHERS shield wiper switch is turned off, and the avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
blades cannot return to the “park” position, freezing weather, warm the windshield with
The windshield wiper/washer controls are damage to the wiper motor may occur. the defroster before and during windshield
located on the lever on the right side of the
washer use.
steering column. The front wipers are operated Front Wiper Operation
by rotating a switch, located on the end of the
Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of the
lever.
two detent positions for intermittent settings,
the third detent for low wiper operation and the
fourth for high wiper operation.
Mist This function can be activated or deactivated by windscreen, blocking the blades in ice/snow
Use this feature when weather conditions make the Uconnect Settings through the radio. Refer conditions). The user can activate the Rain
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Push to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for Sensing Wipers in three ways:
the lever upward to the MIST position and further information.  Moving the lever in off position and then to
release for a single wiping cycle. an intermittent position.
NOTE:  One MIST command actuation.
The Mist feature does not activate the washer
 The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h)
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
and the rain sensor detects the presence of
on the windshield. The wash function must be
rain.
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid. NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with automatic transmis-
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped sion, the Rain Sensing Wipers will become inac-
This feature senses moisture on the windshield Rain Sensor tive even if the lever is in one of the intermittent
and automatically activates the wipers for the positions if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
driver. The feature is especially useful for road and the vehicle speed is less than 3 mph
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
splash or overspray from the windshield (5 km/h). This prevents damage to the wind-
position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of shield wipers during an automatic car wash.
delay position two is the most sensitive. Place
the multifunction lever to one of the two detent
the wiper switch in the off position when not NOTE:
positions for intermittent settings, to activate
using the system.
this feature.  The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
Rain Sensing Wipers – Inhibition
when the wiper switch is in the low or
NOTE: When the user changes the ignition position high-speed position.
If the end of the multifunction lever rotates from from OFF to ON/RUN with the lever already in
off to the first intermittent setting or from the the intermittent position, no wipe cycle is  The Rain Sensing feature may not function
first intermittent setting to the second intermit- performed for safety reasons. This temporary properly when ice, or dried salt water is
tent setting, the wipers will perform a round up inhibition avoids accidental activations of the present on the windshield.
to clean the windshield. wiping (e.g during the hand washing of the
 Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or front and rear wipers to sync up. Turning the defroster automatically turns off after
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor- front wipers off will cause the rear wipers to also approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut
mance. stop. the defroster off, push the button a second
To use the washer, push the lever time.
 The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
forward and hold while spray is Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
desired. If the lever is pushed while in
2
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,
further information. the intermittent setting, the wiper will when turning on the vehicle the driver’s heated
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after seat will automatically turn on when
Rear Wiper Operation the end of the lever is released, and then temperatures are below 40°F (4.4°C).
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on resume the intermittent interval previously Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or
the lever on the right side of the steering selected. disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the off “Multimedia” for further information.
rotating a switch, located at the middle of the position, the wiper will operate for several wipe
lever. cycles, then turn off. CAUTION!
NOTE: NOTE: Failure to follow these cautions can cause
If the front wiper is moving and the vehicle is As a protective measure, the pump will stop if damage to the heating elements:
shifted in REVERSE, the rear wiper will perform the switch is held for more than 30 seconds.  Use care when washing the inside of the
one round up to clean the rear window. Once the lever is released, the pump will rear window. Do not use abrasive window
resume normal operation. cleaners on the interior surface of the
Rotate the center portion of the lever
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
upward to the first detent for Rear Window Defroster
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
intermittent operation and to the The rear window defroster button is heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
second detent for continuous rear wiper located with the Climate Controls on after soaking with warm water.
operation. If the front wiper is set to Automatic the instrument panel. Push this
(Continued)
Mode (on the wiper lever as well as “Enabled” button to turn on the rear window defroster. An
through Uconnect settings), placing the rear indicator in the button will illuminate when the
wiper in an intermittent position will cause the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
CAUTION! (Continued)
 Activation By Remote Start Operation —
When Remote Start is active and the outside
CLIMATE CONTROLS
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or ambient temperature is less than 40°F The Climate Control System allows you to
abrasive window cleaners on the interior (4.4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will be regulate the temperature, air flow amount or air
surface of the window. enabled. Upon exiting remote start mode the flow speed, and direction of air circulating
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will remain on. throughout the vehicle. The controls are located
 Keep all objects a safe distance from the on the touchscreen (if equipped) and on the
Remote Start Operation can be enabled or
window. instrument panel below the radio.
disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped “Multimedia” for further information. Air Outlet And Diffuser Locations —
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield Auto-On Rear Window Defroster/Windshield Passenger Compartment
Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
under the following conditions: When placing the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/
 Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield RUN position, the Rear Window Defroster and
Wiper De-Icer will be activated automatically Windshield Wiper De-Icer will automatically turn
in the case of a cold weather manual start on when the outside ambient temperature is
with full front defrost, and the ambient less than 40°F (4.4°C).
temperature is below 40°F (4.4°C). The Rear Window Defroster and Windshield
 Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield Wiper De-Icer automatically turn off after
Wiper De-Icer will be activated automatically approximately 20 minutes. To manually shut
when the rear defrost is turned on and the the defroster/windshield off, push the button a
Left Side Air Outlets
ambient temperature is below 40°F (4.4°C). second time.
1 — Adjustable Air Outlet
Auto On can be enabled or disabled. Refer to
2 — Air Vane Adjustment
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
3 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
information.
4 — Fixed Air Outlet
Manual Climate Controls Overview
Center Air Outlets Right Side Air Outlets

1 — Fixed Air Outlet 1 — Fixed Air Outlet
Manual Climate Controls
2 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment 2 — Adjustable Air Outlet
3 — Air Vane Adjustment 3 — Air Vane Adjustment
4 — Adjustable Air Outlet 4 — Air Flow Outlet Adjustment
Manual Climate Control Descriptions

Icon Description
MAX A/C Control

MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Rotate the Temperature Control Knob counterclockwise until
it is set to MAX A/C. In MAX A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.
A/C Button
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning. The A/C LED light illuminates when the A/C is on.
Icon Description
Recirculation Button
Push the Recirculation button on the Blower Control knob to change the system between recirculation mode and outside
air mode. The Recirculation LED light illuminates when Recirculation mode is on.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or humidity are present. Recirculation can
be used in all modes except for Defrost. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selec-
tion. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended
use of this mode is not recommended.
Rear Defrost Button

Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button on the Mode Control knob to turn on the rear window defroster and the
heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the Rear Defrost is on.
Temperature Control
Use the Temperature Control Knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the
knob counterclockwise, from the top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the
knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperature.
Blower Control
Rotate the control knob to regulate the amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower speed
increases as you move the control clockwise from the “O” (off) position.
Modes Control Knob

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy condi-
tions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Automatic Climate Control Overview
Uconnect 4 with 7-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

Uconnect 4C NAV with 8.4-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

Automatic Climate Control Descriptions

Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Push the button to turn on the MAX A/C setting. In MAX A/C,
the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. 2
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Push the A/C control button to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when the A/C is ON. Pushing the AUTO
control button will cause the A/C operation to change to AUTO mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between recir-
culation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touch-
screen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. Continuous use of the Recir-
culation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not
recommended.
AUTO Button
Pushing this button will automatically control the interior cabin temperature by adjusting the airflow temperature, distribu-
tion and amount. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate controls to change between manual mode and
automatic mode. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Icon Description
Front Defrost Button
The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is
on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level
may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button

Push the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The indica-
tor will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.
Faceplate Knob
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touch-
screen.
 Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
Touchscreen Buttons
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
 Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Icon Description
Driver and Passenger Temperature Control

Push these buttons to regulate the temperature of the driver and passenger settings independently. Pushing the blue arrow 2
indicates cooler temperatures, while pushing the red button indicates warmer temperatures.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this
feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Knob
Mode Control
Faceplate: Push the Mode Button to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so
air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Touchscreen Mode But- Touchscreen: Press one of the “MODE” buttons to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can
ton be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Icon Description
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There are shut off wheels located below the air vanes, above the center air outlet, and next to the passenger air
outlet to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy condi-
tions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button

This button turns the Climate Control System off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) To provide you with maximum comfort in the Operating Tips
automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the
Automatic Operation blower fan will remain on low until the engine NOTE:
warms up. The fan will engage immediately if Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC suggested control settings for various weather
panel. The system regulates the amount of the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing the
front blower knob setting. conditions. 2
airflow.
Climate Voice Commands Summer Operation
2. Adjust the temperature you would like the
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and The engine cooling system must be protected
system to maintain, by adjusting the driver,
keep everyone comfortable while you keep with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
and passenger temperatures. Once the
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with proper corrosion protection and to protect
desired temperature is displayed, the
climate control.) against engine overheating. OAT coolant
system will achieve and automatically
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
maintain that comfort level. Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
the beep, say one of the following commands: Winter Operation
level, it is not necessary to change the  “Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees” To ensure the best possible heater and
settings. You will experience the greatest defroster performance, make sure the engine
 “Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
efficiency by simply allowing the system to cooling system is functioning properly and the
function automatically. Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may proper amount, type, and concentration of
only be used to adjust the interior temperature coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
NOTE: of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to mode during Winter months is not
It is not necessary to move the temperature adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if recommended, because it may cause window
settings. The system automatically adjusts the equipped. fogging.
temperature, mode, and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
Vacation/Storage Cabin Air Filter

CAUTION!
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of The climate control system filters out dust and
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, Failure to follow these cautions can cause pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
run the air conditioning system at idle for about damage to the heating elements: dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting  Use care when washing the inside of the have it replaced when needed.
on high. This will ensure adequate system rear window. Do not use abrasive window
lubrication to minimize the possibility of Rear Window Defrosting
cleaners on the interior surface of the
compressor damage when the system is started window. Use a soft cloth and a mild Push and release the rear window defrost
again. washing solution, wiping parallel to the button to turn the function on/off.
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off Activation of this function is indicated by the
Window Fogging after soaking with warm water. rear defrost indicator light on the instrument
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in panel turning on. If equipped, push the rear
 Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the defrost button to activate the defrosting of door
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and mirrors and heated rear window.
surface of the window.
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long  Keep all objects a safe distance from the CAUTION!
periods, as fogging may occur. window.
To avoid causing damage to the rear window
Outside Air Intake defroster heating filaments do not affix stick-
ers or other objects to the inside of the rear
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
glass.
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Air Recirculation System Maintenance

CONTROL
Push and release the Air Recirculation button so In Winter, the Climate Control system must be WEATHER
SETTINGS
that the LED is on, to enter recirculation mode. turned on at least once a month for
It is recommended to turn the internal air approximately 10 minutes. Operate in posi-
Cool Sunny
recirculation on while standing in traffic or in tion.
Have the system inspected at an authorized 2
tunnels to prevent the introduction of polluted dealership before the Summer. Set the mode control
air. Cool & Humid Condi- to and turn
NOTE: tions on to keep windows
Do not use the function for a long period of time,
This AC system uses R1234yf Refrigerant. clear.
particularly if there are many passengers in the
vehicle, to prevent the windows from misting Operating Tips Chart Set the mode control
up. to the position. If
CONTROL windshield fogging
NOTE: WEATHER Cold Weather
SETTINGS starts to occur, move
Internal air recirculation makes it possible to
Set the mode control the control to the
reach the required heating or cooling conditions
to , on, and position.
quickly depending on the mode selected. Do not
use the internal air recirculation function on blower on high. Roll
Hot Weather And
rainy/cold days as it would considerably down the windows for
Vehicle Interior Is Very
increase the possibility of the windows misting. a minute to flush out
Hot
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Turn on and set
Warm Weather the mode control to
the position.
WINDOWS NOTE:
WARNING!
Power Window Controls  If the Remote Start functionality is active, it is
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
not possible to move any windows.
The power window switch is located on the and do not let children play with power win-
driver’s door panel. The driver’s power window  The power window switches will remain dows. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
switch controls the operation of all the windows. active for up to three minutes after the igni- vehicle, or in a location accessible to children,
tion is placed in the OFF position. Opening and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
either front door will cancel this feature. equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC
or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the
Power Window Switches front and rear passenger doors window
There are single window controls on each switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Power Window Lockout Switch
passenger door trim panel, which operate the Push the window switch down for half a second
passenger door windows. The window controls Push the Power Window Lockout switch to
disable rear passenger window controls. When and release. The window will go down
will operate only when the ignition is in the ON/ automatically.
RUN position. this feature is active, the LED light will
illuminate and only the driver can operate the To stop the window from going all the way down
rear passenger windows. To undo this feature, during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
push the switch again and the LED will turn off. down on the switch briefly.
To open the window part way (manually), push
the window switch down briefly and release.
Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
WARNING! open or partially open positions. This is a normal
Protection — If Equipped
There is no auto-reverse protection when the occurrence and can be minimized. If the
The driver door power window switch and the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
front passenger door window switch have an
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fin- open the front and rear windows together to
Auto-Up feature.
gers and all objects from the window path minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs 2
Pull the window switch up, for about half a before closing. with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
second, and release and the window will go up opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
automatically. window.
Reset Auto-Up
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, pull up or push Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the POWER MY SKY SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
down on the switch briefly. window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up: Power My Sky Operation
To close the window part way (manually), pull
the window switch up briefly and release it. Open/Close The Front Panel
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold The power My Sky switches are located on the
NOTE: overhead console. The switches are used to
the switch up for an additional two seconds
 If the window runs into any obstacle during after the window is closed. open and close the front panel.
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and
then go back down. Remove the obstacle and 2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
use the window switch again to close the the window completely and continue to hold
window. the switch down for an additional two
seconds after the window is fully open.
 Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpect- Wind Buffeting
edly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull Wind buffeting can be described as the
the switch and hold to close the window
perception of pressure on the ears or a
manually.
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows Front Panel Operation Switch
Venting The Front Panel Sunroof Reinitialization

To vent the front panel push and release the The following procedure must be followed to
vent switch. reinitialize the sunroof and calibrate obstacle
During the vent operation any push on the detection:
open/close switch will stop the closing of the 1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
panel.
2. Push and hold the front panel close switch
NOTE: until the sunroof panel is fully closed, then
 If the My Sky is in open position, the vent release the switch.
Operation Switch switch must be held until the panel vents. 3. Open the driver side front door.
1 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
 The power roof controls will operate only
2 — Front Panel Vent Switch 4. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
To automatically retract the front panel to the 5. After 10 seconds, place the ignition back in
 If the Remote Start functionality is active, it
open position, push the open/close button and the ON/RUN position.
will not be possible to move the roof.
release. From the fully open position, pull the 6. Push and hold the front panel close switch
open/close switch and release. The front panel Auto-Reverse Feature
again. The reinitialization process will begin
will close completely. The front panel of the retractable roof is within 10 seconds. Do not release the
To stop the movement of the front panel during equipped with an auto-reverse safety system switch.
automatic closing or opening, briefly push the that is able to detect the presence of an
open/close switch. obstacle during the opening and closing motion 7. The sunroof will stop and an audible “click”
of the panel. will be heard.
When this event occurs, the front panel stops 8. Release the front panel close switch, then
and reverses immediately. push and hold it again within 5 seconds. Do
NOTE: not release the switch.
With both panels removed the retractable roof
cannot be opened or closed.
9. As the front panel close switch is held, the Wind Buffeting

sunroof panel will cycle to the fully open
Wind buffeting can be described as the
position and then back to the fully closed
position again.
10. Once all sunroof motion has stopped, may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows 2
release the front panel close switch. down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Sunroof reinitialization and obstacle open or partially open positions. This is a normal
calibration is now complete. occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
NOTE: Emergency Key And Key Hole then open the front and rear windows together
If the switch is released prior to the sunroof 1 — Key Hole to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
completing the above procedure, the entire 2 — Allen Key with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
process must be repeated. opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Emergency Open/Close CAUTION!
If the power My Sky switch fails, the retractable  When refitting panels, be careful to avoid
roof can be operated manually as follows: fingers, scarves, ties and items of clothing
from getting caught under the panels them-
1. Remove the protective cap located on the selves.
inner lining.
 Do not open the roof in the presence of
2. Remove the Allen Key or My Sky Key that is snow or ice. There is risk of damage.
supplied in the tool bag in the cargo area.
3. Insert the Allen Key or My Sky Key into the
key hole and turn it clockwise to open the
roof or counter-clockwise to close.
POWER GLASS SUNROOF WITH POWER WARNING!

Opening
SHADE — IF EQUIPPED  Never leave children unattended in a Opening Sunroof

The power sunroof switches are located vehicle, or with access to an unlocked To retract the sunroof to the open position, push
between the sun visors on the overhead vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near the Open/Close switch and the sunroof will fully
console. the vehicle, or in a location accessible to open. The sunroof can be stopped in any
children. Do not leave the ignition of a position by pushing/pulling the switch a second
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go time while opening.
in the ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become Venting Sunroof
entrapped by the power sunroof while oper- To vent the sunroof push the Vent switch.
ating the power sunroof switch. Such
NOTE:
entrapment may result in serious injury or
The vent switch has the automatic function only
death.
at the opening of the sunroof. During the closing
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being of the sunroof, the switch must be held until
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. closed.
Power Sunroof Switches You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and Closing
1 — Power Sunshade Open/Close
make sure all passengers are also properly
2 — Power Sunroof Open/Close Closing Sunroof
secured.
3 — Venting Sunroof To close the sunroof completely, pull the Open/
 Do not allow small children to operate the Close switch and the sunroof will fully close. The
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other sunroof can be stopped in any position by
body parts, or any object, to project through pushing/pulling the switch a second time while
the sunroof opening. Injury may result. it is closing.
Wind Buffeting Closing Power Shade — Automatic Mode

WARNING!
Wind buffeting can be described as the Pull the shade switch for about one-half second
and the shade will automatically close. During  Do not let children play with the sunroof.
the automatic close operation, any movement Never leave children unattended in a
of the shade switch will stop the shade. vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows 2
vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition of
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
To close the shade part way (manually), pull the a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
shade switch briefly and release. in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
particularly unattended children, can
then open the front and rear windows together NOTE: become entrapped by the power sunroof
to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs while operating the power sunroof switch.
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof  The sunroof and the shade controls will
operate only when the ignition is in the ON/ Such entrapment may result in serious
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any injury or death.
window. RUN position.
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
Power Sun Shade  If the Remote Start functionality is active, it is
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
not possible to move the sunroof.
Opening Power Shade — Automatic Mode You could also be severely injured or killed.
Auto Reverse Feature Always fasten your seat belt properly and
Push the shade switch for about one-half make sure all passengers are properly
second and the shade will automatically open. This feature will detect an obstruction in the secured.
During the automatic open operation, any opening of the sunroof during the Automatic
movement of the shade switch will stop the Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of  Do not allow small children to operate the
shade. the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if body parts, or any object to project through
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode this occurs. the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
To open the shade part way (manually), push
the shade switch briefly and release.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel.
HOOD
To Open The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under
Safety Latch Support Rod And Seat
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
1 — Safety Latch Location 1 — Support Rod
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push 2 — Support Rod Seat
the safety latch release lever toward the Remove the support rod from the locking tab
passenger side of the vehicle. The hood and insert it into the seat located on the To Close The Hood
release lever is located behind the center underside of the hood. Be sure the rod is locked
Hold up the hood with one hand, and with the
front edge of the hood. into position.
other hand, remove the support rod from its
seat and reinsert it into the locking tab.
Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches
(30 cm) from the engine compartment and
drop. Make sure that the hood is completely
closed.
Hood Release Lever Locking Tab

WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driv-
ing your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow 2
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
Liftgate Handle Location Emergency Opening Tab Location

CAUTION!
1 — Electronic Liftgate Release 1 — Yellow Tab
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the 2 — Liftgate Passive Entry Location (If Equipped)
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately 4. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to The Liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built slot to trigger the release tab of the liftgate.
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both into the electronic liftgate release. With a valid
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
fully closed, with both latches engaged. liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to
open with one fluid motion.
LIFTGATE Emergency Opening
Opening Proceed as follows:
To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or 1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).
activate the power door lock switches located
2. Fold the rear seats forward.
on the driver door handle.
To open the liftgate, squeeze the electronic 3. Using the supplied screwdriver (located Emergency Release Tab Slot Location
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with under cargo floor in tool kit), remove the 1 — Release Tab Slot
one fluid motion. yellow tab.
Closing NOTE: 3. Clear the pins placed outside of the shelf,

The liftgate unlock feature is built into the elec- and then remove the rear shelf pulling it
Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate
tronic liftgate release. upwards.
lowering the liftgate. Release the handle when
the liftgate reaches self closing position. Cargo Area Features 4. The rear shelf can be stored in the cargo
area, or behind the front seatbacks.
Removable Rear Shelf — If Equipped
To remove rear shelf, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the two links that support the
shelf at the eyelets.
Closing Liftgate
1 — Liftgate Pull Handle Adjusting The Rear Shelf
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key fob because the liftgate Rear Shelf Support Links
may be locked.
1 — Eyelets
To Lock The Liftgate 2 — Links
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless 2. Lift the rear part of the overhead luggage
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button located shelf.
to the right of the outside handle release will
Rear Shelf Pin
lock the vehicle.
Cargo Load Floor The load floor provides securing of any cargo Access To The Loading Floor
The vehicle is equipped with a load floor that inside this position, so that the cargo will not To access the double load compartment,
can be adjusted as needed. slide in the case of sudden braking. proceed as follows:
Position 1 (Lowered Position): 1. Lift up on the Load Floor Handle.
This position allows you to make the load floor 2
flat for ease of loading/unloading objects from
the cargo area. This position also makes it
possible to use the space below as another
compartment for storing fragile or smaller
objects.
Position 2 (Elevated Position):
When the rear seatbacks and front passenger
seat is folded flat, it will allow for loading objects Load Floor
of long dimensions. It is recommended to use
this position only during the actual transporting Load Floor Handle
of the objects, then bring the load floor in 1 — Cargo Load Floor
position 1. 2 — Cargo Load Floor Handle
Table Tilt Load
2. Place the desired objects inside the
In addition to the two positions described
compartment.
above, the load floor can also be placed in a
tilted position, slanted toward the rear
seatbacks as to ease the access to the
underlying zone of the luggage compartment
(e.g. to pick up the spare tire or the Table Tilt Load Supports
Tire Service Kit). 1 — Loading Floor Support One
Place the load floor in a way that it rests at the 2 — Loading Floor Support Two
supports 1 and 2 on the sides of the cargo area.
3. Reposition the load floor. Access To Tire Service Kit Or Spare Tire
To access the Tire Service Kit or spare tire and
container carrier, proceed as follows:
1. Grasp the load floor handle and remove
the floor.
2. Pull the tab and lift up on the carpet.
Anchoring Of The Load

The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area Grocery Hook
floor, should be used to safely secure loads
Cargo Area Storage when the vehicle is moving.
CAUTION!
The load floor must be arranged in a central
position with respect to cargo area.
Displacement Load Floor

To position the load floor from the lower to the
upper position, proceed as follows:
Grocery Hooks
1. Grasp the load floor handle and lift up the
load floor. Tie-Downs
The side panels may be equipped with three
2. Correctly place the load floor on the side
grocery hooks (one on the left side and two on
panel guides and on the rear cross member.
the right side) for securing loads that are not
excessively heavy.
Cargo Box — If Equipped INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Once the glove compartment is open, a light will
turn on to illuminate the compartment.
The cargo area contains a preformed cargo box
that can be used for the storage of objects that Glove Compartment
NOTE:
allows you to obtain a uniform level when The glove compartment is located on the
loading. passenger’s side of the instrument panel.  Do not insert objects in the glove compart-
ment that will not allow the compartment to 2
To open the glove compartment proceed as
fully close.
follows:
 The glove compartment should be
1. Unlock the compartment using the vehicle
completely closed while the vehicle is in
emergency key.
motion.
2. Pull the handle to open the compartment.
Sun Visors
Sun visors are located on both sides of the
rearview mirror. The visors can be lowered or
moved to the side to help block sunlight from
Cargo Box entering the windshield or door glass.
NOTE: To move the sun visor against the driver or
The cargo box is sized for a maximum capacity passenger door glass, remove the sun visor
of distributed weight equal to 242 lbs (110 kg). from the hook and turn it toward the side
window.
Opening The Glove Compartment

1 — Glove Compartment Handle
USB/Media Player Control

This feature allows an external device to be
plugged into the USB port or AUX Jack.
Sun Visor Mirror Sliding Sun Visor

1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover
3. Slide out the sun visor extender for even
more side coverage toward the rear.
The visors also have illuminated vanity mirrors
to allow use in low light conditions. Front USB Port And AUX Jack
Lift upward on the mirror cover to access the 1 — USB Port
mirror. 2 — AUX Jack
Extendible Sun Visor
To extend the sun visor, proceed as follows: Located below the heating ventilation and air
conditioning controls is the front USB port and
1. Place the sun visor against the door glass AUX jack.
by detaching it from the hook and turning it
toward the side window.
2. Slide the visor along the rod to provide Using The Extender
coverage more to the rear.
Rear Center Console USB Port Power Outlets

WARNING!
Located on the rear of the center console is a The front power outlet is located under the
second USB port. To avoid serious injury or death:
center stack of the instrument panel. It only
NOTE: operates with the ignition in the ON/RUN  Only devices designed for use in this type of
Depending on vehicle configuration, the USB position. The power outlet can power mobile outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt 2
phones, electronics and other low power outlet.
port may be charge only, or media file capable.
devices.  Do not touch with wet hands.
 Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Do not connect devices with power higher
Rear Center Console USB (Charge Only) Port — than 180 Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do
If Equipped 12 Volt Power Outlet not damage the socket by using unsuitable
Models equipped with the optional "Smoker adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15 Amp) power rat-
Kit”, will have a cigar lighter instead of the ing is exceeded the fuse protecting the sys-
power outlet. Refer to “Cigar Lighter" in this tem will need to be replaced.
section for further information.
consoles will exceed this power limit, as will

CAUTION! most power tools.
 Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
 Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., F94 Fuse 15A Blue Instrument Panel Power Outlet
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
Power Inverter — If Equipped
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt Power Inverter 115 Volt Power Inverter
greater caution. outlet located on the back of the center console The Power Inverter will automatically turn on
to convert DC current to AC current. The Power and off when the device is plugged in or
 After the use of high power draw accesso-
Inverter can power cellular phones, electronics removed.
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in), and other low power devices requiring up to In order for the Power Inverter to work, the
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient 150 Watts. Certain high-end video game engine must be running and there must be no
length of time to allow the generator to faults detected with the alternator.
recharge the vehicle's battery. The Power Inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the Power Inverter will
automatically shut down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the Power
Inverter it will automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the Power
Inverter.
WARNING! CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death: Do not connect devices with power higher
 Do not insert any objects into the recepta- than 180 Watts (15 Amps) to the socket. Do
cles. not damage the socket by using unsuitable
adaptors. If the 180 Watt (15 Amp) power rat- 2
 Do not touch with wet hands. ing is exceeded the fuse protecting the sys-
 Close the lid when not in use. tem will need to be replaced.
 If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an Ashtray — If Equipped
electric shock and failure. Cigar Lighter
After a few seconds, the lighter automatically NOTE:
Cigar Lighter — If Equipped returns to its initial position and is ready to be Ashtrays can be purchased at an authorized
used. dealer through Mopar parts.
NOTE:
Cigar lighters can be purchased at an autho- WARNING! The ashtray is a plastic container that can be
rized dealer through Mopar parts. placed into one of the cup holders.
When the cigar lighter is in use it becomes
The cigar lighter is located under the center very hot. To avoid serious injury, handle the
stack of the Instrument Panel. Push lighter cigar lighter with care. Always check that the
inward to heat. cigar lighter has turned off.
Ashtray Location
Front Armrest Push the storage handle and lift up the armrest
to access the storage compartment.
The front armrest is located between the front
seats. WARNING!
The armrest can be adjusted by moving it
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
forward or rearward.
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
Cupholders Rear Cupholders

There are two cupholders for the front seat Handle Grip
passengers, located in the center console. The handle grip is located on the passenger
side of the instrument panel. The handle can be
used to enter or exit the vehicle or when
traveling on rough terrain.
Front Armrest
Front Cupholders
There are two cupholders located in the rear
armrest if equipped.
Handle Grip
Storage Compartment
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Roof Cargo must be securely tied down before driv-  Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
Luggage Rack for transporting accessories. ing your vehicle. Improperly secured loads carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
Crossbars should always be used whenever can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
cargo is placed on the Roof Luggage Rack. speeds, resulting in personal injury or prop- natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can 2
Check the straps frequently to be sure that the erty damage. Follow the roof rack cautions add sudden upward lift. It is recommended
load remains securely attached. when carrying cargo on your roof rack. to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
panels or surfboards, which may result in
NOTE:
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized CAUTION!
dealer through Mopar parts. External racks do  Load should always be secured to cross-
not increase the total load carrying capacity of  To avoid damage to the roof rack and bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant and vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy are intended as supplementary tie down
the Roof Luggage Rack, do not exceed the loads as evenly as possible and secure the points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
maximum vehicle load capacity. load appropriately. nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
 Long loads, which extend over the wind- frequently to be sure that the load remains
The load carried on the roof, when equipped securely attached.
shield, should be secured to both the front
with a luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs
and rear of the vehicle.
(68 kg), and it should be uniformly distributed
over the cargo area.  Place a blanket or other protection
Do not use the retractable roof when using the between the surface of the roof and the
load.
crossbars.
(Continued)
78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
Premium Instrument Cluster

Instrument Cluster Descriptions 2. Temperature Gauge  The gauge will likely indicate a higher
 The temperature gauge shows engine temperature when driving in hot weather
1. Tachometer or up mountain grades. It should not be
coolant temperature. Any reading within
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions the normal range indicates that the allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
per minute (RPM x 1000). engine cooling system is operating satis- normal operating range.
factorily.
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Fuel Gauge controls allow you to scroll through and enter

WARNING! the main menus and submenus. You can
 The fuel gauge shows the level of fuel in
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. the fuel tank when the ignition is in the access the specific information you want and
You or others could be badly burned by steam ON/RUN position. make selections and adjustments.
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle  The fuel pump symbol points
to the side of the vehicle where Controls
overheats.
the fuel door is located. The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the
CAUTION! 5. Speedometer
instrument cluster.
 Indicates vehicle speed.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the tempera-
ture gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi- Your vehicle may be equipped with an
tioner turned off until the pointer drops back instrument cluster display, which offers useful
into the normal range. If the pointer remains information to the driver. With the ignition in the
on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately OFF position, opening/closing of a door will
and call an authorized dealer for service. activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your
3. Instrument Cluster Display instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s Instrument Cluster Display Location
 The instrument cluster display features a
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
driver interactive display. Refer to “Instru-
display located on the instrument panel, your
ment Cluster Display” in “Getting To
instrument cluster display can show you how
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
systems are working and give you warnings
information.
when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted
The instrument cluster display menu items  BACK/LEFT Arrow Button

consist of the following:
Push and release the left arrow
 Speedometer
button to access the information
 Vehicle Info screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
 Driver Assist
 OK Button
The OK button may be used to confirm selec- 3
 Fuel Economy
 Trip tion or held to reset specific screens.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
 Stop/Start — If Equipped Oil Change Reset
 UP Arrow Button
 Audio Oil Change Due
Push and release the up arrow Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
 Messages button to scroll upward through the change indicator system. The “Oil Change Due”
main menu and submenus. message will display in the instrument cluster
 Screen Setup
 DOWN Arrow Button display for five seconds after a single chime has
 Settings sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil
Push and release the down arrow
Setting the system allows the driver to select change interval. The engine oil change indicator
button to scroll downward through
information by pushing the following buttons system is duty cycle based, which means the
the main menu and submenus.
mounted on the steering wheel: engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
 RIGHT Arrow Button dependent upon your personal driving style.
Push and release the right arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
Unless reset, this message will continue to Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items  Coolant Temperature — View the engine
display each time the ignition is cycled to the ON coolant temperature.
or RUN position. To reset the oil change NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items  Trans Temperature — View the trans oil
indicator system (after performing the
display in the center of the instrument cluster. temperature.
scheduled maintenance), refer to the following
procedure: Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle
 Oil Temperature — View the oil temperature.
features.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the  Battery Voltage — View the voltage value
ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the Speedometer (state of charge) of the battery.
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the speedometer is displayed in the  Service — View the service status message(s)
start the engine).
instrument cluster display. Push and release (If Equipped).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, the OK button to toggle units (mph or km/h) of Driver Assist — If Equipped
three times within 10 seconds. the speedometer.
Push and release the up or down arrow button
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the Vehicle Info until the Driver Assist menu title displayed is
ENGINE START/STOP button once to return highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position. LaneSense — If Equipped
until “Vehicle Info” is highlighted in the
NOTE: instrument cluster display. Push and release The instrument cluster display displays the
If the indicator message illuminates when you the right arrow button and Coolant Temp will be current LaneSense system settings. The
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator displayed. Push the right or left arrow button to information displayed depends on LaneSense
system did not reset. See an authorized dealer scroll through the following information system status and the conditions that need to
to have the oil life reset. displays: be met.
 Tire Pressure — View the information relating
to the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (If
Equipped).
Fuel Economy  Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time Pushing the left or right arrow button will allow
This menu item allows you to view the fuel of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset. you to scroll through the stored messages.
economy of the vehicle. The following will Hold the OK button to reset feature information. Screen Setup
display:
Stop/Start – If Equipped This menu item allows you to change the
 Range (Miles or km)
position of the information on the display.
 Current Consumption (mpg or L/100km or until the Stop/Start menu title is displayed in Display Gears (Vehicles With Reconfigurable
km/l) the instrument cluster display. Multi-Functional Display And Automatic 3
Transmission)
 Average Consumption (mpg or L/100km or This menu shows messages related to Stop/
km/l) Start. Only one message can be viewed at a By selecting this item, you can select the display
time until the condition is cleared. When the mode, the particulars relating to the automatic
Reset procedure shown at the bottom of the transmission, and choose between the
Stop/ Start is engaged (and the engine is off),
display. following options:
the associated hardware telltale is turned on.
Trip Info Whenever a user pushes the Stop/Start button  “Single digit”
Push and release the up or down arrow button on the central stack, a pop up message of the
The right side of the display will show the
until the Trip menu title is displayed in the Stop/Start status will appear on the instrument
letter concerning the automatic transmission
instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or cluster display.
gear selector (P,R,N or D) position. After
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The Audio approximately two seconds, the letter will be
Trip information will display the following: displayed in a central position.
 Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or until the Audio menu title is displayed in the  “Full PRND”
km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last instrument cluster display.
reset. (Default): The letters PRND will display on the
Stored Messages right side, the position assumed by the gear
 Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average selector will be highlighted in the display.
fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu Icon is highlighted in During the operation in sequential mode
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset. (“AutoStick”), in place of the letter D, the gear
the instrument cluster display. This feature
shows the number of stored warning messages. will be will be displayed.
In The Upper Left/Top Right  Distance Traveled A (Trip A) Vehicles Equipped With Multi-functional Display
The information relating to the following can be Reconfigurable:
 Distance Traveled B (Trip B)
displayed: The following menu/submenu items are
 External temperature Restore Default Settings available in the cluster display.
Selecting this item, and you can reset and “Vehicle Shut Off (If Equipped)”
 Ignition Button — If Equipped restore the default settings. By selecting the item “Vehicle Shut Off”, you can
 Compass — If Equipped turn off the engine from the instrument cluster.
Settings
This feature is available in the event of an
 Date (Month/Day) This menu item allows you to change the
ignition switch failure, and will display
settings for the following:
 Time (Hours/Minutes) instructions for turning off the engine via the
 Display instrument cluster display controls.
In the central area of the display, you can view
all of the information listed above as well as the  Units “Display”
following: By selecting the “Display,” you can access the
 Clock and Date
 Compass — If Equipped
following setting:
 Security  Language: allows you to select the language
 Speed Display — If Equipped in which to display the information/warnings.
 Safety and Assistance
 Date (Day/Month/Year) “Units Of Measure”
 Lights
 Time By selecting the item “Units of Measure,” you
 Doors and Locks can select the unit of measure to use for
 Compass — If Equipped displaying various magnitudes.
NOTE:
 Ignition Button — If Equipped Some items may be displayed and managed Possible options are:
through the Uconnect system.  US
 External Temp — If equipped
 Menu Item  Metric
 Custom
“Clock & Date” Driver may also turn the Speed Warning  Cornering lights: activate/deactivate the
By selecting the item, “Clock & Date” you can “OFF” should you choose not to use this cornering lights (If Equipped)
adjust the clock. feature.
 Interior Ambient lights: adjust the level of
Possible options are:  Seat Belt Reminder: interior ambient lights
 Set Time: adjust hours/minutes This function is only viewable when the Seat  Greeting Lights: activate / deactivate
 Set Format: adjust the time format “12h” Belt Reminder (SBR) system is active. greeting lights
(12 hours) or “24h” (24 hours)  Hill Start Assist: 3
“Doors & Locks”
 Set Date: adjust day/month/year Activation/Deactivation of the Hill Start By selecting the item “Doors & Locks,” you can
Assist system. make the following adjustments:
“Security”
 Passenger Air Bag — If Equipped  Auto Door Lock: activate/deactivate the auto-
By selecting the item “Security,” you can make
matic locking of the doors with the vehicle
the following adjustments: Front passenger air bag may be enabled or moving
 Speed Warning: disabled.
“Lights”  Auto Unlock On Exit: automatic unlocking of
Set the vehicle speed limit, which the driver is the doors when exiting the vehicle
notified through a visual and acoustic By selecting the item “Lights,” you can make the
signaling (display of a message and a symbol following adjustments:  Flash Light with Lock: activate the direction
on the display).  Headlight Off Delay: set the delay for head- indicators when closing the doors
When the speed warning is set, the icon light shutoff after engine shutoff  Sound Horn With Lock: activate/deactivate
should remain visualized for the same dura-  Headlight Sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity of the horn when pushing the LOCK button on
tion time of the pop up. If the driver exceeded headlight brightness the key fob. The options are “Off,” “First
the set speed, the icon should remain for Press,” and “Second Press”
however long the vehicle is over the set  Daytime Running Lights: activate/deactivate
the daytime running lights  Horn With Remote Start: activate/deactivate
speed.
the horn at the Remote Starting of the engine
with the key fob
 Remote Door Unlock: allows you to open the “Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display the New trip
driver door only on the first push of the figures relating to: Starts after reset:
UNLOCK button on the key fob  Distance Traveled  “Manual” by pushing the OK button.
 Passive Entry (If Equipped): activate the auto-  Average Consumption  “Automatic” when the “distance” reaches the
matic locking of the doors
 Travel Time (driving time) value of 62140 (99999.9 km) or when the
“Compass” “time travel” reaches the value of 999.59
By selecting the item “Compass” you can make Quantities Displayed (999 hours and 59 minutes).
the following adjustments: Distance Traveled  After each disconnection and reconnection
 Compass Calibration  Indicates the distance traveled by the start of of the battery.
the new trip.
 Compass Variance
Average Consumption
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
TRIP COMPUTER  Represents the average fuel consumption MESSAGES
The Trip computer is used to display information since the start of the new trip. The warning/indicator light switches on in the
on car operation when the key is turned to the Travel Time instrument panel together with a dedicated
RUN position. message and/or acoustic signal when
 Elapsed time since the start of the new trip.
This function allows you to define two separate applicable. These indications are indicative and
trips called “Trip A” and “Trip B” where the car's OK Button precautionary and as such must not be
“complete trips” are monitored in an Short Push Of The Button: display of various considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
independent manner. parameters. the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all
Both trips can be reset (reset - start of a new Long Push Of The Button: reset quantities and
cases. Always refer to the information in this
trip). To perform a reset, push and hold the OK begin a new trip.
chapter in the event of a failure indication.
button on the steering wheel controls.
All active telltales will display first, if applicable. on while driving, have an authorized dealer Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
The system check menu may appear different service the vehicle immediately. the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
based upon equipment options and current dropped below a specified level.
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and Brake Warning Light
The light will remain on until the cause is
may not appear. This light monitors various brake corrected.
The following warning lamps and indicators will functions, including brake fluid level
and parking brake application. If the NOTE:
alert you to a vehicle condition that may
brake light turns on it may indicate The light may flash momentarily during sharp 3
become serious. Some lamps will illuminate
that the parking brake is applied, that the brake cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
when you start your vehicle to make sure they
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with conditions. The vehicle should have service
work. If any lamps remain on after starting your
the anti-lock brake system reservoir. performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
vehicle, refer to the respective system warning
lamp for further information. If the light remains on when the parking brake If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at necessary.
Red Warning Lights the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
Air Bag Warning Light indicates a possible brake hydraulic system WARNING!
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
ThisThis light will turn on for four to Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
eight seconds as a bulb check when dangerous. Part of the brake system may
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehi-
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
or MAR/ON/RUN position. If the light cle. You could have a collision. Have the vehi-
remain on until the condition has been
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns cle checked immediately.
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
on while driving, have the system inspected at
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
light will illuminate with a single chime when a System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
felt during each stop.
fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. The dual brake system provides a reserve
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
If the light comes on intermittently or remains braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
the ABS system is required.
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be Door Open Warning Light will either stay on or flash depending on the
checked by turning the ignition switch from the This indicator will illuminate when a nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition when
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light door is ajar/open and not fully closed. the vehicle is safely and completely stopped
should illuminate for approximately two and the transmission is placed in the PARK
seconds. The light should then turn off unless position. The light should turn off. If the light
NOTE:
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is remains on with the vehicle running, your
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
single chime.
the light inspected by an authorized dealer. authorized dealer for service as soon as
The light also will turn on when the parking Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light possible.
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the This warning light will turn on when NOTE:
ON/RUN position. there's a fault with the Electric Power This light may turn on if the accelerator and
NOTE: Steering (EPS) system. Refer to brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
This light shows only that the parking brake is “Power Steering” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information. If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake running, immediate service is required and you
application. WARNING! may experience reduced performance, an
Battery Charge Warning Light elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
Continued operation with reduced assist
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
This warning light will illuminate when could pose a safety risk to yourself and oth-
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
the battery is not charging properly. If ers. Service should be obtained as soon as
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
it stays on while the engine is running, possible.
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
there may be a malfunction with the
during starting, have the system checked by an
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning authorized dealer.
as soon as possible. Light
This indicates a possible problem with the This light informs you of a problem
electrical system or a related component. with the Electronic Throttle Control
(ETC) system. If a problem is detected
while the vehicle is running, the light
Engine Temperature Warning Light Liftgate Open Warning Light Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to This indicator will illuminate when the This warning light will illuminate to
warn of an overheated engine liftgate is left open and not fully indicate the engine oil temperature is
condition. If the engine coolant closed. high. If the light turns on while driving,
temperature is too high, this light will stop the vehicle and shut off the
NOTE:
illuminate and a single chime will sound. engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over temperature to return to normal levels.
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/
single chime. 3
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the Oil Pressure Warning Light
transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. This warning light indicates when the
This warning light will illuminate to
If the temperature reading does not return to driver or passenger seat belt is
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call unbuckled. When the ignition is first
light turns on while driving, stop the
for service. placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
Of Emergency” for further information. chime will sound when this light turns on.
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Hood Open Warning Light
corrected. This light does not indicate how Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
This warning light will illuminate when much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
the hood is left open and not fully continuously and a chime will sound.
must be checked under the hood.
closed. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
Oil Pressure Sensor Failure Warning Light “Safety” for further information.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a This light will illuminate if there is a
single chime. failure of the oil pressure sensor. If
this light illuminates, take it to an
authorized dealer and have them
inspect it.
Transmission Fault Warning Light — If Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Fault Warning If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Equipped Light — If Equipped ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
This light will illuminate (together with This warning light will illuminate to RUN position, have the brake system inspected
a message in the instrument cluster indicate a fault in the ACC system. by an authorized dealer.
display and a buzzer) to indicate a Contact a local authorized dealer for Audio System Failure Light — If Equipped
transmission fault. Contact an service.
This light will illuminate to report a
authorized dealer if the message remains after For further information, refer to “Adaptive failure of the Audio System. Contact
restarting the engine. Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting And an authorized dealership as soon as
Operating.” possible.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
approximately 15 seconds when the This warning light monitors the This warning light will illuminate to
vehicle security alarm is arming, and Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The indicate the Electronic Park Brake is
then will flash slowly until the vehicle light will turn on when the ignition is not functioning properly and service is
is disarmed. placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/ required. Contact an authorized
Yellow Warning Lights RUN position and may stay on for as long as four dealer.
seconds.
Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator Light — If If the ABS light remains on or turns on while Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light
Equipped driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to system is not functioning and service is This indicator light illuminates to
signal when there is a fault detected required as soon as possible. However, the indicate that Forward Collision
with the Active Speed Limiter. conventional brake system will continue to Warning is off.
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
Icy Road Condition Indicator Light — If  Refer to “LaneSense – If Equipped” in When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
Equipped “Starting And Operating” for further informa- to alert serious conditions that could lead to
This light will illuminate during an icy tion. immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
road condition. converter damage. The vehicle should be
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
Equipped
Low Fuel Warning Light This warning light will illuminate when WARNING!
When the fuel level reaches the LaneSense system is not 3
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer-
approximately 1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) operating and requires service.
enced above, can reach higher temperatures
this light will turn on, and remain on Please see an authorized dealer.
than in normal operating conditions. This can
until fuel is added. cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped Light (MIL) flammable substances such as dry plants,
wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
The LaneSense system provides the The Engine Check/Malfunction
death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
driver with visual and steering torque Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an
pants or others.
warnings when the vehicle starts to Onboard Diagnostic System called
drift out of its lane unintentionally OBD II that monitors engine and
without the use of a turn signal. automatic transmission control systems. This CAUTION!
 When the LaneSense system senses a lane warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica-
drift situation, the LaneSense indicator
changes from solid green to solid yellow. the bulb does not come on when turning the tor Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the vehicle control system. It also could affect
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane condition checked promptly. fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is
has been approached and is in a lane depar- flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays
ture situation, the LaneSense indicator and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
on through several typical driving styles. In most
changes from solid white/green to flashing service is required.
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and
yellow.
will not require towing.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
This warning light will illuminate to Warning Light should be checked monthly when cold and
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If The warning light switches on and a inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
the light stays on or comes on during message is displayed to indicate that by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
driving, it means that the 4WD system the tire pressure is lower than the placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
is not functioning properly and that service is recommended value and/or that slow vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
required. We recommend you drive to the pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
nearest service center and have the vehicle optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may pressure label, you should determine the
serviced immediately. not be guaranteed. proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
Should one or more tires be in the condition As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
mentioned above, the display will show the
Light — If Equipped System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
indications corresponding to each tire.
This warning light will illuminate to pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
indicate a fault in the Forward CAUTION! is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
Collision Warning System. Contact an the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
authorized dealer for service. Refer to should stop and check your tires as soon as
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
“Forward Collision Warning (FCW)” in “Safety” possible, and inflate them to the proper
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steer-
for further information. pressure. Driving on a significantly
ing. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immedi-
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If ately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
Equipped contact an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
This warning light will illuminate when sible.
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
the Stop/Start system is not ability.
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
CAUTION! turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle.
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, The TPMS has been optimized for the original Then, shift the transmission into PARK and run
even if under-inflation has not reached the level equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures the engine at idle or slightly higher until the light
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire and warning have been established for the turns off.
pressure telltale. tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir-
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a able system operation or sensor damage may WARNING!
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when result when using replacement equipment If you continue operating the vehicle when 3
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS that is not of the same size, type, and/or the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
malfunction indicator is combined with the low style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may over, come in contact with hot engine or
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System exhaust components and cause a fire.
approximately one minute and then remain (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
continuously illuminated. This sequence will using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as mended that you take your vehicle to an CAUTION!
long as the malfunction exists. When the authorized dealer to have your sensor func-
Continuous driving with the Transmission
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system tion checked.
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
may not be able to detect or signal low tire eventually cause severe transmission dam-
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light — If
age or transmission failure.
occur for a variety of reasons, including the Equipped
installation of replacement or alternate tires or This light illuminates when there is a 4WD Over Temperature Warning Light
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS failure with the tow hook. Contact an The icon will appear on the
from functioning properly. Always check the authorized dealer for service. instrument panel display to indicate
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or overheating of the 4WD system. The
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure mode selected by the user will be
that the replacement or alternate tires and This light indicates that the
applied as soon as the system exits the
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function transmission fluid temperature is
overheating condition.
properly. running hot. This may occur with
Yellow Indicator Lights Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped Warning Light — If Equipped
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when This warning light indicates the
This light alerts the driver that the
the Electronic Stability Control system Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW
is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in off.
mode. The front and rear driveshafts
the instrument cluster will come on
are mechanically locked together Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is
same speed. Low range provides a greater gear if it was turned off previously.
activated. It should go out with the engine
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light — If
the wheels.
continuously with the engine running, a Equipped
Refer to “Four Wheel Drive” in “Starting And malfunction has been detected in the ESC
Operating” for further information on four-wheel This light will illuminate when there is
system. If this warning light remains on after
drive operation and proper use. a malfunction in one of the exterior
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
bulbs.
4WD Lock Indicator Light driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have This warning light will illuminate after
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOCK
the problem diagnosed and corrected. an accident has occurred, and the
mode. The front and rear driveshafts
 The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC system has shut the fuel off.
are mechanically locked together,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or Fuel Cutoff Failure Light — If Equipped
same speed.
ACC/ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate if there is a
Refer to “Four Wheel Drive” in “Starting And fuel cutoff failure. If this light
Operating” for further information on four-wheel  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking illuminates, take it to an authorized
drive operation and proper use. sounds when it is active. This is normal; the dealer and have them inspect it.
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
 This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm White Indicator Lights Speed Warning Indicator Light — If Equipped
Indicator Light When Set Speed Warning is turned
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
This telltale will illuminate when the on, the speed warning telltale will
Equipped
vehicle security alarm system has illuminate in the instrument cluster
detected an attempt to break into the This indicator shows when the Hill with a number matching the set
vehicle. Descent Control (HDC) feature is speed. When the set speed is exceeded, a
turned on. The lamp will be on solid single chime will sound along with pop up
NOTE: when HDC is armed. HDC can only be message of “Speed Warning Exceeded.” Speed 3
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN posi- armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD Warning can be turned on and off in the
tion, the Vehicle Security Warning Light could LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less instrument cluster display, for further
illuminate if a problem with the system is then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are nformation refer to “Instrument Cluster Display
detected. This condition will result in the engine not met while attempting to use the HDC Menu Items” in “Getting To Know Your
being shut off after two seconds. feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off. nstrument Panel.”
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped Light Sensor Failure Blue Indicator Lights
This warning light will illuminate to This light illuminates when there is
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If High Beam Indicator Light
light sensor failure. If this light
the light stays on or comes on during illuminates, have an authorized This indicator light will illuminate to
driving, it means that the 4WD system dealer inspect it. indicate that the high beam
is not functioning properly and that service is headlights are on. With the low beams
required. We recommend you drive to the activated, push the multifunction
nearest service center and have the vehicle lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
serviced immediately. turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
Green Indicator Lights Park / Headlight On Indicator Light Gray Indicator Lights
This indicator light will illuminate
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — If Electronic Speed Control Ready/Canceled
when the park lights or headlights are
Equipped Indicator Light
turned on. Refer to “Exterior Lights” in
This indicator shows that the “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for This indicator light will illuminate
automatic high beam headlights are further information. when the speed control function is
on. ready (but not set), or canceled, by the
Stop / Start Active Indicator Light — If driver. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Cruise Control Set Indicator Light Equipped Equipped” in “Starting and Operating” for
This light will turn on when the speed This indicator light will illuminate further information.
control is set to the desired speed. when the Stop/Start function is in
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting “Autostop” mode. ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
And Operating” for further Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
information. Turn Signal Indicator Lights onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This
When the left or right turn signal is system monitors the performance of the
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
activated, the turn signal indicator will emissions, engine, and automatic transmission
This indicator light will illuminate flash independently and the control systems. When these systems are
when the front fog lights are on. Refer corresponding exterior turn signal operating properly, your vehicle will provide
to “Exterior Lights” in “Getting To lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated excellent performance and fuel economy, as
Know Your Vehicle” for further when the multifunction lever is moved down well as engine emissions well within current
information. (left) or up (right). government regulations.
Hazard Warning Lights If any of these systems require service, the OBD
The hazard warning indicators light up II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator
when the vehicles Hazard Warning Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes
flasher switch has been pushed. and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your

vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
WARNING! EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as  ONLY an authorized service technician MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
soon as possible. should connect equipment to the OBD II In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
connection port in order to read the VIN, to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
CAUTION! diagnose, or service your vehicle. emissions control system. Failure to pass could
 Prolonged driving with the MIL on could  If unauthorized equipment is connected to prevent vehicle registration.
cause further damage to the emission the OBD II connection port, such as a For states that require an Inspection 3
control system. It could also affect fuel driver-behavior tracking device, it may: and Maintenance (I/M), this check
economy and driveability. The vehicle must verifies the Malfunction Indicator
 Be possible that vehicle systems,
be serviced before any emissions tests can Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
including safety related systems, could
be performed. when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
 If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is could occur that may result in an acci- system is ready for testing.
running, severe catalytic converter damage dent involving serious injury or death. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
service is required.  Access, or allow others to access, infor-
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) including personal information.
system should be determined not ready for the
Cybersecurity I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
in “Multimedia”.
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,  The MIL will not flash at all and will
which you can use prior to going to the test remain fully illuminated until you place
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system the ignition in the off position or start the
is ready, you must do the following: engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
proceed to the I/M station.
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
start this test over. vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
the ON position, you will see the normally would in order for your OBD II system
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol to update. A recheck with the above test routine
come on as part of a normal bulb check. may then indicate that the system is now ready.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
things will happen: system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
 The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds have your vehicle serviced before going to the
and then return to being fully illuminated I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the because the MIL is on with the engine running.
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
99
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES  Brake pedal pulsations
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)  A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
the stop
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
increased vehicle stability and brake These are all normal characteristics of ABS. it increase braking or steering efficiency
performance under most braking conditions. beyond that afforded by the condition of the
WARNING! vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
The system automatically prevents wheel lock,
afforded. 4
and enhances vehicle control during braking.  The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure equipment that may be susceptible to inter-  The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
that the ABS is working properly each time the ference caused by improperly installed or including those resulting from excessive
vehicle is started and driven. During this high output radio transmitting equipment. speed in turns, following another vehicle
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound This interference can cause possible loss of too closely, or hydroplaning.
as well as some related motor noises. anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
 The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
such equipment should be performed by
ABS is activated during braking when the must never be exploited in a reckless or
qualified professionals.
system detects one or more wheels begin to dangerous manner that could jeopardize
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,  Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will the user’s safety or the safety of others.
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic diminish their effectiveness and may lead
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping ABS is designed to function with the Original
activation(s). distance longer. Just press firmly on your Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
brake pedal when you need to slow down or Modification may result in degraded ABS
You also may experience the following when
stop. performance.
ABS activates:
(Continued)
 The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run
for a short time after the stop)
 The clicking sound of solenoid valves
100 SAFETY
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together
WARNING!
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/ to enhance both vehicle stability and control in The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot pre-
RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four various driving conditions. vent the natural laws of physics from acting
seconds. Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
Sway Control (TSC), Dynamic Steering Torque afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
(DST), and Hill Descent Control (HDC). cannot prevent collisions, including those
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driv-
the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not Brake Assist System (BAS) ing on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
functioning and that service is required.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
However, the conventional brake system will
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
emergency braking maneuvers. The system gerous manner, which could jeopardize the
Brake Warning Light” is on.
detects an emergency braking situation by user's safety or the safety of others.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the sensing the rate and amount of brake
brake system should be serviced as soon as application and then applies optimum pressure
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
to the brakes. This can help reduce braking
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” The Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) function
distances. The BAS complements the Anti-Lock
does not come on when the ignition is placed in uses the integration of the ESC system with the
Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as electric power steering to increase the safety
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
soon as possible. level of the whole car. In critical situations
receive the benefit of the system, you must
(understeering, oversteering, braking with
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System apply continuous braking pressure during the
different grip conditions), through the DST
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced function the ESC system controls the steering to
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This implement an additional torque contribution on
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), the steering wheel, to suggest the most correct
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
SAFETY 101
maneuver to the driver. The coordinated action NOTE: be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
of brakes and steering increases the safety and ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” desired path.
car control feeling. mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
in Safety for a complete explanation of the avail- the vehicle path intended by the driver and
NOTE:
able ESC modes. compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
The DST is a driving aid system and does not
replace the driver’s actions while driving the When the actual path does not match the
car.
WARNING! intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) conditions, and driving conditions, influence oversteer or understeer condition.
The Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) system the chance that wheel lift or rollover may  Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more 4
anticipates the potential for wheel lift by occur. Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) cannot than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially tion.
the speed of the vehicle. When Electronic Roll those that involve leaving the roadway or  Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
Mitigation (ERM) determines that the rate of striking objects or other vehicles. The capabil- than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
change of the steering wheel angle and ities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never tion.
vehicle's speed are sufficient to potentially be exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate ner, which could jeopardize the user's safety The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
brake and may also reduce engine power to or the safety of others. Light” located in the instrument cluster will start
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
can only reduce the chance of wheel lift active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
occurring during severe or evasive driving Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is
maneuvers, and it will only intervene during The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
these types of maneuvers. It cannot prevent enhances directional control and stability of the Indicator Light” begins to flash during
wheel lift due to other factors, such as road vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking corrects for oversteering or understeering of the apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
objects or other vehicles. vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer road conditions.
or understeer condition. Engine power may also
102 SAFETY
ESC On – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4H Range
 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot  Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly This is the normal operating mode for ESC when
prevent the natural laws of physics from maintain your vehicle, may change the operating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It is also
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase handling characteristics of your vehicle, the normal mode for operating a four-wheel
the traction afforded by prevailing road and may negatively affect the performance drive vehicle in 2WD or 4H Range. The ESC
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system will be in “ESC On” mode whenever the
including those resulting from excessive system, suspension, braking system, tire vehicle is started or the power transfer unit (if
speed in turns, driving on very slippery type and size or wheel size may adversely equipped) is shifted out of 4L Range. This mode
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot affect ESC performance. Improperly should be used for most driving situations. ESC
prevent accidents resulting from loss of inflated and unevenly worn tires may also should only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle Off” for specific reasons as noted. Refer to
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten- modification or poor vehicle maintenance “Partial Off” and to “Full Off” for additional
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci- that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC information.
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck- vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal NOTE:
less or dangerous manner which could injury and death. It is recommended to select the mode "Partial
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of Off" or "Full Off" only for specific reasons.
others. ESC Operation Modes
Partial Off – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four
(Continued) To disable ESC and other safety systems, follow Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4H Range
the instruction below.
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving in
There are three modes of active safety systems deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode raises
present on the vehicle: the threshold for TCS and ESC activation, which
 ESC On allows for more wheel spin than what ESC
normally allows.
 Partial Off
 Full Off
SAFETY 103
In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off

WARNING! (except for the “limited slip” feature described
 When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func- in the TCS section) until the vehicle reaches a
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At speeds over
feature described in the TCS section), has 40 mph (64 km/h), the system automatically
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator switches to “Partial Off” mode, described
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial above. When the vehicle speed returns to less
Off” mode, the engine power reduction than 35 mph (56 km/h), the ESC system will
feature of TCS is disabled, and the return to “Full Off” mode. The ESC OFF indicator
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the light is always illuminated when ESC is off. To
ESC OFF Button
ESC system is reduced.
4
turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when OFF” button. This will restore the normal “ESC
push the “ESC OFF” button and the ESC OFF
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. On” mode of operation.
indicator light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on
again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF” button NOTE:
and the ESC OFF indicator light will turn off. This Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4H And With the ESC switched off, the enhanced
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of 4L Range vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In
operation. The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC
and off-road use when ESC stability features system will not engage to assist in maintaining
NOTE:
could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail stability. “Full Off” mode is only intended for
To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
conditions. The “ESC OFF” button is located in off-highway or off-road use.
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep
the lower switch bank above the climate control
snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
panel. To enter “Full Off” mode, push and hold
switch to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily
the “ESC OFF” button for five seconds while the
pushing the “ESC OFF” button. Once the situa-
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After
tion requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome,
five seconds, the ESC OFF indicator light will
turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing the
illuminate and an “ESC OFF” message will
“ESC OFF” button. This may be done while the
appear in the odometer.
vehicle is in motion.
104 SAFETY
NOTE: NOTE: Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease

In 4L Range, the active safety systems are up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle
 “Full Off” is the only operating mode for ESC
completely bypassed in order to ensure as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
in 4L Range. The ESC system will be in this
maximum off-road performance. driving to the prevailing road conditions.
mode whenever the vehicle is started in 4L
range or the power transfer unit is shifted ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light NOTE:
into 4L Range. And ESC OFF Indicator Light
 The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
 The “ESC OFF” message will display and a The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
chime will sound when the gear selector is Indicator Light” in the instrument come on momentarily each time the ignition
moved from any position to the PARK (P) cluster will come on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
position and then moved out of the PARK switch is placed in the ON position. It
position. This will occur even if the message should go out with the engine running. If the  Each time the ignition is placed in the ON
was cleared previously. “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” position, the ESC system will be on even if it
comes on continuously with the engine running, was turned off previously.
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped a malfunction has been detected in the ESC  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
On models equipped with Selec-Terrain, the system. If this light remains on after several sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
activation of some driving modes provide partial ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
off or full off of some active safety systems in several miles/kilometers at speeds greater following the maneuver that caused the ESC
order to optimize performance in specific than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized activation.
modes. dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
Partial or full off of the active safety systems will diagnosed and corrected. The "ESC OFF Indicator Light"
be indicated by a light in the instrument cluster. indicates the Electronic Stability
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Control (ESC) is in “Partial Off” or “Full
In "SAND" and "MUD", the active safety systems Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
Off” modes.
are partially disabled and put in place to ensure to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
maximum performance in the specific mode of the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC The ESC OFF switch is located in the center
operation. However, you can reactivate them Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also console.
completely at any time by pushing the ESC flashes when Traction Control System is active.
button. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
SAFETY 105
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped Enabling HDC Deactivating HDC

HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
the following conditions must also be met to any of the following conditions occur:
enable HDC:  Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
 Driveline is in 4L Range. or brake application.
 Vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h).  Vehicle speed exceeds 7.5 mph (12 km/h)
but remains below 25 mph (40 km/h).
 Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
 Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
 Driver’s door is closed. magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is 4
Activating HDC on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate  Vehicle is shifted to PARK (P).
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low
automatically if driven down a grade of
speed off-road driving while in 4L Range. HDC Disabling HDC
sufficient magnitude (greater than
maintains vehicle speed while descending hills
approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
during various driving situations. HDC controls
selectable by the driver and can be adjusted the following conditions occur:
vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
using brake and throttle input.  The driver pushes the HDC switch.
HDC has three states:
Driver Override:
 The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range.
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not The driver may override HDC activation with
activate). throttle or brake application at any time.  The driver’s door opens.
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but  The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph
activation conditions are not met, or driver (40 km/h) (HDC exits immediately.)
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
106 SAFETY
Feedback To The Driver: Hill Start Assist (HSA)

WARNING!
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
HDC switch has an LED, which offers feedback help the driver accelerate the vehicle from a There may be situations where the Hill Start
to the driver about the state HDC is in. complete stop while on an incline. If the driver Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
 The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi- releases the brake while stopped on an incline, may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
nate and remain solid when HDC is enabled HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
or activated. This is the normal operating a short period. If the driver does not apply the is not a substitute for active driving involve-
condition for HDC. throttle before this time expires, the system will ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll be attentive to distance to other vehicles,
 The switch lamp will flash for several seconds down the hill as normal. The system will release people, and objects, and most importantly
then extinguish when the driver pushes the brake pressure in proportion to amount of brake operation to ensure safe operation of
HDC switch when enable conditions have not the vehicle under all road conditions. Your
throttle applied.
been met. complete attention is always required while
The following conditions must be met in order
The Hill Descent Switch is located within the driving to maintain safe control of your vehi-
for HSA to activate:
Selec-Terrain knob in the upper right position. cle. Failure to follow these warnings can
 The vehicle must be stopped.
result in a collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING!  The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate)
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in grade or greater hill. Disabling and Enabling HSA
controlling vehicle speed when descending  The gear selection must match vehicle uphill This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in change the current setting, proceed as follows:
driving conditions and is responsible for forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in  For vehicles equipped with the instrument
maintaining a safe vehicle speed. REVERSE gear). cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
 For vehicles equipped with an automatic Panel” for further information.
transmission, the HSA will work in REVERSE
gear and all forward gears. The system will
not activate if the transmission is in PARK.
SAFETY 107
Traction Control System (TCS) appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of

the trailer. TSC will become active automatically
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven once an excessively swaying trailer is Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake recognized. The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and NOTE: two radar-based sensors, located inside the
engine power is reduced to provide enhanced TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. rear bumper fascia, to detect highway
acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS Always use caution when towing a trailer and licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
system, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda- motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot
functions similar to a limited slip differential tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
and controls the wheel spin across a driven Operating” for further information. When TSC is 4
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
faster than the other, the system will apply the Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more be reduced and you may feel the brakes being
engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop
not spinning. This feature remains active even if the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when
TCS and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
the “Partial Off” mode or the “Full Off” mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in
WARNING!
this section for further information.
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle Rear Detection Zones
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped down, stop at the nearest safe location, and When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying sway. rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
attempt to stop the sway. The system may
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the
or REVERSE (R) and enters standby mode when
the vehicle is in PARK (P).
108 SAFETY
The BSM detection zone covers approximately The BSM system monitors the detection zone
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle, from three different entry points (side, rear,
10 ft (3 m). The zone length starts at the front) while driving to see if an alert is
outside mirror and extends approximately 20 ft necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
(6 m) beyond the rear bumper of the vehicle. during these types of zone entries.
The BSM system monitors the detection zones Entering From The Side
on both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) from either side of the vehicle.
or higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in
these areas. Rear Sensor Locations
NOTE: The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
 The BSM system does NOT alert the driver warning light located in the outside mirrors in
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
outside the detection zones. and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes
 If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, it is Of Operation” in this section for further
necessary to deactivate the BSM system information.
manually through the settings menu to avoid
a misdetection. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” Side Monitoring
in “Multimedia” for further information.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar
sensors are located must remain free of snow,
ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not block
the radar sensors located on the rear fascia
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle
racks, etc.). BSM Warning Light
SAFETY 109
Entering From The Rear The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle are traveling in the opposite direction of the
on either side and enter the rear detection zone vehicle in adjacent lanes.
with a relative speed of less than 31 mph
(50 km/h).
Overtaking/Approaching 4
Opposing Traffic
Rear Monitoring
WARNING!
Overtaking Traffic The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
speed of less than 15 mph (25 km/h) and the zones. The BSM system is not designed to
vehicle remains in the blind spot for detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light Overtaking/Passing Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed The BSM system is designed not to issue an system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
between the two vehicles is greater than alert on stationary objects such as guardrails, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
15 mph (25 km/h), the warning light will not posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
illuminate. occasionally the system may alert on such can result in serious injury or death.
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
110 SAFETY
Rear Cross Path (RCP) NOTE: Modes Of Operation

The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can Three selectable modes of operation are
to aid the driver when backing out of parking be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles If the sensors are blocked by other structures or “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the information.
out of the parking space until the rear end of the driver.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an (R), the driver is alerted using both the visual BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. and audible alarms, including reducing the appropriate side view mirror based on a
radio volume. detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
WARNING! system will respond with both visual and
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back audible alerts when a detected object is
up aid system. It is intended to be used to present. Whenever an audible alert is
help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a requested, the radio is muted.
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
when backing up, even when using RCP. When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Always check carefully behind your vehicle, Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
look behind you, and be sure to check for visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
RCP Detection Zones
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc- based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both tions, and blind spots before backing up. Fail- then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving ure to do so can result in serious injury or present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum death. chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
speed of approximately 1 mph (2 km/h), to
signal and detected object are present on the
objects moving a maximum of approximately
same side at the same time, both the visual and
22 mph (35 km/h), such as in parking lot
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
situations.
audible alert, the radio (if on) will also be muted.
SAFETY 111
NOTE: Blind Spot Monitoring Fault Warnings NOTE:

Whenever an audible alert is requested by the Blinded Sensor Vehicle must be taken to the nearest authorized
BSM system, the radio is also muted. dealer for service.
In the case of a sensor that is blinded:
When the system is in RCP, the system will  BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on General Information
respond with both visual and audible alerts continuously The following regulatory statement applies to all
when a detected object is present. Whenever Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
 A instrument cluster dedicated message will
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also vehicle:
display
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N
the RCP state always requests the chime. NOTE:
Blind Spot Alert Off The rear bumper must be clean and free of any
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN 4
obstructing debris. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
When the BSM system is turned off, there will
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
be a related message on instrument cluster System Not Available Economic Development Canada license-exempt
display. If BSM system is off, this message will
In the case of the system being temporarily RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
be visualized every time the vehicle is restarted.
unavailable: following two conditions:
NOTE:  BSM Mirror Warning Lights are turned on 1. This device may not cause harmful
The BSM system will store the current operating continuously interference, and
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored  A instrument cluster dedicated message will 2. This device must accept any interference
mode will be recalled and used. display received, including interference that may
In the case of the system being completely cause undesired operation.
unavailable:
 A chime will sound
 A instrument cluster dedicated message will

display
112 SAFETY
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With determines that the driver intends to avoid
dÌnnovation, Science and Economic Mitigation Operation — If Equipped the collision by braking but has not applied
Development applicables aux appareils radio sufficient brake force, the system will
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée compensate and provide additional brake
with Mitigation provides the driver with audible
aux deux conditions suivantes: force as required.
warnings, visual warnings (within the
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de instrument cluster display), and may apply a Vehicles With A Manual Transmission: After the
brouillage, et brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a end of the intervention of automatic braking,
potential frontal collision. The warnings and the engine could stall, unless the driver can
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout limited braking are intended to provide the depress the clutch pedal.
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le driver with enough time to react, avoid or Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: After the
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro- mitigate the potential collision. end of the intervention of automatic braking,
mettre le fonctionnement.
NOTE: the transmission may remain in last gear
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las stored: therefore the vehicle could lurch
siguientes dos condiciones:  FCW monitors the information from the forward, once the brakes release a few seconds
forward looking sensors as well as the Elec- later. If the Forward Collision Warning with
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no tronic Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the Mitigation event stops the vehicle completely,
cause interferencia perjudicial y probability of a forward collision. When the the system will hold the vehicle at standstill for
system determines that a forward collision is two seconds and then release the brakes.
probable, the driver will be provided with If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
audible and visual warnings and may provide event begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h),
a brake jerk warning. the system may provide the maximum braking
NOTE:  If the driver does not take action based upon possible to mitigate the potential forward collision.
Changes or modifications not expressly these progressive warnings, then the system If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
approved by the party responsible for compli- will provide a limited level of active braking to event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
ance could void the user’s authority to operate help slow the vehicle and mitigate the poten- hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and
the equipment. tial forward collision. If the driver reacts to then release the brakes.
the warnings by braking and the system
SAFETY 113
 The FCW system is intended for on-road use Turning FCW On Or Off
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW The Forward Collision menu setting is located in
system should be deactivated to prevent the Uconnect settings.
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
NOTE:
 If the vehicle enters 4L Range, the FCW The default status of FCW is “Warning + Active
system will be automatically deactivated. Braking,” this allows the system to warn you of
 The active braking is disabled when a trailer a possible collision with the vehicle in front of
is connected with a Mopar Trailer Towing you and enable the active braking.
system. If the vehicle is equipped with an
FCW Message  Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates 4
aftermarket system, it is recommended that
When the system determines a collision with the system, so no warning or active braking
the Active Braking is turned off manually.
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, will be available in case of a possible collision
the warning message will be deactivated.
WARNING!  Changing the FCW status to “Only warning”
NOTE: prevents the system from providing limited
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not active braking, or additional brake support if
 The minimum speed for FCW activation is intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor the driver is not braking adequately in the
3 mph (5 km/h). can FCW detect every type of potential colli- event of a potential frontal collision, but
sion. The driver has the responsibility to avoid maintains the audible and visual warnings.
 The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects a collision by controlling the vehicle via brak-
other than vehicles such as guard rails or ing and steering. Failure to follow this warning Changing the status of the system is only
sign posts based on the course prediction. could lead to serious injury or death. possible with the vehicle at a complete stop.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality. NOTE:
The FCW system state is not kept in memory
from one ignition position to the next. If the
system is turned off, it will turn on when the
vehicle is restarted.
114 SAFETY
Changing FCW Sensitivity "Far", in the case of a potential accident, “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
By changing the settings on the menu of the providing a more dynamic driving of the vehicle. Warning
Uconnect system, you can change the The setting of the sensitivity of the system is The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
sensitivity of the system by choosing one of the maintained in memory when the engine is Blocked” warning will display when conditions
following three options: "Near", "Medium" or switched off. temporarily limit system performance. This
"Far". Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
FCW Limited Warning such as in snow or heavy rain. The system may
“Multimedia” for further information.
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW also become temporarily blinded due to
The default option is "Medium". This setting
Limited Functionality” or “FCW Limited obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
provides that the system notify the driver of a
Functionality Wipe Front Windshield” cases, the instrument cluster display will read
possible accident with the vehicle ahead of it
momentarily, there may be a condition that “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
when the latter is at a standard distance,
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is and the system will deactivate.
intermediate between the other two possible
still drivable under normal conditions, the active The “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
settings.
braking may not be fully available. Once the Blocked” message can sometimes be displayed
By setting the sensitivity of the system to "Far", condition that limited the system performance
the system will warn the driver of a possible while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e.
is no longer present, the system will return to its tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
accident with the vehicle in front when the latter full performance state. If the problem persists,
is at a greater distance, giving you the chance to The system will recover after the vehicle has left
see an authorized dealer. these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
act on the brakes in a more limited and gradual
way. This setting gives the driver the maximum Service FCW Warning radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
possible time of reaction to prevent a possible its path, this warning may temporarily occur.
If the system turns off, and the instrument
accident. cluster display reads: “FCW Unavailable Service If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
By changing the option to "Near", the system will Required” should examine the sensor. It may require
warn the driver of a possible accident with the cleaning or removal of an obstruction. In
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
vehicle ahead of it when the latter is a reduced absence of visible obstructions on the bumper,
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
distance. This setting offers a reaction time to it could be necessary to wipe off the radar
normal conditions, have the system checked by
the driver lower than the settings "Medium" and directly on the surface, after having the radar
an authorized dealer.
cover removed. It’s recommended that an
authorized dealer perform this operation.
SAFETY 115
NOTE:  Lane changing of other vehicles Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
 If the “FCW Front Radar Sensor Temporarily  Passing of vehicles in an oncoming intersec- The system is not able to detect the presence of
Blocked” message occurs frequently (e.g. tion vehicles that are in front of the vehicle but
more than once on every trip) without any placed outside the field of action of the radar
The intervention of the system could be sensor and could therefore not react in the
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have
unexpected or delayed. The driver must presence of small vehicles such as bicycles or
the radar sensor realigned at an authorized
dealer. therefore always pay particular attention, while motorcycles.
maintaining control of the vehicle to drive in
 Installing a snow plow or front-end protector complete safety.
is not recommended. Doing so may block the Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve 4
sensor and inhibit FCW operation.
Entering or exiting a large curve, the system
 Use only a soft cloth for cleaning. Do not use could detect the presence of a vehicle that is in
solvents or abrasive pastes. front of the vehicle, but that does not preside in
the same lane. In cases such as this, the system
 The radar is equipped with a defrost system,
might respond.
so in some climatic conditions it could reach
high temperatures. Wait at least 30 seconds
after the engine has been turned off before Small Vehicles And/Or Not Aligned To The Lane
touching the sensor.
Precautions While Driving With FCW
In certain driving conditions, such as:
 Driving in the vicinity of a curve
 Small vehicles and/or not aligned to the lane
Driving In The Vicinity Of A Curve

116 SAFETY
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles 2. This device must accept any interference
Vehicles that suddenly change lane, while received, including interference that may
standing in the traffic lane of their vehicle and cause undesired operation.
inside the field of action of the radar sensor may Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
cause the intervention of the system. dÌnnovation, Science and Economic
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming Intersection brouillage, et
General Information 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
Lane Changing Of Other Vehicles FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
Passing Of Vehicles In An Oncoming IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN siguientes dos condiciones:
Intersection This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
The system could temporarily react to a vehicle Rules and with Innovation, Science and cause interferencia perjudicial y
that crossed the range of the radar sensor, in an Economic Development Canada license-exempt
oncoming intersection. 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
1. This device may not cause harmful NOTE:
interference, and Changes or modifications not expressly
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
SAFETY 117
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire For example, your vehicle may have a
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the recommended cold (parked for more than three
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
low-pressure warning limit for any reason, hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
including low temperature effects and natural the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
on the vehicle recommended cold placard
pressure loss through the tire. the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by decrease the tire pressure to approximately
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
or above the recommended cold placard
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will Monitoring Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning 4
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” illuminates, the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is (193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
you must increase the tire pressure to the
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle Light” will still be on. In this situation, the “Tire
recommended cold placard pressure in order
has not been driven for at least three hours, or Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn off only
for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” to turn
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
off.
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure recommended cold placard pressure value.
must not exceed the maximum inflation The system will automatically update and the
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn off NOTE:
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for once the system receives the updated tire When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
information on how to properly inflate the pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal in order for the TPMS to receive this pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
and there should be no adjustment for this information. toring Light off.
increased pressure.
118 SAFETY
NOTE: pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each

CAUTION! wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
 The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
 The TPMS has been optimized for the orig- pressure readings to the receiver module.
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
warning of a tire failure or condition. NOTE:
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your It is particularly important for you to check the
 The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
sensor damage may result when using monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
replacement equipment that is not of the  Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
The TPMS consists of the following
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
components:
sensor is not designed for use on after- tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect  Receiver Module.
market wheels, and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance. the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.  Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM  The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
wheels to assure TPMS feature operation.  Tire Pressure Monitoring Light.
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
 Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause bility to maintain correct tire pressure using Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn-
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if ings
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After underinflation has not reached the level to The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light”
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
will illuminate in the instrument
recommended that you take your vehicle to Monitoring Light”.
cluster, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE”
an authorized dealer to have your sensor message will display in the instrument cluster,
 Seasonal temperature changes will affect
function checked. an "Inflate to XX" message will be displayed and
TPMS information on your instrument
 After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- cluster. a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap. one or more of the four active road tires. Should
This will prevent moisture and dirt from Base System this occur, you should stop as soon as possible,
entering the valve stem, which could The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) check the inflation pressure of each tire on your
damage the TPMS sensor. uses wireless technology with wheel rim vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire recommended cold placard pressure value as
SAFETY 119
shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once the  Installing some form of aftermarket window 3. After driving the vehicle for up to
system receives the updated tire pressures, the tinting that affects radio wave signals. 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
system will automatically update and the “Tire “TPMS Light” will flash on and off for
 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn off. 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
wheel housings.
NOTE: 4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime
 Using tire chains on the vehicle.
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may will sound and the “TPMS Light” will flash on
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi  Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard sensors. solid.
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Light off. The vehicle may need to be
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching 5. Once you repair or replace the original road 4
Full Size Spare tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
the compact spare or non-matching full size
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
spare, the TPMS will update automatically
information. full size spare tire does not have a Tire
and the “TPMS Light” will turn off, as long as
Pressure Monitoring sensor. Therefore, the
Service TPMS Warning no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire warning limit in any of the four active road
spare tire.
Pressure Monitoring Light” will flash on and off tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The 2. If you install the compact or non-matching up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
system fault will also sound a chime. If the full size spare tire in place of a road tire that in order for the TPMS to receive this
ignition is cycled, this sequence will repeat, has a pressure below the low-pressure information.
providing the system fault still exists. The “Tire warning limit, a chime will sound and the
“TPMS Light” and “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” Tire Pressure Monitoring System Operation
Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault and "Inflate to XX" messages will turn on The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
can occur due to any of the following: upon the next ignition cycle. uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
next to facilities emitting the same radio
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
pressure readings to the receiver module.
120 SAFETY
NOTE: The vehicle may need to be driven for up to

It is particularly important for you to check the 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle for the TPMS to receive this information.
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
Service TPMS Warning
The TPMS consists of the following When a system fault is detected, the “Tire
components: Pressure Monitoring Light” will flash on and off
 Receiver Module. for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors. system fault will also sound a chime. In
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning addition, the instrument cluster will display a
 Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a
messages, which display in the instrument Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
minimum of five seconds and then display
cluster. possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to
(those in a different color in the instrument
indicate which sensor is not being received.
 Tire Pressure Monitoring Light. cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value as shown in the If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn- repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
"Inflate to XX" message. Once the system
ings the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire
receives the updated tire pressures, the system
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Light” will automatically update, the pressure values Pressure Monitoring Light” will no longer flash,
will illuminate in the instrument in the graphic display in the instrument cluster and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will
cluster and a chime will sound when will return to their original color, and the “Tire no longer display, and a pressure value will
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four Pressure Monitoring Light” will turn off. display in place of the dashes. A system fault
active road tires. In addition, the instrument can occur due to any of the following:
cluster will display a "Tire Low" message for a NOTE:  Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
minimum of five seconds and a graphic showing When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may next to facilities emitting the same radio
the pressure values of each tire with the low tire need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi frequencies as the TPMS sensors
pressure values in a different color. (28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-  Installing some form of aftermarket window
toring Light off. tinting that affects radio wave signals
SAFETY 121
 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or 4. The instrument cluster will display a graphic 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
wheel housings showing the tire pressure value in the same addition, the instrument cluster will display
color as the other pressure values in place a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five
 Using tire chains on the vehicle
of the different color low tire pressure value. seconds and then display dashes (--) in
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS The instrument cluster will also display a place of the pressure value.
sensors dedicated message to remind you to service
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
the flat tire.
Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare chime will sound, the “TPMS Light” will flash
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire on solid, and the instrument cluster will
Full Size Spare
assembly has a tire pressure monitoring display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message 4
sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS. 1. The compact spare tire or non-matching for five seconds and then display dashes (--)
full size does not have a Tire Pressure in place of the pressure value.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a
Monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
road tire that has a pressure below the 5. Once you repair or replace the original road
will not monitor the pressure in the
low-pressure warning limit, a chime will tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
compact spare tire.
sound and the “TPMS Light” will turn on the compact spare or non-matching full
upon the next ignition key cycle. In addition, 2. If you install the compact or non-matching size, the TPMS will update automatically. In
the instrument cluster will display a Tire Low full size spare tire in place of a road tire that addition, the “TPMS Light” will turn off and
message, an "Inflate to XX" message and a has a pressure below the low-pressure the graphic in the instrument cluster will
graphic showing the low tire pressure value warning limit, upon the next ignition key display a new pressure value instead of
in a different color. cycle, the “TPMS Light” will remain on and a dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is
chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in below the low-pressure warning limit in any
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
the instrument cluster will still display a of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) the
different color pressure value and an need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
“TPMS Light” will turn off, as long as no tire
"Inflate to XX" message. above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. 3. After driving the vehicle for up to TPMS to receive this information.
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h),
the “TPMS Light” will flash on and off for
122 SAFETY
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped then turn off, and the instrument cluster will Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message. dÌnnovation, Science and Economic
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with The instrument cluster will also display pressure Development applicables aux appareils radio
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have values in place of the dashes. On the next exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
TPMS sensors, such as when installing Winter ignition switch cycle the “SERVICE TPM aux deux conditions suivantes:
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle. To SYSTEM” message will no longer be displayed
deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four as long as no system fault exists.
brouillage, et
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires General Information
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
(TPM) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the “TPM Light” will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N
the instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display siguientes dos condiciones:
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values. Rules and with Innovation, Science and 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
Beginning with the next ignition switch cycle, Economic Development Canada license-exempt cause interferencia perjudicial y
the TPMS will no longer chime or flash the TPM RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
and display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” following two conditions: 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
message in the instrument cluster display but cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure 1. This device may not cause harmful pueda causar su operación no deseada.
values. interference, and
NOTE:
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel 2. This device must accept any interference Changes or modifications not expressly
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires received, including interference that may approved by the party responsible for compli-
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the cause undesired operation. ance could void the user’s authority to operate
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph the equipment.
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the “TPM
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
SAFETY 123
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS 1. Children 12 years old and under should

always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
Some of the most important safety features in vehicle with a rear seat. the front air bags room to inflate.
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
Occupant Restraint Systems
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child your vehicle has side air bags, and
 Seat Belt Systems Restraints” in this section for further deployment occurs, the side air bags will
information) must be secured in the inflate forcefully into the space between
 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
appropriate child restraint or occupants and the door and occupants
Bags
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear could be injured.
 Child Restraints seating position. 4
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
Some of the safety features described in this 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a be modified to accommodate a disabled
section may be standard equipment on some rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the person, refer to “Customer Assistance” for
models, or may be optional equipment on front passenger seat, move the seat as far customer service contact information.
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized back as possible and use the proper child
dealer. restraint. Refer to “Child Restraints” in this WARNING!
Important Safety Precautions  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
Please pay close attention to the information in 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint belt behind them or under their arm. front air bag can cause death or serious
system properly, to keep you and your injury to a child 12 years or younger,
5. You should read the instructions provided
passengers as safe as possible. including a child in a rear-facing child
with your child restraint to make sure that
Here are some simple steps you can take to restraint.
you are using it properly.
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air (Continued)
bag: 6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
124 SAFETY
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert Warning Sequence

WARNING! (Continued) (BeltAlert) The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in Front Seat BeltAlert when the vehicle is moving above a specified
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
front seat passenger is unbuckled (the
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do driver and outboard front seat passenger to
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in buckle their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is
active when the outboard front passenger seat
that vehicle. active whenever the ignition switch is in the
is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence
START or ON/RUN position.
starts by blinking the respective Seat Belt
Seat Belt Systems Initial Indication Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the will remain solid red until the driver and
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
driver or outboard front seat passenger is outboard front seat passenger are buckled. The
that includes you. This can happen far away
unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based
from home or on your own street.
START or ON/RUN position the respective Seat on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, Belt Reminder Light will turn solid red and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries remain red until the seat belt is buckled. The buckled. The driver should instruct all
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen respective Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn occupants to buckle their seat belts.
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat solid green once the seat belt is buckled. After
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the Change Of Status
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
have buckled their seat belts all Seat Belt
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is
Reminder Lights will turn off. The outboard front
belted at all times. traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the
begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
SAFETY 125
when an animal or other items are placed on

the outboard front passenger seat or when the
WARNING! WARNING! (Continued)
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to  Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
recommended that pets be restrained in the more severe injuries in a collision. The air and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet bags work with your seat belt to restrain you including the driver, should always wear
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and properly. In some collisions, the air bags their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
cargo is properly stowed. won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat also provided at their seating position to
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an belt even though you have air bags. minimize the risk of severe injury or death
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not  In a collision, you and your passengers can in the event of a crash.
recommend deactivating BeltAlert. suffer much greater injuries if you are not  Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could 4
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte- make your injuries in a collision much
NOTE:
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until be sure you and others in your vehicle are Follow these instructions to wear your seat
the driver and outboard front seat passenger buckled up properly. belt safely and to keep your passengers
seat belts are buckled. safe, too.
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
Lap/Shoulder Belts inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,  Two people should never be belted into a
All seating positions in your vehicle are people riding in these areas are more likely single seat belt. People belted together can
equipped with lap/shoulder belts. to be seriously injured or killed. crash into one another in a collision, hurting
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only  Do not allow people to ride in any area of one another badly. Never use a lap/
during very sudden stops or collisions. This your vehicle that is not equipped with seats shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt and seat belts. person, no matter what their size.
to move freely with you under normal (Continued)
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
126 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

A lap belt worn too high can increase the 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
  A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt back and adjust the seat.
dangerous. Your body could strike the
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
bones, but across your abdomen. Always increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as worn under the arm can cause internal inju- rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
possible and keep it snug. ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
 A twisted seat belt may not protect you bones. Wear the seat belt over your seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into shoulder so that your strongest bones will webbing as far as necessary to allow the
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against take the force in a collision. seat belt to go around your lap.
your body, without twists. If you can’t  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it protect you from injury during a collision.
to an authorized dealer immediately and You are more likely to hit your head in a
have it fixed. collision if you do not wear your shoulder
 A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap be used together.
portion could ride too high on your body,  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
possibly causing internal injuries. Always a collision and leave you with no protection.
buckle your seat belt into the buckle Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
nearest you. checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi- Pulling Out The Latch Plate
 A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
move too far forward, increasing the possi- seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. must be replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
SAFETY 127
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
insert the latch plate into the buckle until Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
you hear a “click.” lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
Positioning The Lap Belt begins immediately above the latch plate. 4
5. Position the shoulder belt across the 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any webbing. The folded webbing must enter
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle slack so that it is comfortable and not the slot at the top of the latch plate.
resting on your neck. The retractor will
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
lies low across your hips, below your clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button is no longer twisted.
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the ically retract to its stowed position. If
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug necessary, slide the latch plate down the
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
the seat belt in a collision. fully.
128 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage NOTE:

The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage WARNING! (Continued)
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This  Always make all seat belt height adjust-
adjusted upward or downward to position the feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to ments when the vehicle is stationary.
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze be adjusted in the upward position without
the anchorage button to release the anchorage, pushing or squeezing the release button. To Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
and move it up or down to the position that verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
serves you best. pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
safe, too. Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
Adjustable Upper Anchorage including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
 Position the shoulder belt across the
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you shoulder and chest with minimal, if any the event of an accident is reduced for the
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a slack so that it is comfortable and not mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
lower position, and if you are taller than resting on your neck. The retractor will with- a seat belt.
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt draw any slack in the shoulder belt. Position the lap belt snug and low below the
anchorage in a higher position. After you abdomen and across the strong bones of the
release the anchorage button, try to move it up  Misadjustment of the seat belt could
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
or down to make sure that it is locked in reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and away from the neck. Never place the
position. in a crash.
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
(Continued)
SAFETY 129
Seat Belt Pretensioner Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped (ALR) as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
with pretensioning devices that are designed to The seat belts in the passenger seating retract completely in this case and then
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of positions are equipped with a Switchable carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
a collision. These devices may improve the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is necessary to comfortably wrap around the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack used to secure a child restraint system. For occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
from the seat belt early in a collision. additional information, refer to “Installing Child into the buckle until you hear a "click.”
Pretensioners work for all size occupants, Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
including those in child restraints. the “Child Restraints” section of this manual. automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
NOTE:
The figure below illustrates the locking feature retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. 4
for each seating position. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
These devices are not a substitute for proper child restraint is installed in a seating position
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned 12 years old and under should always be
properly. properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
The pretensioners are triggered by the with a rear seat.
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
WARNING!
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
must be replaced immediately. front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
Energy Management Feature Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) injury to a child 12 years or younger,
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped Locations including a child in a rear-facing child
with an Energy Management feature that may If the passenger seating position is equipped restraint.
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, (Continued)
of a collision. The seat belt system has a only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
retractor assembly that is designed to release comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
webbing in a controlled manner. mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
130 SAFETY
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt Some of the safety features described in this
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in and allow it to retract completely to disengage section may be standard equipment on some
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the models, or may be optional equipment on
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
dealer.
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in WARNING!
that vehicle. The air bag system must be ready to protect you
 The seat belt assembly must be replaced if in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function interconnecting wiring associated with the
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder is not working properly when checked electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
belt. according to the procedures in the Service vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Manual. Bag System Components:
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
 Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
downward until the entire seat belt is
could increase the risk of injury in colli- Air Bag System Components
extracted. sions.  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat  Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to  Air Bag Warning Light
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. restrain occupants who are wearing the
This indicates the seat belt is now in the  Steering Wheel and Column
seat belt or children who are using booster
Automatic Locking Mode. seats. The locked mode is only used to  Instrument Panel
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for  Knee Impact Bolsters
restraining the child.  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
 Seat Belt Buckle Switch
 Supplemental Side Air Bags
SAFETY 131
 Supplemental Knee Air Bags any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag NOTE:
Warning Light, either momentarily or If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
 Front and Side Impact Sensors
continuously. A single chime will sound to alert related gauges are not working, the Occupant
 Seat Belt Pretensioners you if the light comes on again after initial Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
startup. disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
 Seat Track Position Sensors be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
Air Bag Warning Light illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning authorized dealer service the air bag system
Light if a malfunction is detected that could immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
electronic parts of the air bag system record the nature of the malfunction. While the WARNING! 4
whenever the ignition switch is in the air bag system is designed to be maintenance Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If free, if any of the following occurs, have an instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the ignition switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK authorized dealer service the air bag system the air bag system to protect you in a colli-
position the air bag system is not on and the air immediately. sion. If the light does not come on as a bulb
bags will not inflate.  The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on check when the ignition is first turned on,
The ORC contains a backup power supply during the four to eight seconds when the stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
system that may deploy the air bag system even ignition switch is first in the MAR/ACC/ON/ comes on as you drive, have an authorized
if the battery loses power or it becomes RUN position. dealer service the air bag system immedi-
disconnected prior to deployment.  The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after ately.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the four to eight-second interval.
the instrument panel for approximately four to Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
 The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
tently or remains on while driving.
switch is in the MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. Light is detected, which could affect
After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light the Supplemental Restraint System
will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
132 SAFETY
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
chime will sound to alert you that the “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers. WARNING! (Continued)
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or front air bag can cause death or serious
remains on while driving have an authorized injury to a child 12 years or younger,
dealer service the vehicle immediately. including a child in a rear-facing child
For additional information regarding the restraint.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
section of this manual. rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
Front Air Bags Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags that vehicle.
belts for both the driver and front passenger. 2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat 3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is Driver Knee Air Bag The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove WARNING! This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
 Being too close to the steering wheel or
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
instrument panel during front air bag
may receive information from the front impact
deployment could cause serious injury,
sensors (if equipped) or other system
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending components.
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
(Continued)
SAFETY 133
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately On the other hand, depending on the type and
during an impact that requires air bag WARNING! (Continued) location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
deployment. A low energy output is used in less  Do not put anything on or around the air crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used bag covers or attempt to open them manu- that produce a severe initial deceleration.
for more severe collisions. ally. You may damage the air bags and you Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/ could be injured because the air bags may deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that no longer be functional. The protective damage by themselves are not good indicators
detects whether the driver or front passenger covers for the air bag cushions are of whether or not an air bag should have
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch designed to open only when the air bags deployed.
are inflating.
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Seat belts are necessary for your protection in 4
Front Air Bags.  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or more severe injuries in a collision. The air you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
front passenger seat track position sensors that bags work with your seat belt to restrain you When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
Front Air Bags based upon seat position. deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
even though you have air bags.
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
WARNING! bags.
 No objects should be placed over or near Front Air Bag Operation
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
the air bag on the instrument panel or Front Air Bags are designed to provide upper passenger side of the instrument panel
steering wheel because any such objects additional protection by supplementing the seat separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli- belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
inflate. collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
(Continued) frontal collisions, including some that may while helping to restrain the driver and front
produce substantial vehicle damage — for passenger.
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
134 SAFETY
Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Side Air Bags When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
knees of the driver and front passenger, and (SABs) The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
position the front occupants for improved seam into the space between the occupant and
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
interaction with the front air bags. the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
and with such a high force that it could injure
WARNING! Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the items are positioned in the area where the SAB
 Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
impact bolsters in any way. AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat injury from a deploying air bag.
 Do not mount any accessories to the knee trim on the outboard side of the seats.
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, The SABs may help to reduce the risk of WARNING!
stereos, citizen band radios, etc. occupant injury during certain side impacts, in Do not use accessory seat covers or place
addition to the injury reduction potential objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provided by the seat belts and body structure. the performance could be adversely affected
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental and/or objects could be pushed into you,
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument causing serious injury.
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by (SABICs)
working together with the seat belts, This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
pretensioners, and front air bags. Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
SAFETY 135
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial severity and type of collision. The side impact
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants sensors aid the ORC in determining the
through side windows in certain side impact appropriate response to impact events. The
events. system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
WARNING! that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
 Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
or other cargo up high enough to block the independently; a left side impact deploys the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) covering above the side windows where the deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle 4
Label Location SABIC and its deployment path are located damage by itself is not a good indicator of
should remain free from any obstructions. whether or not Side Air Bags should have
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
deployed.
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard  In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to do not install any accessory items in your The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
the injury reduction potential provided by the vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not collisions, including some collisions at certain
seat belts and body structure. add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. angles, or some side collisions that do not
Do not add roof racks that require perma- impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. deploy.
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
and seated properly, or if items are positioned Side Impacts restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in time than it takes to blink your eyes.
are at an even greater risk of injury from a certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
deploying air bag. Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
136 SAFETY
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners

WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
 Occupants, including children, who are up  Being too close to the Side Air Bags during sensing system determines if a rollover event
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be deployment could cause you to be severely may be in progress and whether deployment is
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, injured or killed. appropriate. In the event the vehicle
including children, should never lean on or experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
sleep against the door, side windows, or and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
area where the side air bags inflate, even if sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
they are in an infant or child restraint. seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
 Seat belts (and child restraints where Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always vehicle.
appropriate) are necessary for your protec- wear your seat belt even though you have The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
tion in all collisions. They also help keep Side Air Bags. or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
you in position, away from an inflating Side through side windows in certain rollover or side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the NOTE: impact events.
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
seat belts properly and sit upright with their Air Bag System Components
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
backs against the seats. Children must be ment. NOTE:
properly restrained in a child restraint or The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
booster seat that is appropriate for the size Rollover Events
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
of the child. Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
designed to activate in certain rollover events. Components listed below:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
WARNING! determines whether deployment in a particular  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
 Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not rollover event is appropriate, based on the  Air Bag Warning Light
lean against the door or window. Sit upright severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
in the center of the seat. itself is not a good indicator of whether or not  Steering Wheel and Column
(Continued) Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
 Instrument Panel
should have deployed.
SAFETY 137
 Knee Impact Bolsters If you do have a collision which deploys the air Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
bags, any or all of the following may occur: deployed. If you are involved in another
 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
 The air bag material may sometimes cause collision, the air bags will not be in place to
 Seat Belt Buckle Switch abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu- protect you.
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
 Supplemental Side Air Bags WARNING!
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
 Supplemental Knee Air Bags those you might get sliding along a carpet or Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension-
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by ers cannot protect you in another collision.
 Front and Side Impact Sensors contact with chemicals. They are not perma- Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,
 Seat Belt Pretensioners nent and normally heal quickly. However, if and the seat belt retractor assemblies 4
you haven’t healed significantly within a few replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
 Seat Track Position Sensors days, or if you have any blistering, see your ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
doctor immediately. troller System serviced as well.
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate  As the air bags deflate, you may see some
immediately after deployment. smoke-like particles. The particles are a NOTE:
normal by-product of the process that gener-
NOTE:  Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all rior trim, but they will open during air bag
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
collisions. This does not mean something is deployment.
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
wrong with the air bag system. eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.  After any collision, the vehicle should be
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
138 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System  Cut off battery power to the: by following the procedure described below. If
In the event of an impact, if the communication you have any doubt, contact an authorized
 Engine
network remains intact, and the power remains dealer.
intact, depending on the nature of the event,  Electric Motor (if equipped)
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will Electric power steering
 Procedure
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the  Brake booster After the event occurs, when the system is
following functions: active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is
 Electric park brake displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition
 Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
 Automatic transmission gear selector AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition
 Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle
 Horn
equipped) for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
 Front wiper the ground near the engine compartment and
 Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has fuel tank before resetting the system and
power  Headlamp washer pump
starting the engine.
 Turn on the interior lights, which remain on NOTE: Depending on the nature of the event the left
as long as the battery has power or for After an accident, remember to cycle the igni- and right turn signal lights, located in the
15 minutes from the intervention of the tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and instrument panel, may both be blinking and will
Enhanced Accident Response System remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the
 Unlock the power door locks
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on system reset procedure.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform the ground near the engine compartment and
any of these other functions in response to the fuel tank before resetting the system and
Enhanced Accident Response System: starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula- headlights) after an accident, reset the system
tion Door
SAFETY 139
Customer Will See

Customer Action NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light BLINKS.
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
Left turn light is OFF.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON. 4
Left turn light BLINKS.
Right turn light is OFF.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is OFF.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Right turn light is OFF.
Neutral State). Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
140 SAFETY
Customer Will See

Customer Action NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be com-
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
pleted within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed within

60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)
and the reset procedure must be performed  It is dangerous to try to repair any part of  Do not attempt to modify any part of your
again in order to be successful. the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
anyone who works on your vehicle that it dentally or may not function properly if
Maintaining Your Air Bag System has an air bag system. modifications are made. Take your vehicle
(Continued) to an authorized dealer for any air bag
WARNING!
system service. If your seat, including your
 Modifications to any part of the air bag trim cover and cushion, needs to be
system could cause it to fail when you need serviced in any way (including removal or
it. You could be injured if the air bag system loosening/tightening of seat attachment
is not there to protect you. Do not modify bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
the components or wiring, including adding dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
any kind of badges or stickers to the accessories may be used. If it is necessary
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper to modify the air bag system for persons
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do with disabilities, contact an authorized
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body dealer.
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
(Continued)
SAFETY 141
Event Data Recorder (EDR) NOTE: when properly restrained in the rear seats
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a rather than in the front.
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving WARNING!
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, In a collision, an unrestrained child can
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
understanding how a vehicle’s systems However, other parties, such as law enforce- force required to hold even an infant on your
performed. The EDR is designed to record data ment, could combine the EDR data with the type lap could become so great that you could not
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems of personally identifying data routinely acquired hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds during a crash investigation. The child and others could be badly injured or 4
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to To read data recorded by an EDR, special killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
record such data as: equipment is required, and access to the be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
 How various systems in your vehicle were vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
operating; vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as There are different sizes and types of restraints
law enforcement, that have the special for children from newborn size to the child
 Whether or not the driver and passenger
equipment, can read the information if they almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
 How far (if at all) the driver was depressing make sure you have the correct seat for your
Child Restraints
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, child. Carefully read and follow all the
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up instructions and warnings in the child restraint
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. at all times, including babies and children. Every Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
These data can help provide a better state in the United States, and every Canadian to the child restraint.
understanding of the circumstances in which province, requires that small children ride in Before buying any restraint system, make sure
crashes and injuries occur. proper restraint systems. This is the law, and that it has a label certifying that it meets all
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. applicable Safety Standards. You should also
Children 12 years or younger should ride make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. where you will use it.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
142 SAFETY
NOTE:  Canadian residents should refer to Transport

Canada’s website for additional information:
 For additional information, refer to http:// https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or child-car-seat-safety.html.
call 1-888-327-4236.
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight limits Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
of their child restraint vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Small Children have outgrown the height or weight limit of their Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
rear-facing child restraint vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints grown the height or weight limit of their booster
vehicle
seat
Infant And Child Restraints rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
Safety experts recommend that children ride seats. vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
old or until they reach either the height or vehicle. It is recommended for children from than infant carriers do, so they can be used
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. birth until they reach the weight or height limit of rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
Two types of child restraints can be used the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be infant carrier but are still less than at least two
SAFETY 143
years old. Children should remain rear-facing Children should remain in a forward-facing child
until they reach the highest weight or height seat with a harness for as long as possible, up WARNING! (Continued)
allowed by their convertible child seat. to the highest weight or height allowed by the  After a child restraint is installed in the
child seat. vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
WARNING! All children whose weight or height is above the forward or rearward because it can loosen
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in forward-facing limit for the child seat should use the child restraint attachments. Remove
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger a belt-positioning booster seat until the the child restraint before adjusting the
front air bag can cause death or serious vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
injury to a child 12 years or younger, cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s has been adjusted, reinstall the child
including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
seat cushion while the child’s back is against 4
restraint. the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning  When your child restraint is not in use,
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in booster seat. The child and belt-positioning secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If belt. vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in WARNING! the occupants or seatbacks and cause
that vehicle.  Improper installation can lead to failure of serious personal injury.
an infant or child restraint. It could come
Older Children And Child Restraints loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
Children who are two years old or who have
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
installing an infant or child restraint.
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
(Continued)
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
144 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder between the neck and arm? belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are the face or neck, move the child closer to the
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
long enough to bend over the front of the seat center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
touching the child’s thighs and not the
when their back is against the seatback, should position the seat belt on the child correctly.
stomach?
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the WARNING!
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone: whole trip? Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
1. Can the child sit all the way back against If the answer to any of these questions was the shoulder belt will not protect a child prop-
the back of the vehicle seat? “no”, then the child still needs to use a booster erly, which may result in serious injury or
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/ death. A child must always wear both the lap
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and shoulder portions of the seat belt cor-
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. rectly.
is still sitting all the way back?
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Combined Weight of Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Anchors LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Restraint Seat Belt Only
Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
SAFETY 145
Combined Weight of Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Anchors LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Restraint Seat Belt Only
Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Forward-Facing Child
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Restraint
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren and one top tether anchorage located behind LATCH Positions For Installing Child 4
(LATCH) Restraint System the seating position. These anchorages are Restraints In This Vehicle
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
LATCH Positions
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The — Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points Per Seating Position)
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There — Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
146 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the com-
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight bined weight of the child and the child restraint
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH 65 lbs (29.5 kg) is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchorage system to attach the child restraint? anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be or forward-facing child restraint.
used together to attach a rear-facing or for- No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
ward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat man-
ufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s man-
ual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center posi-
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a
tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorages No
child seat in the center seating position.
from the outboard seating positions?
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
Can two child restraints be attached using a not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
No
common lower LATCH anchorage? use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
SAFETY 147
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

The child seat may touch the back of the front
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-
Yes
back of the front passenger seat? turer also allows contact. See your child
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars There are tether strap anchorages 4
that are found at the rear of the seat behind each rear seating position
cushion where it meets the seatback, located on the back of the seat.
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion. Lower Anchorage Location - Rear Outboard Seats
Passenger Side (Example Shown)
Tether Anchorage Locations

148 SAFETY
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will Always follow the directions of the child room for the child seat. You may also move
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap restraint manufacturer when installing your the front seat forward to allow more room
on each side. Each will have a hook or child restraint. Not all child restraint systems for the child seat.
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and will be installed as described here.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child child restraint to the lower anchorages in
Restraint the selected seating position.
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap If the selected seating position has a 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the the section “Installing Child Restraints
after it is attached to the anchorage. instructions below. See the section “Installing Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to directions to attach a tether anchor.
Center Seat LATCH check what type of seat belt each seating
position has. 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
WARNING! child restraint rearward and downward into
 Do not install a child restraint in the center 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps the seat. Remove slack in the straps
position using the LATCH system. This posi- and on the tether strap of the child seat so according to the child restraint
tion is not approved for installing child that you can more easily attach the hooks manufacturer’s instructions.
seats using the LATCH attachments. You or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
must use the seat belt and tether anchor to 2. Place the child seat between the lower tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
install a child seat in the center seating anchorages for that seating position. For
position. seat at the belt path. It should not move
some second row seats, you may need to more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
 Never use the same lower anchorage to recline the seat and / or raise the head direction.
attach more than one child restraint. restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-Compat- the rear seat can be moved forward and
ible Child Restraint” for typical installation rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
instructions. move it to its rear-most position to make
SAFETY 149
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR The seat belts in the passenger seating
(ALR) Seat Belt:
WARNING! (Continued) positions are equipped with a Switchable
When using the LATCH attaching system to  Child restraint anchorages are designed to Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts withstand only those loads imposed by designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
that are not being used by other occupants or correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no tight around the child restraint so that it is not
being used to secure child restraints. An unused circumstances are they to be used for adult necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
belt could injure a child if they play with it and seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before items or equipment to the vehicle. by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
installing a child restraint using the LATCH and then letting the webbing retract back into
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a 4
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the Seat Belt clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
buckled seat belt interferes with the child Child restraint systems are designed to be into the retractor.
restraint installation, instead of buckling it secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode”
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. description in “Switchable Automatic Locking
through the child restraint belt path and then Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all WARNING! Systems” for additional information on ALR.
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not  Improper installation or failure to properly Please see the table below and the following
toys and that they should not play with them. secure a child restraint can lead to failure sections for more information.
of the restraint. The child could be badly
WARNING! injured or killed.
 Improper installation of a child restraint to  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of directions exactly when installing an infant
the restraint. The child could be badly or child restraint.
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
150 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing

Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
— Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight Always use the tether anchor when using the
of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor seat belt to install a forward facing child
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
child restraint? the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
Yes the child restraint is allowed, if the child
back of the front passenger seat?
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
SAFETY 151
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating posi-
seat belt against the belt path of the child No
tion with an ALR retractor.
restraint?
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable rear-most position to make room for the 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): child seat. You may also move the front If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
Child restraint systems are designed to be seat forward to allow more room for the out any webbing. If the retractor is not
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap child seat. locked, repeat step 5.
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
4
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
the retractor to pass it through the belt path tighten the lap portion around the child
WARNING!
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt restraint while you push the child restraint
 Improper installation or failure to properly webbing in the belt path. rearward and downward into the vehicle
secure a child restraint can lead to failure seat.
of the restraint. The child could be badly 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
injured or killed. hear a “click.” 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
directions exactly when installing an infant tight against the child seat.
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
or child restraint. the section “Installing Child Restraints
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for
1. Place the child seat in the center of the pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the directions to attach a tether anchor.
seating position. For some second row retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
seats, you may need to recline the seat 9. Test that the child restraint is installed
back into the retractor. As the webbing
and/or raise the head restraint (if tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat at the belt path. It should not move
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
seat can be moved forward and rearward more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
Locking mode.
in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its direction.
152 SAFETY
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so 1. Look behind the seating position where
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if you plan to install the child restraint to find
necessary. the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top access to the tether anchorage. If there is
Tether Anchorage: no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
WARNING!
another position in the vehicle if one is
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing available.
car seat to any location in front of the car
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most Rear Seat Tether Anchors
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a direct path for the strap between the anchor
WARNING!
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage and the child seat. If your vehicle is
that is approved for that seating position, equipped with adjustable rear head  An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
restraints, raise the head restraint, and lead to increased head motion and
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
where possible, route the tether strap under possible injury to the child. Use only the
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
the head restraint and between the two anchorage position directly behind the child
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
posts. If not possible, lower the head seat to secure a child restraint top tether
location of approved tether anchorages in
restraint and pass the tether strap around strap.
your vehicle.
the outboard side of the head restraint.  If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
slip into the opening between the seat-
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
SAFETY 153
Transporting Pets
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown  Do not allow people to ride in any area of  If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
about and possibly injured, or injure a your vehicle that is not equipped with seats with the engine running, adjust your
and seat belts. heating or cooling controls to force outside
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet speed.
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by and using a seat belt properly.
seat belts.
The best protection against carbon monoxide
Exhaust Gas
SAFETY TIPS entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
4
WARNING!
Transporting Passengers Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
CARGO AREA.
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon- underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
WARNING! scious and can eventually poison you. To have a competent mechanic inspect the
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: complete exhaust system and adjacent body
 Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior  Do not run the engine in a closed garage or areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
heat build-up may cause serious injury or in confined areas any longer than needed mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
death. to move your vehicle in or out of the area. connections could permit exhaust fumes to
 If you are required to drive with the trunk/ seep into the passenger compartment. In
 It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
collision, people riding in these areas are change. Replace as required.
more likely to be seriously injured or killed. BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
(Continued)
154 SAFETY
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately.
WARNING!
Vehicle
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
Seat Belts stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fas-
“Safety” for further information.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, teners may cause your floor mat to interfere
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Defroster with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and cause a loss of vehicle control. To pre-
Do not disassemble or modify the system. and place the blower control on high speed. You vent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced should be able to feel the air directed against  ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must the windshield. See an authorized dealer for using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
be replaced after a collision if they have been service if your defroster is inoperable. install your floor mat upside down or turn
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
Floor Mat Safety Information
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt mat is secured using the floor mat
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. Always use floor mats designed to fit your
fasteners on a regular basis.
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
Air Bag Warning Light interfere with the operation of the accelerator,  ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
is securely attached using the floor mat installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch existing floor mat.
light is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle  ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as in other ways. vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
possible. After the bulb check, this light will cannot be properly attached and secured to
illuminate with a single chime when a fault with your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
the Air Bag System has been detected. It will replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light mat for the specific make, model, and year
comes on intermittently or remains on while of your vehicle.
(Continued)
SAFETY 155
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
 ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the  If the vehicle carpet has been removed and lights and exterior lights while you work the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter- re-installed, always properly attach carpet controls. Check turn signal and high beam
ference, with the vehicle properly parked to the floor and check the floor mat indicator lights on the instrument panel.
with the engine off, fully depress the accel- fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if Fully depress each pedal to check for inter- Door Latches
present) to check for interference. If your ference with the accelerator, brake, or Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
floor mat interferes with the operation of clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, Fluid Leaks
 It is recommended to only use mild soap 4
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and and water to clean your floor mats. After
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
place the floor mat in your trunk. cleaning, always check your floor mat has parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
 ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on been properly installed and is secured to Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
the passenger’s side floor area. your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
by lightly pulling mat. should be located and corrected immediately.
 ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch Outside The Vehicle
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
Tires
control.
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
 NEVER place any objects under the floor uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
could change the position of the floor mat
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
and may cause interference with the accel-
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
(Continued) tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
156
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake
If Engine Fails To Start
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, before shifting to any driving range. WARNING!
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten
Proceed as follows: Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
your seat belt, and if present, instruct all other
occupants to buckle their seat belts. 1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put the throttle body air inlet opening in an
the gear selector in the PARK or NEUTRAL attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
WARNING! position. in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
2. Press on the brake pedal, without pressing If the engine fails to start after you have
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
the accelerator. followed the "Normal Starting" procedure, and
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- has not experienced an extended park
tended is dangerous for a number of 3. Place the ignition in the START mode and
release it as soon as the engine is started. condition as identified in "Extended Park
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
Starting" procedure it may be flooded. Push the
or fatally injured. Children should be 4. If the engine does not start, place the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
warned not to touch the parking brake, ignition in the OFF mode and wait 10-15 hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
brake pedal or the gear selector. seconds before attempting to restart the 15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the engine. case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition in
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil- RUN mode, release the accelerator pedal and
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the Tip Start Feature repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
ON or RUN mode. A child could operate Do not press the accelerator. Place the ignition
power windows, other controls, or move the switch briefly to the START mode and release it.
vehicle. The starter motor will continue to run but will
automatically disengage when the engine is
running.
STARTING AND OPERATING 157
Extended Park Starting

WARNING! CAUTION!
 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid To prevent damage to the starter, do not con- NOTE:
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an tinuously crank the engine for more than Extended Park condition occurs when the
attempt to start the vehicle. This could 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds vehicle has not been started or driven for at
result in flash fire causing serious personal before trying again. least 30 days.
injury. 1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables
Cold Weather Operation to the battery to ensure a full battery
 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold charge during the crank cycle.
automatic transmission cannot be started conditions an externally powered electric block
2. Place the ignition in the START mode and
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the heater (if equipped) is required for the 1.3L
release it when the engine starts.
catalytic converter and once the engine has Turbo engine below -20°F (-29°C) and for the
5
started, ignite and damage the converter 2.4L engine below -31°F (-35°C) and is 3. If the engine fails to start within 10 to
and vehicle. recommended for the 2.4L engine below -20°F 15 seconds, place the ignition in the OFF
 If the vehicle has a discharged battery, (-29°C). mode, wait five seconds to allow the starter
booster cables may be used to obtain a To prevent possible engine damage while to cool, then repeat the Extended Park
start from a booster battery or the battery in starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will Starting procedure.
another vehicle. This type of start can be inhibit engine cranking when the ambient
4. If the engine fails to start after eight
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to temperature is less than -20°F (-29°C) for the
attempts, allow the starter to cool for at
“Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” 1.3L Turbo engine, and -31°F (-35°C) for the
least 10 minutes, then repeat the
for further information. 2.4L engine, and the oil temperature sensor
procedure.
reading indicates an engine block heater has
not been used. The message “plug in engine
CAUTION!
heater” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster when the ambient temperature is below To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank
-4°F (-20°C) at the time the engine is shut off continuously for more than 10 seconds at a
as a reminder to avoid possible crank delays at time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
the next cold start.
158 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine Opening the driver side door with the ignition in
RUN will sound a short chime that reminds the
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
Proceed as follows: A long break-in period is not required for the
driver to place the ignition to OFF.
 Travel slowly, letting the engine run at a engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
reduced RPM, without accelerating suddenly. your vehicle.
window switches remain active for three
 It is recommended to wait until the engine minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
coolant temperature gauge starts to rise for function. (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
maximum performance. speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the
desirable.
Stopping The Engine temperature inside the engine compartment to
cool before shutting off the engine. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
and hold the ignition or push the START/STOP This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
button three times consecutively within a few to cool the turbocharger after the engine is shut should be avoided.
seconds. The engine will shut down, and the off. Depending on the type of driving and the The engine oil installed in the engine at the
ignition will be placed in the RUN position. amount of cargo, the pump will run for up to factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
Turning off the car (cycle the ignition from the 10 minutes after the engine has been shut off lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
RUN mode to the OFF mode), the power supply to circulate coolant through the turbocharger. anticipated climate conditions under which
to the accessories are maintained for a period Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet vehicle operations will occur. For the
of three minutes. operation, it is normal to hear it running during recommended viscosity and quality grades,
this time. refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servicing And
NOTE:
Maintenance”.
If the vehicle fails to shut off using the ignition,
refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
You can engage the EPB in two ways; small amount of brake pedal movement. The
CAUTION! EPB can be applied even when the ignition is in
 Manually, by applying the park brake switch.
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Min- the OFF mode however, it can only be released
eral Oil in the engine or damage may result.  Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park when the ignition is in the RUN mode.
Brake feature in the customer programmable
NOTE: features section of the Uconnect settings or NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its in “Safe Hold” conditions. The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera- switch is held for longer than 60 seconds in
tion. This should be considered a normal part of either the released or applied position. The light
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) EPB will automatically engage whenever the
Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Park transmission is moved into PARK, or with a
5
Brake System (EPB) that offers simple manual transmission, when the ignition switch
operation, and some additional features that is in the STOP/OFF position. If your foot is on the
make the parking brake more convenient and brake pedal, you may notice a small amount of
useful. brake pedal movement while the EPB is
Electric Park Brake Switch
The parking brake is primarily intended to engaging.
To apply the EPB manually, pull up on the switch
prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked. The electric park brake will be automatically
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the released if the driver's seat belt is buckled (only
sound from the back of the vehicle while the
parking brake is applied. Also, be certain to in case of automatic transmission) and driver's
EPB engages. Once the parking brake is fully
leave the transmission in PARK. intention to start (in forward or reverse
engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
The EPB switch is located in the center console. direction) is recognized by the system.
instrument cluster and an indicator on the
switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the EPB, you may notice a
To release the EPB manually, the ignition must

be in the RUN mode. Put your foot on the brake
pedal, then push the EPB switch down  When exiting the vehicle, always remove  Always fully apply the parking brake when
momentarily. You may hear a slight whirring the key fob from the vehicle and lock your leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
sound from the back of the car while the parking vehicle. cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
brake disengages. You may also notice a small  Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
amount of movement in the brake pedal. Once with access to an unlocked vehicle. do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
the EPB is fully disengaged, the BRAKE warning Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- cause damage or injury.
lamp in the instrument cluster and the LED tended is dangerous for a number of
indicator on the switch will extinguish. reasons. A child or others could be seriously
CAUTION!
NOTE: or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
 When parking on a hill, it is important to turn brake pedal or the transmission gear with the parking brake released, a brake sys-
the front wheels toward the curb on a down- selector. tem malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
hill grade and away from the curb on an uphill system serviced by an authorized dealer
grade. Apply the EPB before placing the gear immediately.
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
transmission locking mechanism may make If exceptional circumstances should make it
ON or RUN mode. A child could operate
it difficult to move the gear selector out of necessary to engage the EPB while the vehicle
power windows, other controls, or move the
PARK. The EPB should always be applied is in motion, maintain upward pressure on the
vehicle.
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. EPB switch for as long as engagement is
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disen- desired. The brake warning lamp could
 If the clutch pedal is released at the same gaged before driving; failure to do so can illuminate in case of the hydraulic system is not
time the gas pedal is pressed, the EPB will be lead to brake failure and a collision. available. The rear stop lamps will also be
automatically released (manual transmis-
(Continued) illuminated automatically while the vehicle
sions only).
remains in motion.
To disengage the EPB while the vehicle is in Auto Park Brake SafeHold
motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is
The EPB can be programmed to be applied SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system
brought to a complete stop using the EPB, when
automatically whenever the vehicle speed is that will engage the park brake automatically if
the vehicle reaches approximately 1.9 mph
below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the automatic the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition is
(3 km/h) the EPB will remain engaged.
transmission is placed in PARK, or with a in the RUN mode.
WARNING! manual transmission, whenever the ignition is For automatic transmissions, the EPB will
in the OFF mode. Auto Park Brake is enabled automatically engage if all of the following
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake and disabled by customer selection through the conditions are met:
engaged, or repeated use of the parking Customer Programmable Features section of  Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious the Uconnect Settings.
damage to the brake system. Be sure the  There is no attempt to depress the brake
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
parking brake is fully disengaged before driv- pedal or accelerator pedal.
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the 5
ing; failure to do so can lead to brake failure
release position while the transmission is  The seat belt is unbuckled.
and a collision.
placed in PARK (automatic transmission) and
the ignition is in the RUN mode. In some cases,  The driver door is open.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB with an automatic transmission, if the ignition is  The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate. cycled from ON/RUN to OFF and the gear
This may be accompanied by the Brake warning selector is not firmly locked in the PARK
lamp flashing. In this status some EPB position, EPB applies automatically even if Auto
functionalities may be deactivated. In this Park Brake has been previously disabled.
event, urgent service of the EPB system is
required. Do not rely on the EPB to hold the
vehicle stationary.
For manual transmissions, the EPB will When servicing your rear brakes, it may be NOTE:
automatically engage if all of the following necessary for you or your technician to push the A dedicated message will appear in the instru-
conditions are met: rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the ment cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be
 Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h). electric park brake system, this can only be activated.
done after retracting the EPB actuator. The
 There is no attempt to depress the brake When brake service work is complete, the
actuator retraction can be done easily by
pedal or accelerator pedal. following steps must be followed to reset the
entering the Brake Service Mode through the
parking brake system to normal operation:
 The clutch pedal is not pressed. Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu
based system will guide you through the steps  Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
 The seat belt is unbuckled. necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to  Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
 The driver door is open. perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be  Apply the EPB Switch.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by met in order to be activated: NOTE:
pushing the EPB Switch while the driver door is
 The vehicle must be at a standstill. A dedicated message will appear in the instru-
open and the brake pedal is pressed. Once
ment cluster if Brake Service Mode cannot be
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled  The parking brake must be disabled.
deactivated.
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
 The transmission must be in park or neutral.
(20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF
mode and back to RUN again. WARNING!
 The EPB switch not activated.
Brake Service Mode You can be badly injured working on or
 The vehicle in ignition RUN mode. around a motor vehicle. Do only that service
We recommend having your brakes serviced by work for which you have the knowledge and
 The brake pedal not pressed.
an authorized dealer. You should only make the right equipment. If you have any doubt
repairs for which you have the knowledge and While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will about your ability to perform a service job,
the right equipment. You should only enter flash continuously while the ignition is in the take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Brake Service Mode during brake service. RUN mode.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:

During cold weather, you may experience
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL
position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below
WARNING! increased effort in shifting until the transmis- the knob and simultaneously move the lever to
sion fluid warms up. This is normal. the left and then forward.
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the park- To shift the gears, press the clutch pedal to the Shifting
ing brake fully applied. The parking brake floor and put the gear selector to the desired Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting
should always be applied when the driver is position (the diagram for the engagement of the gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly
not in the vehicle, especially on an incline. gears is displayed on the handle of the lever). press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use FIRST gear when starting
from a standing position.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds 5
clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on To utilize your manual transmission efficiently
a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, for fuel economy and performance, it should be
as this will cause abnormal wear on the upshifted as listed in the recommended shift
clutch. speed chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed
for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling
a trailer, these recommended up-shift speeds
REVERSE Ring may not apply.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

Gear Selection 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
All Engines Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)
Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmis-
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)
sion is normal. This noise can be most notice- Do not downshift for additional engine brak-  Failure to follow the maximum recom-
able when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels mended downshifting speeds may cause
the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but could lose their grip, and the vehicle could the engine damage and/or damage the
it may also be heard when driving. The noise skid. clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
may also be more noticeable when the trans-  Descending a hill in low range with clutch
mission is warm. This noise is normal and is not pedal depressed could result in clutch
an indication of a problem with your clutch or CAUTION!
damage.
transmission.  Skipping gears and downshifting into lower
gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
Downshifting
the engine and clutch systems, Any attempt
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is to shift into lower gear with clutch pedal CAUTION!
recommended to preserve brakes when driving depressed may result damage to the clutch Failure to follow the maximum recommended
down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at system. Shifting into lower gear and downshifting speeds may cause the engine to
the right time provides better acceleration when releasing the clutch may result in engine overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc,
you desire to resume speed. Downshift damage. even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
progressively. Do not skip gears to avoid
 When descending a hill, be very careful to
overspeeding the engine and clutch.
downshift one gear at a time to prevent
overspeeding the engine which can cause
engine damage, and/or clutch damage,
even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If
transfer case is in low range the vehicle
speeds to cause engine and clutch damage
are significantly lower.
(Continued)
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
transmission out of PARK, or to shift from

CAUTION! NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
WARNING!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or down- vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
shift at too high of a vehicle speed, these con- (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
ditions may cause the engine to overspeed if System" in this section). Select the DRIVE range idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
too low of a gear is selected and the clutch for normal driving. the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
pedal is released. Damage to the clutch and The electronically-controlled transmission erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
the transmission can result from skipping a adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs, could lose control of the vehicle and hit 5
gear while downshifting or downshifting at along with environmental and road conditions. someone or something. Only shift into gear
too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch The transmission electronics are when the engine is idling normally and your
pedal is held pressed (i.e., not released). self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION a normal condition, and precision shifts will injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
develop within a few hundred miles all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
— IF EQUIPPED (kilometers). while the engine is running. Before exiting a
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art, vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
fuel efficient nine-speed transmission. then apply the parking brake, shift the
The transmission gear range (PRND) is transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
displayed beside the gear selector and in the tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
instrument cluster display. To select a gear mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
range, push the lock button on the gear selector securing the vehicle against unwanted
and move the selector rearward or forward. You movement.
must also press the brake pedal to shift the (Continued)
NOTE:
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
 When leaving the vehicle, always make  Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, after the vehicle has come to a complete pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and stop. (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In
lock the vehicle.  Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3,
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
with access to an unlocked vehicle. above idle speed. Move the gear selector to the right (into the
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,
 Before shifting into any gear, make sure REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
tended is dangerous for a number of your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be NOTE:
warned not to touch the parking brake, You must press and hold the brake pedal while
brake pedal or the transmission gear shifting out of PARK.
selector.
Gear Selector
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil- The transmission gear selector has PARK,
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-)
ON or RUN mode. A child could operate shift positions. Manual shifts can be made
power windows, other controls, or move the using the AutoStick shift control (refer to
Gear Selector Lock Button
vehicle. “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the gear selector forward The nine-speed transmission has been
(-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position developed to meet the needs of FCA current
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select and future lineup of FWD/AWD vehicles.
the transmission gear, and will display the Software and calibration is refined to optimize
current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, the customer’s driving experience and fuel
etc.
economy. By design, some vehicle and When parking on a level surface, you may shift
drive-line combinations utilize 9th gear only in the transmission into PARK first, and then apply WARNING! (Continued)
very specific driving situations and conditions. the EPB.  Your vehicle could move and injure you and
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
when the accelerator pedal is released and the shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise move the transmission gear selector out of
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the load on the transmission locking PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
the brake pedal when shifting between these mechanism may make it difficult to move the sure the transmission is in PARK before
gears. gear selector out of PARK. As an added exiting the vehicle.
DO NOT depress the accelerator pedal when precaution, turn the front wheels toward the  The transmission may not engage PARK if
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another curb on a downhill grade and away from the the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
gear range. curb on an uphill grade. vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
When exiting the vehicle, always: PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P) 5
CAUTION!  Apply the parking brake.
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment completely stopped, and the PARK position
 Shift the transmission into PARK.
to allow the selected gear to engage before is properly indicated, before exiting the
accelerating. This is especially important  Turn the ignition OFF. vehicle.
when the engine is cold.
 Remove the key fob from the vehicle.  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
Gear Ranges NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
WARNING! idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
PARK (P) the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
This range supplements the Electric Park Brake  Never use the PARK position as a substi- erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
(EPB) by locking the transmission. The engine tute for the park brake. Always apply the could lose control of the vehicle and hit
can be started in this range. Never attempt to park brake fully when exiting the vehicle to someone or something. Only shift into gear
use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply guard against vehicle movement and when the engine is idling normally (or
the EPB when exiting the vehicle in this range. possible injury or damage. stopped) and your foot is firmly pressing the
(Continued) brake pedal.
(Continued)
 Look at the transmission gear position

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) display and verify that it indicates the PARK
 Unintended movement of a vehicle could  Do not leave the key fob in or near the position (P), and is not blinking.
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
 With the brake pedal released, verify that the
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
while the engine is running or the propul- ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
sion system is active. Before exiting a windows, other controls, or move the REVERSE (R)
vehicle, always come to a complete stop, vehicle. This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
then apply the park brake, shift the trans- Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
mission into PARK, and turn the ignition come to a complete stop.
OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF mode, CAUTION!
NEUTRAL (N)
the transmission is locked in PARK,  Before moving the transmission gear
securing the vehicle against unwanted Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
selector out of PARK, you must turn the igni-
movement. prolonged periods with the engine running. The
tion to the ON/RUN mode, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the engine may be started in this range. Apply the
 When leaving the vehicle, always make
gear selector could result. electric park brake and shift the transmission
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and  DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
lock the vehicle. PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, WARNING!
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or as this can damage the drivetrain.
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
with access to an unlocked vehicle. the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat- The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the unsafe practices that limit your response to
tended is dangerous for a number of changing traffic or road conditions. You might
reasons. A child or others could be seriously transmission into the PARK position:
lose control of the vehicle and have a colli-
or fatally injured. Children should be  When shifting into PARK, press the lock
sion.
warned not to touch the park brake, brake button on the gear selector, and firmly move
pedal or the transmission gear selector. the gear selector all the way forward until it
(Continued) stops and is fully seated.
performance and extend transmission life by AutoStick

CAUTION! reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any If the transmission temperature exceeds feature providing manual shift control, giving
other reason with the transmission in NEU- normal operating limits, the transmission you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
TRAL can cause severe transmission dam- controller may modify the transmission shift allows you to maximize engine braking,
age. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Dis- the range of torque converter clutch and improve overall vehicle performance. This
abled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency” for engagement. This is done to prevent system can also provide you with more control
further information. transmission damage due to overheating. during passing, city driving, cold slippery
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing and
DRIVE (D) many other situations.
“Transmission Temperature Warning Light”
This range should be used for most city and may illuminate and the transmission may Operation
highway driving. It provides the smoothest 5
operate differently until the transmission cools When the gear selector is in the AutoStick
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel down. position (beside the DRIVE position), it can be
economy. The transmission automatically
During cold temperatures, transmission moved forward and rearward. This allows the
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
operation may be modified depending on driver to manually select the transmission gear
position provides optimum driving
engine and transmission temperature as well being used. Moving the gear selector forward (-)
characteristics under all normal operating
as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm triggers a downshift, and rearward (+) an
conditions.
up time of the engine and transmission to upshift. The current gear is displayed in the
When frequent transmission shifting occurs achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of instrument cluster.
(such as when operating the vehicle under the torque converter clutch, and shifts into 8th
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or 9th gear, are inhibited until the transmission
traveling into strong head winds or while towing fluid is warm. Normal operation will resume
a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control once the transmission temperature has risen to
(refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further a suitable level.
information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve
NOTE:  The system will ignore attempts to upshift at Transmission Limp Home Mode
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only too low of a vehicle speed.
Transmission function is electronically
shift up or down when the driver moves the gear
 Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is monitored for abnormal conditions. If a
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), except as
engaged because the transmission will not condition is detected that could result in
described below.
shift automatically. transmission damage, Transmission Limp
 The transmission will automatically upshift Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
 Transmission shifting will be more noticeable transmission may operate only in a fixed gear,
when necessary to prevent engine over-
when AutoStick is enabled.
speed. or may remain in neutral. The Malfunction
 The system may revert to automatic shift Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
 The transmission will automatically down- Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine to an authorized dealer for service without
detected.
lugging) and will display the current gear. damaging the transmission.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
 The transmission will automatically down- In the event of a momentary problem, the
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in
shift to FIRST or SECOND gear (depending on transmission can be reset to regain all forward
or out of the AutoStick position at any time
model) when coming to a stop. After a stop, gears by performing the following steps:
without taking your foot off the accelerator
the driver should manually upshift (+) the
pedal. 1. Stop the vehicle.
transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.
 You can start out (from a stop) in FIRST or WARNING! 2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND gear possible. If not, shift the transmission to
Do not downshift for additional engine brak-
can be helpful in snow or icy conditions. Tap NEUTRAL.
ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
the gear selector forward or rearward to could lose their grip and the vehicle could 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
select the desired gear after the vehicle is skid, causing a collision or personal injury. engine turns off.
brought to a stop.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
 If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to overspeed, that shift will not occur.
5. Restart the engine. in the RUN mode (engine running or not) and
the brake pedal must be pressed.
CAUTION!
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
The brake pedal must also be pressed before All wheels must have the same size and type
problem is no longer detected, the
pushing the button on the gear selector to shift tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used.
transmission will return to normal
from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the Unequal tire size may cause failure of the
operation.
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds. power transfer unit.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we FOUR WHEEL DRIVE Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer Jeep Active Drive (4WD) And Jeep Active Drive The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho- Low (4WD Low) normal driving mode.
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to deter- Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power NOTE:
mine if the problem could recur. If the Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic 5
It is not possible to carry out the change of
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer with no driver inputs or additional driving skills mode when the vehicle exceeds the speed of
service is required. required. Under normal driving conditions, the 75 mph (120 km/h).
Ignition Park Interlock front wheels provide most of the traction. If the
front wheels begin to lose traction, power is Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The The buttons for the activation of four wheel
Interlock, which requires the transmission to be greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater drive are located on the device Selec-Terrain
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the the power transfer to the rear wheels. and allow you to select the following:
OFF mode. Also, the transmission is locked in
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy  4WD LOCK
PARK whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.
throttle input (where one may have no wheel
 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch and
Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that performance characteristics.
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be
Active Drive Control — If Equipped Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk NOTE:
Models Only)
 Both LOCK and LOW LED lights will blink and
then become active on the Selec-Terrain
switch until the shift is complete.
 The instrument cluster display will illuminate
the "4WD Low" icon.
Disabling 4WD LOW
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle
must be stationary and the transmission shifted
4WD LOCK Button into NEUTRAL. Push the 4WD LOW button once.
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to 4WD LOW Button (Trailhawk)
ensure immediate availability of torque to the The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the
rear drive axles. This feature is selectable in off-road performance in all modes. To enable
AUTO mode and automatic in the other driving 4WD Low, please follow the steps below:
mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the Enabling 4WD LOW
following ways: With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in RUN
 When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed. mode or with the engine running, shift the
 When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated transmission into NEUTRAL and push the
from AUTO to any other off-road modes. button once 4WD LOW. The instrument cluster
will display the message "4WD LOW" once the
shift is complete.
SELEC-TERRAIN slippage, except for in 4WD LOW (Trailhawk

models only).
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input,  SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
to provide the best performance for all terrains. with poor traction, such as sandy bottoms.
The transmission is set to provide maximum
Mode Selection Guide traction. This mode allows more wheel spin
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the and higher shift points to help motor through
desired mode. loose areas.
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)  MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces

with poor traction, such as roads covered by
 AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a
mud or wet grass.
continuous operation, is fully automatic and 5
can be used on and off-road. This mode  ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only
balances traction to ensure maneuverability available in 4WD LOW range. The device sets
and acceleration improvement compared to the vehicle to maximize traction and allow
a vehicle with two-wheel drive. This mode the highest steering capacity for off-road
also reduces fuel consumption, since it surfaces. This mode gives you the maximum
allows the disconnect of the drive shaft performance off-road. Use for low speed
Selec-Terrain Switch where conditions permit. obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
 SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater NOTE:
stability under conditions of bad weather. It's
used on and off-road and on surfaces with  ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles
poor traction, such as roads covered with equipped with the Trailhawk package.
snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on  Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec
certain operating conditions), the transmis- Speed Control for steep downhill control.
sion will use SECOND gear (rather than FIRST Refer to “Electronic Brake Control (EBC)
gear) during launches, to minimize wheel System” in “Safety” for further information.
ACTIVE GRILLE SHUTTERS — IF EQUIPPED providing assist, you will still have the ability to
steer the vehicle manually.
 If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
Your vehicle may be equipped with Active Grille
Shutters, an automatic system with mobile WARNING! STOP/START SYSTEM
flaps applied in front of the cooling module,
Continued operation with reduced assist The Stop/Start function was developed to
whose automatic opening/closing movement
could pose a safety risk to yourself and oth- reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop
aims at improving the vehicle aerodynamic
ers. Service should be obtained as soon as the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if
efficiency and thus reducing consumption while
possible. the required conditions are met. Releasing the
ensuring optimal engine operating temperature
brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
conditions.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” will automatically restart the engine.
When a greater air flow is required for cooling
OR “POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - Automatic Mode
(e.g. when driving in urban traffic) the flaps
SERVICE SYSTEM” message and a
open, whereas when temperature is low or air The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
steering wheel icon are displayed on
flow is enough (example when driving on normal customer engine start. At that time, the
the instrument cluster screen, it indicates that
highways), the flaps close. system will go into STOP/START READY and if all
the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
If there is a failure detected, the instrument service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
panel will illuminate the engine check/ steering assistance. Refer to “Instrument START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
malfunction indicator warning light. Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Instrument Panel” for further information. Must Occur:
POWER STEERING  The system must be in STOP/START READY
The Electric Power Steering system will give you NOTE:
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
good vehicle response and increased ease of  Even if the power steering assistance is no displayed in the instrument cluster display
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will longer operational, it is still possible to steer within the Stop/Start section. Refer to
vary its assist to provide light efforts while the vehicle. Under these conditions there will “Warning/Indicator Lights And Messages” in
parking and good feel while driving. If the be a substantial increase in steering effort, “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
electric steering system experiences a fault that especially at low speeds and during parking further information.
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from maneuvers.
 The vehicle must be completely stopped.  Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
acceptable cabin temperature has not been several times without the Stop/Start system
 The gear selector must be in a forward gear
achieved. going into a STOP/START READY state under
and the brake pedal depressed.
more extreme conditions of the items listed
 HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will above.
blower speed.
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in  HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained While in a forward gear, the engine will start
 Engine has not reached normal operating when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
upon return to an engine running condition.
temperature. pedal is depressed. The transmission will
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
 The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Autostop
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check  Hood is open. Automatically While In Autostop Mode: 5
many safety and comfort conditions to see if  Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode (if  The transmission gear selector is moved out
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the equipped with 4WD). of DRIVE except in the PARK and NEUTRAL
operation of the Stop/Start system may be position.
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/  Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
Start Screen. In the following situations the pressure with vehicle in DRIVE position.  To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
engine will not stop: Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop  HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
 Driver’s seat belt is not buckled. Include:
 HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
Driver’s door is not closed.  Accelerator pedal input.
 manually adjusted.
 Battery temperature is too warm or cold.  Engine temp too high.  Battery voltage drops too low.
 Battery charge is low.  5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from  Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
previous AUTOSTOP. pedal applications).
 The vehicle is on a steep grade.
 Steering angle beyond threshold.  Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
 A Stop/Start system error occurs. To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
 4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode (if 1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
equipped with 4WD). the switch bank). The light on the switch switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
will illuminate. off.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The
Electric Park Brake While In Autostop Mode: System Malfunction
 The driver’s door is open and brake pedal If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
released. system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
 The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat
message will appear in the instrument cluster
belt is unbuckled.
display. Refer to “Warning/Indicator Lights And
 The engine hood has been opened. Messages” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
 A Stop/Start system error occurs.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the Stop/Start OFF Switch message appears in the instrument cluster
engine off, the engine may require a manual display, have the system checked by an
restart and the electric park brake may require 2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will authorized dealer.
a manual release (depress brake pedal and appear in the instrument cluster display.
push Electric Park Brake switch). Refer to Refer to “Warning/Indicator Lights And SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Messages” in “Getting To Know Your
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further Instrument Panel” for further information.
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
information. 3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the 20 mph (40 km/h).
Stop/Start system), the engine will not be The Speed Control buttons are located on the
stopped. right side of the steering wheel.
4. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back
to the ON mode every time the ignition is
turned off and back on.
Activation When the vehicle has reached the desired

speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
release. Release the accelerator and the
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a Varying The Speed
second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will turn To Increase Speed
off. The system should be turned off when not in
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
use.
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
Speed Control Buttons WARNING! The driver’s preferred units can be selected
1 — On/Off through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
2 — SET (+)/Accel not in use is dangerous. You could acciden- 5
3 — RES/Resume Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
tally set the system or cause it to go faster
information. The speed increment shown is
4 — SET (-)/Decel than you want. You could lose control and
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
5 — CANC/Cancel have an accident. Always leave the system off
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
when you are not using it.
NOTE: U.S. Speed (mph)
Setting A Desired Speed  Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
 In order to ensure proper operation, the
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
Speed Control System has been designed to Turn the Speed Control on. quent tap of the button results in an increase
shut down if multiple Speed Control func-
NOTE: of 1 mph.
tions are operated at the same time. If this
occurs, the Speed Control System can be The vehicle should be traveling at a steady  If the button is continually pushed, the set
reactivated by pushing the Speed Control on/ speed and on level ground before pushing the speed will continue to increase until the
off button and resetting the desired vehicle SET (+) or SET (-) button. button is released, then the new set speed
set speed. will be established.
 The Speed Control function will not work in
4WD Low Range.
Metric Speed (km/h)  If the button is continually pushed, the set Deactivation
 Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in speed will continue to decrease until the
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse- button is released, then the new set speed
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing
quent tap of the button results in an increase will be established.
the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control
of 1 km/h. Metric Speed (km/h) without erasing the set speed from memory.
 If the button is continually pushed, the set  Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
speed will continue to increase until the a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse- in the OFF position erases the set speed from
button is released, then the new set speed quent tap of the button results in a decrease memory.
will be established. of 1 km/h.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
To Decrease Speed  If the button is continually pushed, the set
When the Speed Control is set, you can speed will continue to decrease until the EQUIPPED
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. button is released, then the new set speed Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
will be established. driving convenience provided by cruise control
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to Accelerating For Passing while traveling on highways and major
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To roadways. However, it is not a safety system
Press the accelerator as you would normally. and not designed to prevent collisions. Speed
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will Control function performs differently. Please
return to the set speed. refer to the proper section within this chapter.
dependent on the chosen speed unit of U.S.
(mph) or Metric (km/h): Resume Speed ACC will allow you to keep cruise control
U.S. Speed (mph) To resume a previously set speed, push the RES engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
 Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in button and release. Resume can be used at any without the constant need to reset your cruise
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse- speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
quent tap of the button results in a decrease forward facing camera designed to detect a
of 1 mph. vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE: You can change the mode by using the cruise

control buttons. The two control modes function WARNING! (Continued)
 If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead
differently. Always confirm which mode is  Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
selected. conditions into account, and may be
 If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, limited upon adverse sight distance
ACC will apply limited braking or acceleration WARNING! conditions.
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-  Does not always fully recognize
matically to maintain a preset following nience system. It is not a substitute for complex driving conditions, which can
distance, while matching the speed of the active driver involvement. It is always the result in wrong or missing distance
vehicle ahead. driver’s responsibility to be attentive of warnings.
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
The Cruise Control system has two control You should turn the ACC system off:
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
modes:
ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera- 5
 When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
 Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main- tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
taining an appropriate distance between under all road conditions. Your complete driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
vehicles. attention is always required while driving to tion zones).
 Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode maintain safe control of your vehicle.
 When entering a turn lane or highway off
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For Failure to follow these warnings can result
ramp; when driving on roads that are
additional information, refer to “Normal in a collision and death or serious personal
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this injury.
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
section.  The ACC system:
 When towing a trailer up or down steep
NOTE:  Does not react to pedestrians, slopes.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not oncoming vehicles, and stationary
 When circumstances do not allow safe
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
driving at a constant speed.
the mode selected. traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward
Collision Warning System.
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operate the ACC To Activate/Deactivate
System.
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC
Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) sys-
tem on when not in use is dangerous. You
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons could accidentally set the system or cause it
1 — SET (+)/Accel to go faster than you want. You could lose
2 — Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control On/Off control and have a collision. Always leave the
3 — RES/Resume system off when you are not using it.
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
4 — SET (-)/Decel
To turn the system off, push and release the
5 — Distance Setting Increase Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
6 — Distance Setting Decrease again. At this time, the system will turn off and The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
7 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off the instrument cluster display will read 20 mph (32 km/h).
8 — CANC/Cancel “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.” When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
NOTE:
“ACC Ready.”
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
When the system is off, the instrument cluster NOTE:  The braking temperature exceeds normal
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle range (overheated).
Off.” in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
 The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
NOTE: Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
You cannot engage ACC under the following you do not, the vehicle may continue to
 The vehicle parking brake is applied.
conditions: accelerate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
 The message “Adaptive Cruise Control Over-  The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.
 When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
ride” will display in the instrument cluster  Manual transmission is not in a forward gear
 When you apply the brakes. display. (if equipped).
 When the parking brake is applied.  The system will not be controlling the  Manual transmission is in NEUTRAL or clutch
distance between your vehicle and the
 When the automatic transmission is in PARK, pressed down for a fixed amount of time (if 5
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be equipped).
REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
determined by the position of the accelerator
 When the vehicle speed is outside of the pedal. To Turn Off
speed range. The system will turn off and clear the set speed
To Cancel
 When the brakes are overheated. in memory if:
The following conditions cancel the system:
 The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
 When driver switches ESC to Full Off mode.  The brake pedal is applied.
button is pushed.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed  The CANC button is pushed.
 The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,  An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event off button is pushed.
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button occurs.
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.  The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
 You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
position.
To Resume U.S. Speed (mph) Instrument Panel” for more information. The
 Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in speed decrement shown is dependent on the
If there is a set speed in the memory, push the
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse- chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
RES button and then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster quent tap of the button results in an increase U.S. Speed (mph)
display will show the last set speed. of 1 mph.  Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
 If the button is continually pushed, the set a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
WARNING! speed will continue to increase in 5 mph quent tap of the button results in a decrease
The Resume function should only be used if increments until the button is released. The of 1 mph.
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming increase in set speed is reflected in the  If the button is continually pushed, the set
a set speed that is too high or too low for pre- instrument cluster display. speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
vailing traffic and road conditions could decrements until the button is released. The
Metric Speed (km/h)
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate decrease in set speed is reflected in the
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to fol-  Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
instrument cluster display.
low these warnings can result in a collision a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
and death or serious personal injury. quent tap of the button results in an increase Metric Speed (km/h)
of 1 km/h.  Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
If the button is continually pushed, the set a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
To Vary The Speed Setting 
speed will continue to increase in 5 km/h quent tap of the button results in a decrease
To Increase Speed of 1 km/h.
increments until the button is released. The
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed increase in set speed is reflected in the  If the button is continually pushed, the set
by pushing the SET (+) button. instrument cluster display. speed will continue to decrease in 5 km/h
The driver's preferred units can be selected decrements until the button is released. The
To Decrease Speed
through the instrument panel settings (if decrease in set speed is reflected in the
equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your While ACC is set, the set speed can be
Instrument Panel” for more information. The decreased by pushing the SET (-) button.
speed increment shown is dependent on the The driver's preferred units can be selected
chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): through the instrument panel settings (if
equipped). Refer to “Getting To Know Your
NOTE: set speed. When driving uphill and downhill,

the ACC system will cancel if the braking
 When you override and push the SET (+) temperature exceeds normal range (over-
button or SET (-) button, the new set speed heated).
will be the current speed of the vehicle.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
 When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not The specified following distance for ACC can be
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set set by varying the distance setting between four
speed, the brake system will automatically bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
slow the vehicle. (medium) and one bar (short). Using this Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
 If equipped with a manual transmission, it is calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
possible to make gear changes during the ahead. This distance setting will show in the 5
normal operation of ACC that will allow the
driver to engage the appropriate gear with
respect to the set speed in order to keep the
feature activated. It is canceled when the
clutch pedal is held down, or when placing
the gearbox in NEUTRAL for a certain
maximum time.
 If equipped with an automatic transmission, Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
ACC systems could automatically downshift
to a lower gear when driving downhill or
during accelerations. Therefore, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
This is normal and necessary to maintain the
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance

until:
 The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
 The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
 The distance setting is changed.
 The system disengages. (Refer to “Activating
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short) Brake Alert
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in this
To increase the distance setting, push the chapter). NOTE:
Distance Setting Increase button and release. The “BRAKE!” Screen in the instrument cluster
Each time the button is pushed, the distance The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
display is a warning for the driver to take action
setting increases by one bar (longer). Once the however, the driver can always apply the brakes
and does not necessarily mean that the
longest setting is reached, if the button is manually, if necessary.
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
pushed again it will be set to the shortest NOTE: the brakes autonomously.
setting available. The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will ACC system applies the brakes. Overtake Aid
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
instrument cluster display will show the ACC Set predicts that its maximum braking level is not
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
With Target Detected Indicator Light, and the sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will appear in
is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
maintain the distance setting, regardless of the the instrument cluster display and a chime will
signal and will only be active when passing on
set speed. sound while ACC continues to apply its
the left hand side.
maximum braking capacity.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu The ACC screen may display once again if any cases, the instrument cluster display will read
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
The instrument cluster display shows the
the following: and the system will deactivate.
current ACC system settings. The instrument
cluster display is located in the center of the  System Cancel The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
instrument cluster. The information it displays Blocked” message can sometimes be displayed
 Driver Override
depends on ACC system status. while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e.
 System Off tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
The ACC system will recover after the vehicle
button (located on the steering wheel) until one  ACC Proximity Warning has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
of the following shows in the instrument cluster
 ACC Unavailable Warning when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or
display:
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
Adaptive Cruise Control Off The instrument cluster display will return to occur.
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read the last display selected after five seconds of 5
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.” no ACC display activity NOTE:
If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready Display Warnings And Maintenance Blocked” warning is active, Normal (Fixed
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed Speed) Cruise Control is still available. For addi-
setting has not been selected, the display will
“Front Radar Sensor Temporarily Blocked”
Warning tional information refer to “Normal (Fixed
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
Push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button The “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily
(located on the steering wheel) and the Blocked” warning will display and also a chime If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
following will read in the instrument cluster will indicate when conditions temporarily limit should examine the sensor. It may require
display: system performance. cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, sensor is located in the center of the fascia/
ACC SET
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system bumper.
When ACC is set, the set speed will appear in
may also become temporarily blinded due to
the instrument cluster display.
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is When the condition that deactivated the system Functionality Wipe Front Windshield” and the
important to note the following maintenance is no longer present, the system will return to system will have degraded performance.
items: the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front
 Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe resume function when reactivated. Windshield” message can sometimes be
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious NOTE: displayed while driving in adverse weather
not to damage the sensor lens. conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover
 If the “ACC Front Radar Sensor Temporarily after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
 Do not use solvents or abrasive pastes. The
Blocked” message occurs frequently (e.g. rare conditions, when the camera is not
radar is equipped with a defrost system, so in
more than once on every trip) without any tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
some climatic conditions it could reach high
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have warning may temporarily occur.
temperatures. Wait at least 30 seconds after
the radar sensor realigned at your authorized If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
the engine has been placed in the OFF mode
dealer. should examine the windshield and the camera
before touching the sensor.
 Installing a snow plow or front-end protector located on the back side of the inside rear view
 Do not remove any screws from the sensor. mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
is not recommended. Doing so may block the
Doing so could cause an ACC system an obstruction.
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
When the condition that created limited
realignment. “Clean Front Windshield” Warning
functionality is no longer present, the system
 If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe Front will return to full functionality.
damaged due to a collision, see your autho- Windshield” warning will display to indicate
when conditions temporarily limit system NOTE:
rized dealer for service.
performance. This most often occurs at times of If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Wipe
 Do not attach or install any accessories near poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
the sensor, including transparent material. fog. The ACC system may also become (e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
or malfunction. as mud, dirt, or ice on windshield and fog on the windshield and forward facing camera
inside of glass. In these cases, the instrument inspected at your authorized dealer.
cluster display will read “ACC/FCW Limited
Service ACC/FCW Warning not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.

If the system turns off, and the instrument The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Limited line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
Functionality Frontal Camera Service brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Required”, “Cruise Control Service Required”,
or “Cruise Control Temporarily Unavailable",
there may be an internal system fault or a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still
drivable under normal conditions, ACC will be Turn Or Bend Example
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
5
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer. vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
Offset Driving Condition Example vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the
Precautions While Driving With ACC
steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be
Turns And Bends
In certain driving situations, ACC may have limited.
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to system may decrease the vehicle speed and
stay alert and may need to intervene. acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
Towing A Trailer curve the system will resume your original set
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC. speed. This is a part of normal ACC system
functionality.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane NOTE:
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing Narrow Vehicles Stationary Objects And Vehicles

ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer ACC does not react to stationary objects and
completely in the lane in which you are edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
traveling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not detected until they have moved fully into the react in situations where the vehicle you are
yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
may not detect the vehicle until it's too late for vehicle ahead. is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
the ACC system to take action. ACC may not ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
detect a vehicle until it is completely in the lane.
There may not be sufficient distance to the
lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example

Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
Lane Changing Example

General Information 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout without requiring the driver to operate the
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le accelerator. Speed Control can only be
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro- operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
mettre le fonctionnement. (32 km/h).
vehicle:
To change between the different control modes,
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN siguientes dos condiciones:
button which turns the ACC on and the Normal
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing of the
Rules and with Innovation, Science and cause interferencia perjudicial y Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
Economic Development Canada license-exempt button will result in turning on (changing to) the
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
following two conditions: cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada. WARNING! 5
interference, and NOTE: In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Changes or modifications not expressly mode, the system will not react to vehicles
2. This device must accept any interference ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
received, including interference that may does not activate and no alarm will sound
cause undesired operation. even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
the equipment.
since neither the presence of the vehicle
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
dÌnnovation, Science and Economic
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The Always be aware which mode is selected.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de designed to maintain a set cruising speed
brouillage, et
To Set A Desired Speed quent tap of the button results in an increase information. The speed decrement shown is
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise of 1 mph. dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric
Control on. When the vehicle has (km/h) units:
 If the button is continually pushed, the set
reached the desired speed, push the speed will continue to increase in 5 mph U.S. Speed (mph)
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release. increments until the button is released. The  Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will increase in set speed is reflected in the a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed instrument cluster display. quent tap of the button results in a decrease
has been set a message (CRUISE CONTROL SET of 1 mph.
TO MPH/km/h) will appear indicating what Metric Speed (km/h)
speed was set. This light will turn on when the  Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in  If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed control is set. a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse- speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
quent tap of the button results in an increase decrements until the button is released. The
To Vary The Speed Setting of 1 km/h. decrease in set speed is reflected in the
To Increase Speed instrument cluster display.
 If the button is continually pushed, the set
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control speed will continue to increase in 5 km/h Metric Speed (km/h)
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the increments until the button is released. The  Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
SET (+) button. increase in set speed is reflected in the a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
The driver's preferred units can be selected instrument cluster display. quent tap of the button results in a decrease
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to of 1 km/h.
”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control  If the button is continually pushed, the set
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the speed will continue to decrease in 5 km/h
SET (-) button. decrements until the button is released. The
dependent on the speed of U.S. (mph) or Metric
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
(km/h) units: The driver's preferred units can be selected instrument cluster display.
U.S. Speed (mph) through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
 Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in ”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse- Know Your Instrument Panel” for more
To Cancel To Turn Off Rear ParkSense Sensors

The following conditions will cancel the Normal The system will turn off and erase the set speed The four Rear ParkSense sensors, located in
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing in memory if: the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area
the memory:  The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/ behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’
 The brake pedal is applied. off button is pushed. field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles
from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
 The CANC button is pushed.  The ignition is placed in the OFF position.
59 inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia/
 The Electronic Stability Control/Traction  You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low. bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates. on the location, type and orientation of the
 The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off obstacle.
 The vehicle parking brake is applied. button is pushed.
 The braking temperature exceeds normal REAR PARKSENSE — IF EQUIPPED 5
range (overheated).
The Rear ParkSense system provides visual and
 The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE audible indications of the distance between the
position. rear fascia and a detected obstacle when
 Manual transmission is not in a forward gear backing up (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
(if equipped). Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” for limitations of this system and
 Manual transmission is in NEUTRAL or clutch recommendations.
pressed down (if equipped). Rear ParkSense will retain the last system state Parking Sensors
 The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode. (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle Chime
when the ignition is changed to the RUN By shifting the vehicle in REVERSE and in the
To Resume Speed position. case of the presence of a rear obstacle, an
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES Rear ParkSense can be active only when the acoustic signal that varies with the distance of
button and release. Resume can be used at any gear selector is in REVERSE. the obstacle from the fascia/bumper is
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h). activated.
The frequency of the acoustic signal: If an obstacle is detected in the center rear message such as “PARKSENSE DISABLED” for
 Increases as the distance between vehicle region, the display will show a single solid arc in approximately five seconds. Refer to
and object decreases. the center rear region and will produce a “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
 Becomes continuous when the distance that closer to the obstacle, the display will show the information.
separates the vehicle from the obstacle is single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the The Rear ParkSense switch LED turns on when
less than approximately 12 inches (30 cm), sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to the system is disabled by pressing the switch,
while terminates immediately if the distance continuous. as well as in case of failure or temporary
to the obstacle increases.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right disabling conditions. The Rear ParkSense
 Remains constant if the distance between rear region, the display will show a single switch LED will be off when the system is
vehicle and obstacle remains unchanged. If flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region enabled. If the Rear ParkSense switch is
this situation occurs for the external sensors, and will produce a fast sound tone. As the pushed, and requires service, the Rear
the signal is stopped after approximately vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily,
three seconds to avoid, for example, activa- display will show the single arc moving closer to and then the LED will be on.
tion in case of maneuver along a wall. the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to Rear ParkSense will remember the previous
continuous. state when the ignition is placed in the OFF
When the system emits a beeping sound, the
volume of the Uconnect system, if turned on, is In general, the vehicle is closest to the obstacle position.
automatically lowered by Rear ParkSense. when the display shows only a flashing arc and
the chime becomes continuous. CAUTION!
Detection Distances
The color on the display depends on the After turning OFF the ignition, the Rear Park-
If the sensors detect more obstacles, only the
distance and location of the obstacle. Sense remains in this setting until the next
obstacle with the shortest distance is taken into
ignition cycle, even in the case of changing
account. Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense
the setting of starting RUN to OFF and then
Instrument Cluster Display ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with again in RUN.
Rear ParkSense is displayed on the instrument the ParkSense switch.
cluster only if you have selected "Sound and When the Rear ParkSense switch is
Display" within the "Safety And Driving pushed to disable the system, the
Assistance" menu of the Uconnect system. instrument cluster display will show a
Operation With A Trailer If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR erly. The Rear ParkSense system might not
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster detect an obstacle behind the fascia/
The operation of the rear sensors is
display, make sure the outer surface and the bumper, or it could provide a false indication
automatically deactivated when the trailer’s
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
electric plug is inserted in the vehicle’s tow
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other bumper.
hook socket. In this situation, the ParkSense
obstructions and then cycle the ignition. if the
switch LED turns on.  Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must
message continues to appear, see an
The rear sensors are automatically reactivated not be placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from
authorized dealer.
when the trailer’s cable plug is removed. the rear fascia/bumper while driving the
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the
Service The Rear ParkSense System REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster system misinterpreting a close object as a
During vehicle start up, when the Rear display, see an authorized dealer. sensor problem, causing a failure indication
ParkSense System has detected a faulted ParkSense System Usage Precautions to be displayed in the instrument cluster. 5
condition, the instrument cluster will actuate a
single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will NOTE: WARNING!
display a message such as “PARKSENSE Ensure that the outer surface and the under-
  Drivers must be careful when backing up
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the side of the rear bumper is clean and clear of even when using ParkSense. Always check
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction to carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
REQUIRED”. Refer to “Instrument Cluster keep the Rear ParkSense system operating you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
Display” for further information. When the gear properly. animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
selector is moved to REVERSE and the system blind spots before backing up. You are
has detected a faulted condition, the  Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
responsible for safety and must continue to
instrument cluster display will show a message tions could affect the performance of Rear
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
such as "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR ParkSense.
to do so can result in serious injury or
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE  Clean the Rear ParkSense sensors regularly, death.
SERVICE REQUIRED" for approximately five taking care not to scratch or damage them. (Continued)
seconds. Under this condition, Rear ParkSense The sensors must not be covered with ice,
will not operate. snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
ParkSense will retain the last system state

WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
 Before using ParkSense, it is strongly  The vehicle must be driven slowly when when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
recommended that the ball mount and using ParkSense in order to be able to stop position.
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from in time when an obstacle is detected. It is ParkSense is active when the gear selector is
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for recommended that the driver looks over shifted to REVERSE or to a forward gear and an
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury his/her shoulder when using ParkSense. obstacle is detected, as long as the system is
or damage to vehicles or obstacles on. When the gear selector shifted to NEUTRAL
because the hitch ball will be much closer If it’s necessary to keep the trailer hitch and
(or PARK in case of automatic gearbox), the
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when hitch ball assembly mounted for a long period,
system becomes inactive. When the vehicle is
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous it is possible to filter out the trailer hitch and
moving forward, the system will remain active
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball hitch ball assembly presence in sensor field of
until the vehicle speed remains below
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending view. The filtering operation must be performed
approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). Reducing the
on its size and shape, giving a false indica- only by an authorized dealer.
speed approximately below 9 mph (15 km/h),
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
FRONT AND REAR PARKSENSE — IF the system will come back active. When the
vehicle is moving in REVERSE, the system will
CAUTION!
EQUIPPED remain active as long as the speed remains
The ParkSense Park Assist system provides below the maximum operating speed of 7 mph
 ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is (11 km/h). When the maximum speed limit is
visual and audible indications of the distance
unable to recognize every obstacle, exceeded, the system is disabled and the
between the rear and/or front fascia and a
including small obstacles. Parking curbs ParkSense switch LED with illuminate. The
detected obstacle when backing up or moving
might be temporarily detected or not system will become active again if the vehicle
forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).
detected at all. Obstacles located above or speed reduces below approximately 6 mph
below the sensors will not be detected Refer to “ParkSense System Usage
Precautions” in this section for limitations of (9 km/h).
when they are in close proximity.
(Continued) this system and recommendations.
ParkSense Sensors ParkSense Warning Display If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the rear The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
the center rear region. As the vehicle moves
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. from the Customer - Programmable Features
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
The sensors can detect obstacles from section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
audible chime will increase as the object gets
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to "Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
closer to the vehicle.
59 inches (150 cm) from the rear fascia/ information.
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
on the location, type and orientation of the rear region, the display will show a single
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
obstacle. flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region
warnings to indicate the distance between the
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
NOTE: rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper
display will show the single arc moving closer to
For further information on Active Park Assist, and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument 5
the vehicle and the audible chime will increase
refer to the “ParkSense Active Park Assist Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
as the object gets closer to the vehicle.
System” section. Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense Display
The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front
fascia/bumper, monitor the area in front of the Rear Park Assist
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument
The sensors can detect obstacles from cluster display will show the park assist ready
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to system status.
39 inches (100 cm) from the front fascia/ The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending showing a single arc in one or more regions
on the location, type and orientation of the based on the obstacle’s distance and location
obstacle. relative to the vehicle. Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the
warning display shows one flashing arc and
sounds a continuous tone. The following chart
shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
WARNING ALERTS
Greater than Less than
Rear Distance 59–52 inches 52-41 inches 41-34 inches 34-24 inches 24-12 inches
59 inches 12 inches
(inches/cm) (150-130 cm) (130-105 cm) (105-85 cm) (85-60 cm) (60-30 cm)
(150 cm) (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
WARNING ALERTS
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Single, 1/2 sec-
Audible Alert
None ond, audible Audible chime increases as the object gets closer to the vehicle. Continuous
Chime
chime is heard.
Radio Volume
No Yes
Reduced
NOTE: If an obstacle is detected in the center front

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, region, the display will show a single arc in the 5
if on, when the system is sounding an audible center front region. As the vehicle moves closer
tone. to the obstacle, the display will show the single
arc moving closer to the vehicle and the audible
Front Park Assist
chime will increase as the object gets close to
The ParkSense warning screen will be displayed the vehicle.
when the gear selector is in the DRIVE position
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
and an obstacle is detected, as long as the
front region, the display will show a single
vehicle speed is below approximately 11 mph
flashing arc in the left and/or right front region. No Tone/Solid Arc
(18 km/h).
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by display will show the single arc moving closer to
showing a single arc in one or more regions the vehicle and the audible chime will increase
based on the obstacle’s distance and location as the object gets close to the vehicle.
relative to the vehicle.
No Tone/Flashing Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the
warning display shows one flashing arc and
sounds a continuous tone. The following chart
shows the warning alert operation when the
system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Front Distance Greater than 39 inches 39-32 inches 32-24 inches 24-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) (100 cm) (100-80 cm) (80-60 cm) (60-30 cm) (30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
WARNING ALERTS
Audible chime
increases as the object
Audible Alert Chime None None None Continuous
gets close to the
vehicle.
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes
NOTE: If the Uconnect System is equipped, chime When the ParkSense switch is pushed
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, volume settings will not be accessible from the to disable the system, the instrument
if on, when the system is sounding an audible instrument cluster display. cluster display will show the
tone. The chime volume settings include low, “ParkSense Disabled” message for
medium, and high. The factory default volume approximately five seconds. Refer to 5
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
setting is medium. “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
audible alert (chime) after approximately three ParkSense will retain its last known
configuration state through ignition cycles. information.
seconds when an obstacle has been detected,
The ParkSense switch LED turns on when the
and the vehicle is stationary. If the obstacle has Enabling And Disabling ParkSense system is disabled by pushing the switch, as
been detected within less than 12 inches
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with well as in case of failure or temporary disabling
(30 cm), then the Parksense will not turn off the
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch conditions. The ParkSense switch LED will be
Front Park Assist audible alert.
panel below the Uconnect display. off when the system is enabled. If the
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires
Front and Rear chime volume settings can be service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink
selected from the Customer-Programmable momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Features section of the Uconnect System, refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
Service The ParkSense Park Assist System Cleaning The ParkSense System  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
When the ParkSense System has detected a Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
faulted condition, the instrument cluster display wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
will actuate a single chime, and it will show the hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors.
so can result in the system not working prop-
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
ParkSense System Usage Precautions an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
FRONT SENSORS", or the "PARKSENSE
bumper, or it could provide a false indication
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" message NOTE: that an obstacle is behind or in front of the
for five seconds. Under this condition, fascia/bumper.
 Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper
ParkSense will not operate.
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to  Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR keep the ParkSense system operating prop-
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
erly. carriers, etc. are placed within 12 inches
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument
cluster display make sure the outer surface and  Construction equipment, large trucks, and (30 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or other vibrations could affect the performance to do so can result in the system misinter-
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, of ParkSense. preting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then  When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be
cycle the ignition. If the message continues to cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” displayed in the instrument cluster display.
appear see an authorized dealer. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE remains off until you turn it on again, even if
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument you cycle the ignition key.
cluster display, see an authorized dealer.
 ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
NOTE:
If any objects are attached to the bumper within WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued)
a 6.5 ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and  Before using ParkSense, it is strongly  The vehicle must be driven slowly when
cause false alerts and possibly blockage. recommended that the ball mount and using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
 There may be a delay in the object detection
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for recommended that the driver looks over
rate if the object is moving.
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
 The operation of the rear sensors is automat- or damage to vehicles or obstacles
ically deactivated when the trailer's electric because the hitch ball will be much closer Side Distance Warning (SDW) System
plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook to the obstacle than the rear fascia when The Side Distance Warning system has the
socket, while the front sensors stay active the loudspeaker sounds the continuous function of detecting the presence of side
and can provide acoustic and visual warn- tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball obstacles near the vehicle using the parking
ings. The rear sensors are automatically reac- mount and hitch ball assembly, depending sensors located in the front and rear bumpers.
5
tivated when the trailer's cable plug is on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
removed. tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. Side Distance Warning Display
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be
WARNING! displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected
CAUTION! from the Customer - Programmable Features
 Drivers must be careful when backing up
 ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
even when using ParkSense. Always check
unable to recognize every obstacle, "Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
including small obstacles. Parking curbs information.
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
might be temporarily detected or not The system warns the driver with an acoustic
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
detected at all. Obstacles located above or signal and where provided, with visual
blind spots before backing up. You are
below the sensors will not be detected indications on the instrument panel display.
responsible for safety and must continue to
when they are in close proximity.
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or (Continued)
death.
(Continued)
Warning system will automatically be

WARNING ALERTS
deactivated.
Arcs-Right Flashing Flashing Message on the display for Side Distance
Audible chime Warning feature:
increases as “Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in
the objects the case of a failure of the Side Distance
Audible Alert
Continuous within the Warning system sensors. Free the bumpers of
Chime
vehicle’s path any obstacles, ensure that the front and rear
get close to bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and
Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs the vehicle. debris to keep the ParkSense system operating
Radio Volume properly.
Yes Yes
Reduced “SDW Not Available” — This message is
displayed if the Side Distance Warning system
NOTE:
is not available. The failed operation of the
Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if
system might be due to the insufficient voltage
on when the system is sounding an audible
from the battery or other failures on the
tone.
electrical system. Contact an authorized dealer
Activation — Deactivation as soon as possible to have the electrical
The system can operate only after driving a system checked.
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs short distance and if the vehicle speed is Operation With A Trailer
between 0 and 11 mph (0 and 18 km/h). The
The system is automatically deactivated when
WARNING ALERTS system can be activated/deactivated via the
the trailer's electric plug is inserted in the
Less than "Settings" menu of the Uconnect system. If the
Distance 12–65 inches vehicle's tow hook socket. The rear sensors are
12 inches ParkSense System is deactivated via the
(inches/cm) (30–60 cm) automatically reactivated when the trailer's
(30 cm) ParkSense Hard switch then the Side Distance
cable plug is removed.
Arcs-Left Flashing Flashing
ParkSense Usage Precautions  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,

taking care not to scratch or damage them. WARNING!
Some conditions may influence the
performance of the Side Distance Warning The sensors must not be covered with ice,  Drivers must be careful when backing up
System: snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do even when using ParkSense. Always check
so can result in the system not working prop- carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
NOTE: erly. The ParkSense system might not detect you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/ animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
 Ensure that the front and rear bumper are
bumper, or it could provide a false indication blind spots before backing up. You are
free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the responsible for safety and must continue to
the ParkSense system operating properly.
fascia/bumper. pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
 Construction equipment, large trucks, and to do so can result in serious injury or
 The presence of a tow hook without a trailer
other vibrations could affect the performance death.
may interfere with the correct operation of 5
of ParkSense. Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
the parking sensors. Before using the Park- 
 When you turn ParkSense off, the message Sense system, it is recommended to remove recommended that the ball mount and
to appear in the instrument cluster display the removable tow hook ball assembly and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
will read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, any attachments from the vehicle when it is the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off not used for towing operations. If you wish to towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the leave the tow hook fitted without towing a or damage to vehicles or obstacles
ignition key. trailer, it is advisable to contact your autho- because the hitch ball will be much closer
rized dealer for the ParkSense system to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
 ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume update operations because the tow hook the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
of the radio when it is sounding a tone. could be detected as an obstacle by the tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
central sensors. mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense
CAUTION! Assist system is capable of maneuvering a Active Park Assist System
 ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is vehicle into a parallel or a perpendicular
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system can be
unable to recognize every obstacle, parking space on either side (i.e., driver side or
enabled and disabled with the ParkSense
including small obstacles. Parking curbs passenger side), as well as exiting a parallel
Active Park Assist switch, located on the switch
might be temporarily detected or not parking space.
panel below the Uconnect display.
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected NOTE: To enable the ParkSense Active Park
when they are in close proximity. Assist system, push the ParkSense
 The driver is always responsible for
Active Park Assist switch once (LED
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when controlling the vehicle, responsible for any
turns on).
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop surrounding objects, and must intervene as
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is required. To disable the ParkSense Active Park Assist
recommended that the driver looks over system, push the ParkSense Active Park Assist
 The system is provided to assist the driver switch again (LED turns off).
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
and not to substitute the driver.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM  During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the turn off automatically for any of the following
driver touches the steering wheel after being conditions:
— IF EQUIPPED instructed to remove their hands from the  The parking maneuver is completed.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is steering wheel, the system will cancel, and
intended to assist the driver during Parallel, the driver will be required to manually  Vehicle speed greater than 18 mph (30 km/h)
complete the parking maneuver. when searching for a parking space.
Perpendicular, and Parallel Park Exit
maneuvers by identifying a proper parking  The system may not work in all conditions  Vehicle speed greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
space, providing audible/visual instructions, (e.g. environmental conditions such as heavy during active steering guidance into the
and controlling the steering wheel. The rain, snow, etc., or if searching for a parking parking space.
ParkSense Active Park Assist system is defined space that has surfaces that will absorb the
as “semi-automatic” since the driver maintains ultrasonic sensor waves).
control of the accelerator, gear selector and
brakes. Depending on the driver's parking
 Touching the steering wheel during active  Driver's door is closed. Parallel Parking Space Assistance
steering guidance into the parking space. Operation/Display
 Rear liftgate is closed.
 Pushing the ParkSense Front and Rear Park When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system
 Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h). is enabled the “Active ParkSense Searching -
Assist switch.
 Driver's door is opened. NOTE: Press or to Switch Maneuver” message
If the vehicle is driven above approximately will appear in the instrument cluster display.
 Rear liftgate is opened. 15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster You may switch to perpendicular parking or
display will instruct the driver to slow down. If Parallel Park Exit if you desire. The arrow
 Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Brake
the vehicle is driven above approximately buttons on the left side of the steering wheel
System intervention.
18 mph (30 km/h), the system will cancel. The can be used to switch parking maneuvers.
 The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will driver must then reactivate the system by
NOTE:
allow a maximum number of shifts between pushing the ParkSense Active Park Assist 5
DRIVE and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot switch.  When searching for a parking space, use the
be completed within the maximum amount of turn signal indicator to select which side of
shifts, the system will cancel and the instru-  The outer surface and the underside of the
the vehicle you want to perform the parking
ment cluster display will instruct the driver to front and rear fascias/bumpers are clean
maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
complete the maneuver manually. and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
system will automatically search for a parking
obstruction.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active if the turn signal is not activated.
only operate and search for a parking space
when the following conditions are present: Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and
 The driver needs to make sure that the
then the LED will turn off if any of the above
 Gear selector is in DRIVE. selected parking space for the maneuver
conditions are not present.
remains free and clear of any obstructions
 Ignition is in the RUN position. (e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
 ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is acti-
vated.
 The driver is responsible to ensure that the When an available parking space has been
selected parking space is suitable for the found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
maneuver and free/clear of anything that be instructed to move forward to position the
may be overhanging or protruding into the vehicle for a parallel parking sequence.
parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
 When seeking for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible. Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel
Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your
 The feature will only indicate the last
hands removed from the steering wheel, you
detected parking space (example: if passing
multiple available parking spaces, the will be instructed to place the gear selector into
system will only indicate the last detected the REVERSE position.
Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
parking space for the maneuver). Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
remove your hands from the steering wheel.
Space Found — Shift To Reverse

Active ParkSense Searching
When the driver places the gear selector into NOTE:  If the system is canceled during the
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct maneuver for any reason, the driver must
 It is the driver's responsibility to use the take control of the vehicle.
the driver to wait for steering to complete.
brake and accelerator during the semi-auto-
matic parking maneuver. When the vehicle has reached the end of its
backward movement, the system will instruct
 When the system instructs the driver to
the driver to check their surroundings and stop
remove their hands from the steering wheel,
the vehicle’s movement.
the driver should check their surroundings
and begin to back up slowly.
 The Active ParkSense System will allow a
maximum amount of shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE, and then the system will 5
cancel and the instrument cluster display will
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver
The system will then instruct the driver to check manually.
their surroundings and move backward.
 The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
Check Surroundings — STOP
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a NOTE:
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
tells them to slow down. The driver is then and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
responsible for completing the maneuver if their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
the system is canceled. vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
intervention is required.
Check Surroundings — Move Backward

Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the The system will then instruct the driver to check NOTE:
driver will be instructed to place the gear their surroundings and move forward. It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
selector into the DRIVE position. and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward

Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive When the vehicle has reached the end of its
When the driver places the gear selector into forward movement, the system will instruct the
the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the
driver to wait for steering to complete. vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — STOP

When the driver places the gear selector into Your vehicle is now in the parallel park position. or Parallel Park Exit, if you desire. Refer to
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct The "Active ParkSense Complete - Check “Exiting The Parking Space” in this section for
the driver to wait for steering to complete. Parking Position" message will be momentarily more information.
displayed. When the maneuver is complete, the
driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's
parking position. If the driver is satisfied with
the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK.
5
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Active ParkSense Searching Display
The system will then instruct the driver to check NOTE:
 When searching for a parking space, use the
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position turn signal indicator to select which side of
Perpendicular Parking Space Assistance the vehicle you want to perform the parking
Operation/Display maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
system will automatically search for a parking
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system space on the passenger's side of the vehicle
is enabled, the “Active ParkSense Searching - if the turn signal is not activated.
Press or to Switch Maneuver” message
 The driver needs to make sure that the
will show in the instrument cluster display. The
selected parking space for the maneuver
arrow buttons on the left side of the steering
remains free and clear of any obstructions
Check Surroundings — Move Backward wheel can be used to switch parking
(e.g. pedestrians, bicycles, etc.).
maneuvers. You may switch to parallel parking,
 The driver is responsible to ensure that the will be instructed to place the gear selector into
selected parking space is suitable for the the REVERSE position.
maneuver and free/clear of anything that
may be overhanging or protruding into the
parking space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc.
from surrounding objects/vehicles).
 When seeking a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible. Space Found — Keep Moving Forward
Once the vehicle is in position, you will be
 The feature will only indicate the last
instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and
detected parking space (example: if passing Space Found — Shift To Reverse
multiple available parking spaces, the remove your hands from the steering wheel.
When the driver places the gear selector into
system will only indicate the last detected the REVERSE position, the system may instruct
parking space for the maneuver). the driver to wait for steering to complete.
When an available parking space has been
found, and the vehicle is not in position, you will
be instructed to move forward to position the
vehicle for a perpendicular parking sequence.
Space Found — Stop And Remove Hands From Wheel

Once the vehicle is at a standstill with your
hands removed from the steering wheel, you
The system will then instruct the driver to check  The Active ParkSense System will allow a
their surroundings and move backward. maximum number of shifts between DRIVE
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be
completed, the system will cancel and the
instrument cluster display will instruct the
driver to complete the maneuver manually.
 The system will cancel the maneuver if the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h)
during active steering guidance into the
parking space. The system will provide a Check Surroundings — STOP
warning to the driver at 3 mph (5 km/h) that
NOTE:
tells them to slow down. The driver is then 5
Check Surroundings — Move Backward It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
responsible for completing the maneuver if
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
NOTE: the system is canceled.
 It is the driver's responsibility to use the  If the system is canceled during the vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
brake and accelerator during the semi-auto- maneuver for any reason, the driver must intervention is required.
matic parking maneuver. take control of the vehicle.
 When the system instructs the driver to When the vehicle has reached the end of its
remove their hands from the steering wheel, backward movement, the system will instruct
the driver should check their surroundings the driver to check their surroundings and stop
and begin to back up slowly. the vehicle’s movement.
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the The system will then instruct the driver to check NOTE:
driver will be instructed to place the gear their surroundings and move forward. It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
selector into the DRIVE position. and stop the vehicle. The driver should check
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver
Once the vehicle is in a standstill condition, the
driver will be instructed to place the gear
selector into the REVERSE position.
Check Surroundings — Move Forward

Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive When the vehicle has reached the end of its
When the driver places the gear selector into forward movement, the system will instruct the
the DRIVE position, the system may instruct the driver to check their surroundings and stop the
driver to wait for steering to complete. vehicle’s movement.
Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete Check Surroundings — STOP

When the driver places the gear selector into Your vehicle is now in the perpendicular park
the REVERSE position, the system may instruct position. When the maneuver is complete, the
WARNING!
the driver to wait for steering to complete. driver will be instructed to check the vehicle's Drivers must be careful when performing par-
parking position. If the driver is satisfied with allel or perpendicular parking maneuvers
the vehicle position, they should shift to PARK. even when using the ParkSense Active Park
The "Active ParkSense Complete - Check Assist system. Always check carefully behind
Parking Position" message will be momentarily and in front of your vehicle, look behind and
displayed. in front of you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, and blind spots before backing up and
moving forward. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result 5
Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete in serious injury or death.
The system will then instruct the driver to check
CAUTION!
 The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
Active ParkSense Complete — Check Parking Position only a parking aid and it is unable to recog-
nize every obstacle, including small obsta-
cles. Parking curbs might be temporarily
detected or not detected at all. Obstacles
located above or below the sensors will not
be detected when they are in close prox-
imity.
(Continued)
Check Surroundings — Move Backward
NOTE:
CAUTION! (Continued) The following conditions must be met before the
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when vehicle will exit the parking space:
using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
 The system must detect an obstacle within
system in order to be able to stop in time
16 - 35 inches (40 - 90 cm) from the front
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
fascia/bumper.
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using the ParkSense Active  The system must detect an obstacle within
Park Assist system. 16 - 59 inches (40 - 150 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. To Exit Space Use Turn Signal And Shift To Reverse —
Exiting The Parking Space
If the detected obstacles are too close, or too Press Left Or Right to Switch Maneuver
NOTE: far from the vehicle (not detected by the During the maneuver, the system instructs the
The function does not work for exiting a perpen- sensors), then the maneuver is cancelled and driver to shift to REVERSE. Select the direction
dicular parking space, but only exiting parallel the message “Active ParkSense Cancelled indicator in the direction you want to exit. Let go
parking spaces. Complete Maneuver Manually” will appear in of the steering wheel and use the brake or
Activation the instrument cluster display. accelerator as instructed, while the system
handles the steering automatically for exiting
To activate this function, push the Active If the maneuver is cancelled, it may be possible the parking space. If the driver continues to
ParkSense hard switch and then use the to reposition the vehicle inside the parking carry out a voluntary or involuntary action on the
steering wheel arrow buttons to select the space and activate the feature again. steering wheel during the exit maneuver
Parallel Park Exit feature. After the selection,
Selection Of The Maneuver Side (touching or holding the steering wheel to
the system activates and warns the driver on
prevent its movement), the maneuver will be
the instrument cluster display about the Use the right and left arrow buttons on the
interrupted.
operations that have to be carried out to steering wheel to select between parallel or
perform the maneuver correctly. perpendicular parking mode. Then use the
direction indicators (turn signals) to choose the
direction that you want to perform the
maneuver.
Check Surroundings — Stop And Remove Hands From Check Surroundings — Move Backward Check Surroundings — Shift To Drive
Wheel
5
Check Surroundings — Stop Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete

Check Surroundings — Move Forward Check Surroundings — Shift To Reverse Check Surroundings — Move Backward
End Of Maneuver
The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the
display shows the message of a completed
maneuver. At the end of the maneuver, the
system gives back the vehicle control to the
driver.
Check Surroundings — Stop Check Surroundings — Wait For Steering To Complete
Active ParkSense Complete Check Surroundings

Important Information  The sensors may not detect objects of a  In the case of parking maneuvers on roads
 If the sensors undergo impact which alters particular shape or made from particular on a slope, the performance of the system
their position, the system operation could be materials (very thin poles, trailer beams, could be inferior and it may deactivate.
greatly affected. panels, nets, bushes, anti-parking posts,
 If a parking maneuver is being carried out
pavements, rubbish bins, motor vehicles,
The sensors reach top performance after the between two parked vehicles alongside the
 etc.). Always take great care to check that the
vehicle has gone about 30 miles (50 km) due pavement, the system may cause the vehicle
vehicle and its path are actually compatible
to the dynamic tire circumference calcula- to mount the pavement.
with the parking place identified by the
tions used for parking. system.  Some maneuvers at very tight bends might
 Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,  The use of wheels and tires that are different be impossible to be carried out.
taking care not to scratch or damage them. size to the original equipment could affect  Take great care to ensure that conditions do
The sensors must not be covered with ice, the operation of the system.
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
not change during the parking maneuver 5
 The operation of the rear sensors is automat- (e.g. if there are persons and/or animals in
so can result in the system not working prop- the parking place, moving vehicles, etc.) and
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect ically deactivated when the trailer's electric
plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook intervene immediately if necessary.
an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/
bumper, or it could provide a false indication socket, while the front sensors stay active  During parking maneuvers, pay attention to
that an obstacle is behind or in front of the and can provide acoustic and visual warn- vehicles approaching from the opposite
fascia/bumper. ings. The rear sensors are automatically reac- direction. Always abide by the law and road
tivated when the trailer's cable plug is regulations.
 Construction equipment, large trucks, and removed.
other vibrations could affect the performance
of ParkSense.  In "Search in progress" mode, the system
could incorrectly identify a parking place to
 Sensors may detect a nonexistent obstacle carry out the maneuver (e.g. by a junction,
(echo noise) due to mechanical noises, for driveways, roads crossing the direction of
example while washing the vehicle or in the travel, etc.).
case of rain, strong wind, and hail.
NOTE: of the lane, the LaneSense system provides a Turning LaneSense On Or Off
visual warning through the instrument cluster
 Correct system operation is not guaranteed if The default status of LaneSense is off.
display to prompt the driver to remain within the
snow chains or the space-saver wheel are The LaneSense button is located on the center
lane boundaries.
fitted. stack.
The driver may manually override the haptic
 The function only informs the driver about the warning by applying torque into the steering To turn the LaneSense system on,
last appropriate parking place (parallel or wheel at any time. push the LaneSense button (LED
perpendicular) detected by the parking turns off). A “Lane Sense On”
When only a single lane marking is detected
sensors. message is shown in the instrument
and the driver unintentionally drifts across the
cluster display.
 Some messages displayed are accompanied lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
by acoustic warnings.
through the instrument cluster display to LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED prompt the driver to remain within the lane. NOTE:
When only a single lane marking is detected, a The LaneSense system will retain the last
LaneSense Operation haptic (torque) warning will not be provided. system state on or off from the last ignition
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds cycle when the ignition is changed to the RUN
NOTE:
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph position.
When operating conditions have been met, the
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s LaneSense Warning Message
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
hands are on the steering wheel and provides
and measure vehicle position within the lane The LaneSense system will indicate the current
an audible warning to the driver when the
boundaries. lane drift condition through the instrument
driver’s hands are not detected on the steering
When both lane markings are detected and the wheel. The system will cancel if the driver does cluster display.
driver unintentionally drifts out of the lane (no not return their hands to the wheel.
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides a haptic warning in the form of torque
applied to the steering wheel to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If
the driver continues to unintentionally drift out
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped from white to gray, the left thin line remains provide visual warnings in the instrument
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane solid white and the LaneSense telltale cluster display and a torque warning in the
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries changes from solid white to flashing yellow. steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
have not been detected and the LaneSense ture occurs.
telltale is solid white.
5
Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale) Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale)
System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale) NOTE:  When the LaneSense system senses a lane
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected drift situation, the left thick lane line and the
The LaneSense system operates with similar
left thin line turn solid white. The LaneSense
 When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane- behavior for a right lane departure when only
telltale changes from solid green to solid
Sense telltale is solid white when only the left the right lane marking has been detected.
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
lane marking has been detected and the
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected steering wheel in the opposite direction of
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
 When the LaneSense system is on, the lane the lane boundary.
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs. lines turn from gray to white to indicate that For example: If approaching the left side of
both of the lane markings have been the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid right.
has been approached and is in a lane depar- green when both lane markings have been
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes detected and the system is “armed” to
Lane Sensed (Solid White Thick Line, Solid White Thin Lane Approached (Flashing White To Gray Thick Line, System On (Gray Lines/White Telltale)
Line/Solid Yellow Telltale) Solid White Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale) Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
 When the LaneSense system senses the lane  When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
NOTE:
has been approached and is in a lane depar- Sense telltale is solid white when only the left
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes lane marking has been detected and the
behavior for a right lane departure.
from white to gray, the left thin line remains system is ready to provide visual warnings in
solid white and the LaneSense telltale Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. Equipped tional lane departure occurs.
At this time, torque is applied to the steering When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane  When the LaneSense system senses the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
boundary. has been approached and is in a lane depar-
have not been detected and the LaneSense
ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
For example: If approaching the left side of telltale is solid white.
yellow (on/off), the left thin line remains solid
the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the yellow and the LaneSense telltale changes
right. from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid Lanes Sensed (White Lines/Green Telltale) Lane Sensed (Solid Yellow Thick Line, Solid Yellow Thin
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale)  When the LaneSense system senses a lane Line/Solid Yellow Telltale)
drift situation, the left thick lane line and left  When the LaneSense system senses the lane 5
NOTE:
thin line turn solid yellow. The LaneSense tell- has been approached and is in a lane depar-
tale changes from solid green to solid yellow. ture situation, the left thick lane line flashes
behavior for a right lane departure when only
At this time torque is applied to the steering yellow (on/off) and the left thin line remains
the right lane marking has been detected.
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected boundary. from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this
 When the LaneSense system is on, the lane time torque is applied to the steering wheel in
For example: If approaching the left side of
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that the opposite direction of the lane boundary.
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
both of the lane markings have been right. For example: If approaching the left side of
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
green when both lane markings have been right.
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
ture occurs.
NOTE:
 When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
 Use of the turn signal suppresses the warn-
ings.
 The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
Lane Approached (Flashing Yellow Thick Line, Solid engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control Parking Camera
Yellow Thin Line/Flashing Yellow Telltale) System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
NOTE: Collision Warning, etc.). (with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
The LaneSense system operates with similar mode is exited and the navigation or audio
behavior for a right lane departure.
REAR BACK UP CAMERA screen appears again.
The Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see an When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
Changing LaneSense Status on-screen image of your vehicle's rear (with camera delay turned on), the camera
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust surroundings when the gear selector is put into image will continue to be displayed for up to
the intensity of the torque warning and the REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE
warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you touchscreen display along with a note to “Check unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
can configure through the Uconnect system Entire Surroundings” across the top of the (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or
screen. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in screen. After five seconds, this note will the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
“Multimedia” for further information. disappear. The camera is located above the When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, a
rear license plate. touchscreen "X" button is overlapped to the
camera image in order to disable the
visualization earlier than 10 seconds.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on

the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued)
and its projected backup path based on the Drivers must be careful when backing up  To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
steering wheel position. even when using the Rear Back Up Camera. be driven slowly when using the Rear Back
Different colored zones indicate the distance to Always check carefully behind your vehicle, Up Camera to be able to stop in time when
the rear of the vehicle. and be sure to check for pedestrians, ani- an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
mals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind the driver look frequently over his/her
The following table shows the approximate
spots before backing up. You are responsible shoulder when using the Rear Back Up
distances for each zone:
for the safety of your surroundings and must Camera.
Distance To The Rear continue to pay attention while backing up.
Zone
Of The Vehicle Failure to do so can result in serious injury or ADDING FUEL
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) death. The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed 5
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m) at the filler pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and
3 ft or greater closes automatically upon insertion/extraction
Green CAUTION!
(1 m or greater) of the fuel nozzle.
 To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up The Capless Fuel System is designed so that it
NOTE: Camera should only be used as a parking prevents the filling of an incorrect type of fuel.
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance aid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable to
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, view every obstacle or object in your drive
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do path.
not cover the lens. (Continued)
Opening The Door Emergency Refueling Procedure

For filling proceed as follows: If the vehicle is out of fuel proceed as follows:
 Open the liftgate and remove the emergency
1. Open the door, by pushing and releasing
on the indentation point indicated by the fuel fill funnel located in the cargo area.
arrow.
Filling Procedure
3. Before removing the nozzle, wait at least 10
seconds to allow the fuel to flow inside of
the tank.
4. Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel
Fuel Filler Door close the door.
2. Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and

proceed with filling the fuel tank.
Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel – If Equipped With Full Size

Spare Tire
 Open the fuel door. included on this label and indicates the Month,
WARNING! (Continued) Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
 Insert the emergency fuel fill funnel in the
 The use of objects/plugs do not comply that appears on the bottom of the label is your
filler pipe and proceed to fill the fuel tank.
with the vehicle and may cause pressure VIN.
increases inside the tank, creating
dangerous conditions. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
 Do not approach the neck of the tank with
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
open flames or lit cigarettes its an extreme
options and cargo. The label also specifies
fire hazard. Also, avoid close contact with
maximum capacities of front and rear axle
the filler pipe with your face, do not inhale
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
harmful vapors.
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
 Do not use your mobile phone in the vicinity exceeded. 5
of the pump fuel nozzle, it can be a possible
Fueling With Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel risk of fire. Payload
 Remove the emergency fuel fill funnel, and The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
close the door.
VEHICLE LOADING allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
 Store the emergency fuel fill funnel in the
Certification Label passengers, options and cargo.
cargo area.
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
WARNING! Administration regulations, your vehicle has a The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
certification label affixed to the driver's side the front and rear axles. The load must be
 Do not to affix objects/plugs to the end of door or pillar.
the filler neck other than is provided on the distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
This label contains the month and year of of each axle is not exceeded.
car.
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Each axle GAWR is determined by the
(Continued)
(GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front components in the system with the lowest load
and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for Loading

increased durability does not necessarily
CAUTION!
The actual total weight and the weight of the
increase the vehicle's GVWR. front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
best be determined by weighing it when it is GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
Tire Size If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
loaded and ready for operation.
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label it can change the way your vehicle handles.
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
This could cause you to lose control. Also
Replacement tires must be equal to the load commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
overloading can shorten the life of your vehi-
capacity of this tire size. not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
cle.
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
Rim Size separately to be sure that the load is properly
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire distributed over the front and rear axle. TRAILER TOWING
size listed. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR In this section you will find safety tips and
of either the front or rear axles has been information on limits to the type of towing you
Inflation Pressure exceeded but the total load is within the can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted towing a trailer, carefully review this information
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
GAWR. until the specified weight limitations are met. possible.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Curb Weight that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all coverage, follow the requirements and
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the loose items securely before driving. recommendations in this manual concerning
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, Improper weight distributions can have an vehicles used for trailer towing.
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo and handles and the way the brakes operate.
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Common Towing Definitions Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Frontal Area
The following trailer towing related definitions The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your The frontal area is the maximum height
will assist you in understanding the following vehicle and trailer when weighed in multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
information: combination. a trailer.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) Trailer Sway Control — Mechanical
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front can be installed between the hitch receiver and
and tongue weight. The total load must be and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do the trailer tongue that typically provides
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to adjustable friction associated with the
Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating” telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
Operating” for further information. for further information. trailer swaying motions while traveling.
5
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) WARNING! Weight-Carrying Hitch
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the It is important that you do not exceed the A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
weight of all cargo, consumables and maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in driving condition can result if either rating is at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for exceeded. the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
operation" condition. popular on the market today and they are
The recommended way to measure GTW is to commonly used to tow small and medium sized
Tongue Weight (TW) trailers.
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The tongue weight is the downward force
The entire weight of the trailer must be
exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
supported by the scale.
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Weight-Distributing Hitch recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)

and may be required depending on vehicle and WARNING! (Continued)
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are trailer configuration/loading to comply with  Weight Distributing Systems may not be
typically used for heavier loads to distribute Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements. compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
WARNING! turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,  An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing dealer for additional information.
it provides for a more level ride, offering more Hitch system may reduce handling,
consistent steering and brake control thereby stability, braking performance, and could Trailer Hitch Classification
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a result in a collision. The following chart provides the industry
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens (Continued) standard for the maximum trailer weight a given
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight for your intended towing condition.
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)
1.3L Turbo 2,000 lbs (906 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
2.4L 2,000 lbs (906 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced
on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight Consider the following items when computing NOTE: 5
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: Remember that everything put into or on the
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
 The tongue weight of the trailer. trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
additional factory-installed options or
 The weight of any other type of cargo or dealer-installed options must be considered as
equipment put in or on your vehicle. part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
 The weight of the driver and all passengers. the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Weight Distribution
Towing Requirements
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
 Safety chains must always be used  Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
between your vehicle and trailer. Always 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
are recommended:
connect the chains to the frame or hook driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
WARNING! retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the be damaged.
chains under the trailer tongue and allow  Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow enough slack for turning corners.
these guidelines to make your trailer towing that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
as safe as possible:  Vehicles with trailers should not be parked 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
on a grade. When parking, apply the at full throttle. This helps the engine and
 Make certain that the load is secured in the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
trailer and that it will not shift during travel. tow vehicle transmission in PARK. Always heavier loads.
When trailering cargo that is not fully block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that Towing Requirements — Tires
may be difficult for the driver to control. You  GCWR must not be exceeded.
 Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
could lose control of your vehicle and have  Total weight must be distributed between compact spare tire.
a collision. the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:  Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
 When hauling cargo, or towing a trailer, do
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-  GVWR
vehicle. Refer to “Tires – General Informa-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
 GTW tion” in “Serving And Maintenance” for
performance, or damage to brakes, axle,
GAWR proper tire inflation procedures.
engine, transmission, steering, suspension, 
chassis structure, or tires.  Tongue weight rating for the trailer  Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
(Continued) hitch utilized. pressures before trailer usage.
 Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to WARNING!
Wiring (If Equipped)
“Tires – General Information” in “Serving And  Do not connect trailer brakes to your Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
Maintenance” for the proper inspection vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over- trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
procedure. load your brake system and cause it to fail. trailer are required for motoring safety.
You might not have brakes when you need
 When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
them and could have a collision.
General Information” in “Serving And Mainte- seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
nance” for the proper tire replacement proce-  Towing any trailer will increase your stop- approved trailer harness and connector.
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load ping distance. When towing you should
carrying capacity will not increase the allow for additional space between your NOTE:
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits. vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
Failure to do so could result in a collision. wiring harness.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes 5
The electrical connections are all complete to
 Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
CAUTION! the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
trailer connector. Refer to the following
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad- If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg) illustrations.
equate braking and possible personal injury. loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this NOTE:
 An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,  Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
with electronically actuated brakes. When higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic distances. device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
surge actuated brake system, an electronic connect) into water.
brake controller is not required.
 Be sure to reconnect after clear from water
 Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers area.
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you

can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build up.
This action will also provide better engine
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector braking.
1 — Ground 1 — Battery
2 — Park 2 — Backup Lamps AutoStick
3 — Left Stop/Turn 3 — Right Stop/Turn  When using the AutoStick shift control, select
4 — Right Stop/Turn 4 — Electric Brakes the highest gear that allows for adequate
5 — Ground performance and avoids frequent down-
6 — Left Stop/Turn shifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or
7 — Running Lamps
“3” if needed to maintain the desired speed.
Towing Tips  To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
stopping, and backing the trailer in an area vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
located away from heavy traffic. extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped road conditions allow.
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
Speed Control — If Equipped Cooling System Highway Driving

 Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. To reduce potential for engine and transmission Reduce speed.
overheating, take the following actions: Air Conditioning
 When using the Speed Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph City Driving Turn off temporarily.
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back When stopped for short periods of time, shift
to cruising speed. the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase
engine idle speed.
 Use Speed Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 5
TOWING CONDITION WHEELS OFF THE GROUND FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK
NOTE:
 When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
 You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake engagement. The
Auto Park Brake feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the Uconnect Settings.
Recreational Towing
CAUTION! CAUTION!
Models With Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
 DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front drivetrain will result. If this vehicle requires the ground can cause severe transmission
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be towing, make sure the drive wheels are OFF and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off the ground. from improper towing is not covered under
the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this  Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
procedure: released, and remains released, while
 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
being towed. DRIVING TIPS
following the dolly manufacturer's instruc-  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above On-Road Driving Tips
tions. requirements can cause severe transmis-
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
sion damage. Damage from improper
 Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly. and a narrower track to make them capable of
towing is not covered under the New
performing in a wide variety of off-road
 Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place the Vehicle Limited Warranty.
applications. Specific design characteristics
transmission in PARK. Turn the engine off. give them a higher center of gravity than
Models With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly, conventional passenger cars.
 Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
following the dolly manufacturer's instruc- ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
tions. ALLOWED. This vehicle may be towed on a a better view of the road, allowing you to
flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels anticipate problems. They are not designed for
 Turn the ignition to the RUN mode, but do not
are OFF the ground. cornering at the same speeds as conventional
start the engine.
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports
 Press and hold the brake pedal. cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
 Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB). maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
 Turn the ignition OFF, and release the brake failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
pedal. result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
Off-Road Driving Tips Driving through water more than a few inches/ Maintenance
centimeters deep will require extra caution to After driving through deep water, inspect your
When To Use 4WD LOW Range ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine,
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to transmission, Power Transfer Unit and Rear
additional traction and control on slippery or determine the depth and the bottom condition Drive Module) to ensure they have not been
difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep (and location of any obstacles) prior to entering. contaminated. Contaminated fluids and
hills, and to increase low-speed pulling power Proceed with caution and maintain a steady lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should
(refer to “Four Wheel Drive” in this section for controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in be flushed/changed as soon as possible to
further details). This range should be limited to deep water to minimize wave effects. prevent component damage.
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or Flowing Water
sand where additional low speed pulling power Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in
is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water 5
(40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW additional control at slower speeds, shift the
level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If
range. transmission to a low gear and shift the 4WD
you must cross flowing-water, avoid depths in
excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water system to the appropriate terrain mode, using
Driving Through Water
can erode the streambed causing your vehicle 4WD LOW if necessary. Refer to “Four Wheel
Although your vehicle is capable of driving Drive” in “Starting And Operating” for further
through water, there are a number of to sink into deeper water. Determine exit
point(s) that are downstream of your entry point information. Do not shift to a lower gear than
precautions that must be considered before necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving
entering the water: to allow for drifting.
the engine can spin the wheels and traction will
Standing Water — Trailhawk Only
be lost.
CAUTION! Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads
When driving through water, do not exceed 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce speed
because engine braking may cause skidding
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth appropriately to minimize wave effects.
and loss of control.
before entering as a precaution, and check all Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of water
fluids afterward. Driving through water may is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
cause damage that may not be covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Hill Climbing NOTE: After Driving Off-Road

Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill Off-road operation puts more stress on your
NOTE: - drive straight up or down.
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and for damage. That way you can get any problems
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the maintain headway by turning the front wheels taken care of right away and have your vehicle
transmission to a lower gear and shift the 4WD slowly left and right. This may provide a fresh ready when you need it.
System to 4WD LOW. Use first gear and 4WD “bite” into the surface and will usually provide  Completely inspect the underbody of your
LOW for very steep hills. traction to complete the climb. vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
If you stall or begin to lose headway while suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come Traction Downhill
 Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
to a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Shift the transmission into a low gear and the
clean as required.
Restart the engine and shift to REVERSE. Back 4WD System to 4WD LOW range or select Hill
slowly down the hill allowing the compression Descent Control if equipped (refer to "Electronic  Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
braking of the engine to help regulate your Brake Control System" in “Safety” for further particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
speed. If the brakes are required to control information). Let the vehicle go slowly down the nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid hill with all four wheels turning against engine them, if required, and torque to the values
locking or skidding the tires. compression drag. This will permit you to control specified in the Service Manual.
the vehicle speed and direction.
WARNING!  Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated These things could be a fire hazard. They
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or braking can cause brake fade with loss of might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so by downshifting the transmission whenever
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle. possible.
Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE
gear carefully. Never back down a hill in NEU-
TRAL using only the brake.
 After extended operation in mud, sand,

water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in 5
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
 If you experience unusual vibration after

driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
238
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
WARNING!
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located continue to operate even though the ignition is ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
on the switch bank below the radio. placed in OFF mode. the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
NOTE:
bility and assume all risks related to the use
With extended use the Hazard Warning
of the features and applications in this vehi-
Flashers may wear down your battery.
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
NOTE:
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning authorized by the subscriber.
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
 The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push (voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Uconnect services will only be operable if
Warning Flashers. Assist And SOS Buttons
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
This is an emergency warning system and it 1 — SOS Button
and you are connected to an operable LTE
should not be used when the vehicle is in 2 — ASSIST Button (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 239
ASSIST Call NOTE: 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, operator through the vehicle audio system
connect you to any one of the following support there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS to determine if additional help is needed.
centers: Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
 Roadside Assistance (if equipped) – If you get
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS WARNING!
a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST call button on the overhead console or press ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
button and you’ll be connected to someone the cancellation button on the Device Screen. the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
who can help. Roadside Assistance will know Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
what vehicle you’re driving and its location. green LED light on the overhead console. bility and assume all risks related to the use
Additional fees may apply for roadside assis- 2. The LED lights located on the ASSIST and of the features and applications in this vehi-
tance. SOS buttons on the overhead console will cle. Only use the features and applications
turn green once a connection to a SOS when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
 SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care (if
equipped) – In-vehicle support for SiriusXM operator has been made. result in an accident involving serious injury
Guardian™. or death.
3. The SOS Call system may transmit the 6
 Vehicle Customer Care (if equipped) – Total following important vehicle information to a
NOTE:
support for all other vehicle issues. SOS operator:
 Indication that the occupant placed a  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
 UConnect Care (if quipped) – Total support authorized by the subscriber.
for all the UConnect feature. SOS Call.
 The vehicle brand.  Once a connection is made between the
SOS Call vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
 The last known GPS coordinates of the ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
vehicle. voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
console.
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
240 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system SOS Call System Limitations
will attempt to remain connected with the WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-  The SOS Call system is embedded into the system capabilities.
nates the connection. vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add SOS or other emergency line operators in
aftermarket electrical equipment to the Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
vehicle’s electrical system. This may system calls.
appropriate emergency responders and
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
provide them with important vehicle
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter- NOTE:
information and GPS coordinates.
ference that can cause the SOS Call system The SOS Call function may not be available for
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment the first minute after the vehicle is started
WARNING! (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger any of the following may occur at the time the
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
road conditions or location), do not wait for each ignition cycle:
voice contact from an Emergency Services POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE  The overhead console lights located on the
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously be
immediately and move to a safe location.
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT illuminated red.
 Never place anything on or near the OPERATE.
vehicle’s operable network and GPS  The Device Screen will display the following
 Modifications to any part of the SOS Call message: “Vehicle device requires service.
antennas. You could prevent operable
system could cause the air bag system to Please contact an authorized dealer.”
network and GPS signal reception, which
fail when you need it. You could be injured
can prevent your vehicle from placing an  An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
if the air bag system is not there to help
emergency call. An operable network and “Vehicle device requires service. Please
protect you.
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS contact an authorized dealer.”
Call system to function properly.
(Continued)
 The vehicle battery loses power or becomes NOTE:

WARNING! disconnected during a vehicle crash.
 Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
 Ignoring the overhead console light could
 LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or authorized by the subscriber.
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
the overhead console light is illuminated,  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
unavailable or obstructed.
have an authorized dealer service the SOS LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
Call system immediately.  Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
 The Occupant Restraint Control module facility. data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the which can prevent your vehicle from placing
 Operator error by the SOS operator.
instrument panel if a malfunction in any an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
Warning Light is illuminated, have an congestion. GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
authorized dealer service the Occupant system to function properly.
 Weather.
Restraint Control system immediately. NOTE:
 Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or Changes or modifications not expressly
6
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional, tunnels. approved by the party responsible for compli-
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
ance could void the user's authority to operate
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation. WARNING! the equipment.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors: ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
 Delayed accessories mode is active.
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
 The ignition is in the OFF position. bility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehi-
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not cle. Only use the features and applications
intact.
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
 The SOS Call system software and/or hard- result in an accident involving serious injury
ware are damaged during a crash. or death.
General Information 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et
BULB REPLACEMENT
General Information
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
vehicle: brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le  Before you replace a bulb, check the
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA025N brouillage est susceptible d'en compro- contacts to be sure they are not oxidized.
IC: 4983A-TCUFCA02SN mettre le fonctionnement.  Replace the bulbs with the same type and
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC wattage.
Rules and with Innovation, Science and siguientes dos condiciones:  After replacing a light bulb, always check the
Economic Development Canada license-exempt correct orientation.
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
following two conditions: cause interferencia perjudicial y  Before replacing a bulb that is not func-
tioning, check that the fuse is intact.
1. This device may not cause harmful 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
interference, and cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que NOTE:
pueda causar su operación no deseada. Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
2. This device must accept any interference spheric conditions. This will usually clear as
received, including interference that may NOTE: atmospheric conditions change to allow the
cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly condensation to change back into a vapor.
approved by the party responsible for compli- Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR ance could void the user’s authority to operate clearing process.
dÌnnovation, Science and Economic the equipment.
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable Roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable Roof) C5W
Interior Lights W5W
Dome Light (Glove Compartment) W5W
Exterior Bulbs 6
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps (LED Version) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps H13
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL)/Front Turn Indicator PY24W
Front Direction Indicator Lamps (If Equipped With LED Headlamps) PY24W
Front Fog Lamps H11
Front Fog Lamps (LED Versions) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) WY5W
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators (LED Versions) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators P21W
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an Authorized Dealer)
Reverse W16W
License Plate Lamp W5W
Replacing Exterior Bulbs Headlamps 2. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counter-
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen clockwise then pull outwards.
CAUTION! To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
During bulb replacement do not touch the
1. Open the engine compartment and remove
new glass bulb with your fingers. Oil contami-
the headlamp bulb cap.
nation will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Headlamp Bulb Socket
Headlamp Bulb Cap

3. Push on the locking tab on the headlamp 4. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure
bulb connector and remove the bulb and it is properly locked.
socket.
5. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; turn it
clockwise making sure it is properly locked.
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps
only with the engine off. Also make sure that
the engine is cold, to avoid the danger of Position Light/Daytime Running Light/
burns. Fog Light Access
1 — Screws
LED Headlamps – If Equipped 2 — Access Door
Headlamp Bulb Connector
For replacement see an authorized dealer.
3. Remove the electrical connector. 6
Position Lights/Daytime Running Lights/Fog
Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access
door.
Headlamp Bulb
4. Releasing the two tabs, and remove the Front Fog Lights
bulb and bulb socket from the housing. To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Use a suitable tool to remove the access
door.
Fog Light Assembly

1 — Bulb Socket
2 — Electrical Connector
Position Light/Daytime Running Light Assembly
3 — Bulb
1 — Bulb Socket
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then
5. Install the new bulb and socket into the replace the bulb.
housing, and engage the two tabs, making Position Light/Daytime Running Light/
sure that it is properly locked. Fog Light Access 5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making
sure the bulb is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector. 1 — Screws
2 — Access Door 6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the access door.
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab 7. Reinstall the access door.
remove the electrical connector.
LED Front Fog Lamps – If Equipped 4. Rotate counterclockwise to release the bulb
For replacement see an authorized dealer. socket from the lamp assembly, and
Side Indicators remove it.
Front Side Indicators
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Operating from inside the engine
compartment using a suitable tool release
the retaining clip.
Lamp Assembly
3. Remove the electrical connector by pushing
the tab then disconnect the electrical
connector. Bulb Socket
6
5. Remove the bulb from the socket.
Lamp Retaining Clip

2. Remove lamp assembly by sliding it toward
the outside.
Electrical Connector
Bulb
6. Insert the new bulb in the socket. To replace the bulb proceed as follows: 2. Remove the transparent lens assembly as
shown.
7. Reinstall the bulb and socket into the lamp 1. Remove the mirror cap on the outside rear
assembly by turning it clockwise, making view mirror.
sure it is locked into place.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly on the car,
making sure it is locked into place.
Side Indicators on External Rear View Mirrors –

(If Equipped)
CAUTION! Transparent Lens
The procedure is described as a guideline. Mirror Cap 3. Remove the bulb socket and bulb from the
For the replacement of the lamp it is recom- transparent lens assembly by rotating the
mended that you contact an authorized socket counterclockwise.
dealer.
Removing the mirror cap
Transparent Lens Assembly

4. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by Rear Tail Lamps 3. Using a suitable tool remove fastener.
pulling the bulb straight out. Contain the following: 4. Disconnect the electrical connector by
 Position lights pushing the release.
 Stop lights
 Direction indicator
 REVERSE lights
1. Open the liftgate.
Bulb And Socket Assembly 2. Using a suitable tool remove the door as
shown.
1 — Bulb
Rear Lamp Fastener and Electrical Connector
2 — Bulb Socket 6
1 — Electrical Connector
5. Insert the new bulb, making sure that it is 2 — Fastener
locked into place.
6. Reinstall the socket in to the transparent
lens assembly.
7. Reinstall the cover on the outside rear view
mirror, making sure it is locked into place.
Trim Panel Door
5. Remove the rear tail lamp, sliding it toward 7. Replace the bulb as necessary. 12. Reinstall the door making sure it locked into
the outside as shown. place.
13. Finally close the liftgate.
LED Rear Tail Lamps – If Equipped

For replacement see an authorized dealer.
Reverse Lights – If Equipped With LED Tail
Lamps
1. Use a suitable tool to remove the screws
and remove the access door.
Rear Tail Lamp Holder
Tail Lamp Removal 1 — Tail Light
6. Unscrew the screws and remove the rear 2 — Reverse Bulb
tail lamp holder. 3 — Position Light/Stop Light/Turn Signal
8. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is

properly locked.
9. Reassemble the lamp assembly on the rear
tail lamp housing, tightening the screws.
10. Reposition the rear tail lamp on the car. Reverse Light Access
11. Secure the fastener of the rear tail lamp and 1 — Screw
reconnect the electrical connector. 2 — Screw
3 — Access Door
Rear Lamp Assembly
1 — Mounting Screws
2. By pushing the electrical connector tab Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
remove the electrical connector. The CHMSL is LED. For replacement see an
authorized dealer.
License Plate Lights
1. Using a suitable tool remove the license
plate lens.
License Plate Light

2. Remove the bulbs from the individual side
Reverse Light Assembly contacts.
1 — Bulb 3. Insert the new bulbs, and ensure that they
are properly locked between the contacts.
6
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then
replace the bulb. 4. Reinstall the license plate lens.
4. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making NOTE:
License Plate Light Location
sure the bulb is locked into place. If removing the license plate lens using a screw-
5. Reconnect the electrical connector. driver, be sure to cover the tip of the screwdriver
with a cloth so no damage is done to the lenses
6. Reinstall the access door. or the vehicle paint.
Replacing Interior Bulbs 4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they
are properly locked.
Front Courtesy Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: 5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy
light housing making sure that they are
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front properly locked.
courtesy light as shown.
6. Install the front courtesy light making sure
that it is properly locked.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing

1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of

bulb housing.
Front Courtesy Light Housing

2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing
as shown.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing

Dome Light Vanity Mirror Dome Light Glove Compartment Rear Dome Light — Without Retractable Roof
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows: To replace the bulb proceed as follows: To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the 1. Open the glove compartment. 1. Using a suitable tool release the lamp
visor mirror light cover. assembly at both the ends.
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly,
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side pull the bulb to replace it. 2. Open the flap and replace the bulb.
contacts, and then insert the new bulb,
making sure that it is properly locked
between the contacts.
Bulb Removal/Installation Rear Dome Light Housing

1 — Bulb
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is
properly locked. 2 — Flap
Visor
1 — Visor Mirror Cover 3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the
2 — Visor Mirror Light contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making
sure that it is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the
mirror.
Dome Light — MY SKY

1. Lower the handle in the direction shown
remove the dome light.
Bulb Light Cover

3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the 3. Close the light cover over the bulb.
contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light in its correct
4. Reinstall the dome light. position.
Retractable Roof Light
Interior Cargo Lights
WARNING!
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
side contacts.  Before proceeding with the replacement of
1. Open the luggage compartment and the lamp wait for the exhaust pipes are
remove the dome light assembly. cool: DANGER OF BURNS!
2. Open the light cover and replace the bulb.  Modifications or repair of the electrical
system performed incorrectly and without
taking into account the technical character-
istics can cause malfunctions with the risk
of fire.
(Continued)

 Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure,  Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
in the event of breakage be careful of the ignition is off and that all the other services
projection of fragments of glass. are switched off and/or disengaged.
 Halogen lamps must be handled by  If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
touching only the metallic part. If the trans- authorized dealer.
parent bulb is in contact with the fingers,  If a general protection fuse for safety
reduces the intensity of the emitted light systems (air bag system, braking system),
and you can also affect the life of the lamp. Blade Fuses
power unit systems (engine system,
In case of accidental contact, rub the bulb gearbox system) or steering system blows, 1 — Fuse Element
with a cloth dampened with alcohol and contact an authorized dealer. 2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse ele-
allow to dry. ment.
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
General Information 6
FUSES The fuses protect electrical systems against
ement (blown fuse).
excessive current. Access To The Fuses

WARNING!
When a device does not work, you must check The fuses are grouped into four controllers
 When replacing a blown fuse, always use the electrical circuit inside the fuse for a break/
an appropriate replacement fuse with the located in the engine compartment, under the
melt. instrument panel and on the inside of the left
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
Also please be aware that when using power side cargo trim panel.
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with outlets for extended periods of time with the
metal wires or any other material. Failure to engine off may result in vehicle battery
use proper fuses may result in serious discharge.
personal injury, fire and/or property
damage.
(Continued)
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw

Unit Proceed as follows:
The engine compartment fuse panel is located  Properly secure the fuse cover to the box,
on the left side of the engine compartment. slide completely from top to bottom.
 Fully depress the screw, using the special
screwdriver supplied.
 Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
Fuse Panel & Cover Location  Release the screw.

1 — Mounting Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw

Engine Compartment Fuse Cavities Proceed as follows:
 Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
 Slowly release the screw.

 Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
Battery Fuse Cover Location
1 — Fuse Cover Tabs
2 — Fuse Cover
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer
Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution
F02 70 Amp Tan – –
Unit
F03 – 20 Amp Blue – Controller Power Supply Body Computer
F04 – 30 Amp Pink – Brake Control Electronics Module
F05 70 Amp Tan – – Electric Power-Assisted Steering
20 Amp Yellow – 2.4L
Engine
F06 – – Engine Cooling Fan
70 Amp Tan – 1.3L Turbo
Engine
F07 50 Amp Red – 2.4L Engine – – Engine Cooling Fan
6
F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Automatic Transmission, GSM
F09 – – 5 Amp Tan Control Module Engine
F10 – – 15 Amp Blue Horn
5 Amp Tan – 1.3L Turbo
F11 – – Engine Supply Secondary Loads
25 Amp Clear – 2.4L Engine
15 Amp Blue – 1.3L Turbo
F14 – – WCAC Pump/Active Grille Shutters
Engine
F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Module Pump
Engine Control Module Power, Automatic
F16 – – 5 Amp Tan
Transmission

30 Amp Green – 1.3L Turbo
F17 – – Engine Supply Primary Loads
15 Amp Blue – 2.4L Engine
Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) 2.4L – If
Equipped
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner Compressor
F20 – – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Power Four-Wheel Drive
F21 – – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump
10 Amp Red – 1.3L Turbo
Engine
– – Power Control Module Engine
F22 20 Amp Yellow – 2.4L
Engine
F23 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Windshield – If Equipped
Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmis-
F24 – – 15 Amp Blue
sion
20 Amp Yellow – 1.3L Turbo
F82 – – Power Control Module Engine
Engine
F83 – 40 Amp Green – Air Conditioning Fan
F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All Wheel Drive
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors

F89 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Rear Window
Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) 1.3L – If
Equipped
Body Computer Fuse Center

The controller is located at the left side of the
steering column at the bottom of the instrument
panel.
For the fuse replacement see an authorized
dealer.
6
Body Controller Fuse Cavities
Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F31 7.5 Amp Brown Flashes/Electrical Movement Front Seats/Fan Air Conditioning
F33 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Passenger Side)
F34 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Driver Side)
Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning, USB Port, Rear Ceiling Lights (With
F36 15 Amp Blue
Sunroof), E-Call, SGW
System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus, All Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC, Brake
F37 10 Amp Red
Pedal Switch (NC)
F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking

Power Under Lock and Key, Brake Control Electronics Module, Electric
F42 7.5 Amp Brown
Power-Assisted Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-directional Pump Washer
F47 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Driver Side)
F48 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)
Supply ParkSense, SGW, Mirror, Heated Front Seats, Stabilizer Battery, ESC Sys-
F49 7.5 Amp Brown
tem, S&S Inhibition Command, Blind Spot, Rain/Light Sensor, Humidity Sensor
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Supply Air Bag
Air Conditioning, Lane Departure Warning, Terrain Selector, Backup Lights Switch
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
(MT), Trailer Tow Module, Compass Module, Rear View Camera
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless Enter-N-Go
F94 15 Amp Blue Power Socket
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit The fuses may be contained in two units. fuse
holder No. 1 and fuse holder No. 2 (if equipped
To access the fuses, remove the access door
with trailer towing) are located closest to the
from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area.
rear of the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities

1 — Fuse Holder No. 1
2 — Fuse Holder No. 2
Rear Fuse Access Door

6
Fuse Holder No. 1
F1 30 Amp Blue Power Inverter
F2 20 Amp Yellow HIFI Audio System
F3 20 Amp Yellow MY SKY
F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side)
F6 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Adjustment Front Seat (Driver Side)
F8 20 Amp Yellow Heating Front Seats
On the controller there is also a 20 amp fuse for the sun visor of the retractable roof.
Fuse Holder No. 2

F1 10 Amp Red Controller Exterior Lighting On Trailer
F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers Side)
Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger
F6 15 Amp Blue
Side)
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING! (Continued)

Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and tools are located in the rear
WARNING!  The jack is designed to be used as a tool for storage compartment if equipped, inside a
changing tires only. The jack should not be special container.
 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
far enough off the road to avoid the danger surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
 Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
Jack And Tools Location
center where it can be raised on a lift.
 Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
(Continued)
Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
Jack And Tools Load Floor Handle operating the jack or changing the wheel.
1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare
2 — Jack tire. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Wheel Chocks 4. Remove the chocks. 3. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
6
5 — Screwdriver 5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench. 4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P)
6 — Emergency Allen Key (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (R)
6. Remove the spare tire.
(manual transmission).
1. Open the liftgate.
WARNING! 5. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle. A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places pro-
vided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel Jacking Instructions
diagonally opposite of the jacking position. WARNING! (Continued)
For example, if changing the driver’s front WARNING!  Only use the jack in the positions indicated
tire, chock the passenger’s rear wheel. and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
change.
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:  If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible  To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
before raising the vehicle. are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
ground.
 Apply the parking brake and place an auto-
matic transmission in PARK.
 Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the
NOTE:
wheel to be raised.
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.  Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
 Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
 Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised Jack Warning Label
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt

wrench.
2. If equipped with wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel Jacking Locations Front Jacking Location
bolt wrench to pry the center cap off
carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the 6
wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire.
Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the jacking
location that is closest to the flat tire.
Jacking location is indicated by a stamped Front Lifting Point Rear Lifting Point
arrow on the body. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle
with the lift area of the sill flange, centering
the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill
cladding.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded

CAUTION! end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel.
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incor- WARNING!
rectly. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury.
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
flat tire. the jack handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
WARNING! down on the wrench while at the end of the
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off Mounting Spare Tire wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
NOTE:
vehicle only enough to remove the tire. to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in
 Your vehicle may be equipped with a “Technical Specifications” for the proper lug
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire. compact spare tire or a limited — use spare bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct
tire. For further information refer to “Tires” in tightness, have them checked with a torque
7. Mount the spare tire. “Servicing And Maintenance”. wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
 For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to
install a center cap or wheel cover on the
compact spare.
11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks, and Road Tire Installation 4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
flat tire. down on the wrench while at the end of the
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts. to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in
the “Technical Specifications” section for
WARNING! the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
with a torque wrench by an authorized
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until
dealer or service station.
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury. 5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the
Properly Stowed Tire
wheel chocks. Stow the jack and tools back
WARNING! in the proper storage location. Release the
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning 6
the jack handle counterclockwise. Electric Park Brake before driving the
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli- vehicle.
sion or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack 6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt
parts and the spare tire in the places pro- torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
vided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or all wheel bolts are properly seated against
replaced immediately. the wheel.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED Tire Service Kit Components And Operation 1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the
vehicle, take it out from the bag and place
Tire Service Kit Storage it near the punctured tire. Screw the clear
The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear storage flexible filling tube to the tire valve.
compartment inside a storage container. 2. Insert the power plug into the vehicle power
Located inside the container are a screwdriver outlet socket. Start the vehicle engine.
and the emergency fuel funnel. To access the
Tire Service Kit open the liftgate and remove the 3. Push the Tire Service Kit power button to
load floor. the “I” position. The electric compressor will
be turned on, sealant and air will inflate the
tire.
Tire Service Kit Components
Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure
1 — Power Button should be reached within 20 minutes. If the
2 — Pressure Gauge pressure has not been reached turn off and
3 — Warning Label remove the Tire Service Kit, drive the vehi-
4 — Sealant Hose (Clear) cle 30 feet (10 meters) back and forth, to
5 — Power Plug (Located On Bottom Side Of Tire better distribute the sealant inside the tire.
Service Kit)
4. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the
Tire Service Kit Location If a tire is punctured, you can make a first compressor directly to the tire valve and
emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit repeat the inflation process.
located in the rear storage compartment inside When the correct pressure has been
the storage container. reached, start driving the vehicle to uniformly
distribute the sealant inside the tire. After
10 minutes, stop and check the tire pres-
sure. If the pressure is below 19 psi (1.3 bar),

do not drive the vehicle, as the tire is too
damaged, and contact the nearest autho- The metal end fitting from Power Plug may get  If the wheel has any damage.
rized dealer. hot after use, so it should be handled care-
 If you are unsure of the condition of the
fully.
tire or the wheel.
WARNING!
 Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
flames or heat source.
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired
or replaced after using Tire Service Kit. Do WARNING!  A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until the tire is  Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
warning can result in injuries that are serious off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
Failure to follow these warnings can result
or fatal to you, your passengers, and others when using the Tire Service Kit.
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
around you. Have the tire checked as soon as
 Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the your passengers, and others around you. 6
possible at an authorized dealer. vehicle under the following circumstances:
 Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
 If the puncture in the tire tread is Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or above
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
repeat the inflation process to reach the
larger. harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
correct tire pressure and continue driving.
 If the tire has any sidewall damage. through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
5. Peel off the warning label from the bottle respiratory irritation. Flush immediately
and place it on the dashboard as a reminder  If the tire has any damage from driving with plenty of water if there is any contact
to the driver that the tire has been treated with extremely low tire pressure. with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
with Tire Service Kit.  If the tire has any damage from driving as possible, if there is any contact with
on a flat tire. clothing.
(Continued) (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! CAUTION!

 Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains Store the sealant canister in its special com- Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash, partment, away from sources of heat. Failure any other booster source with a system volt-
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire to follow this WARNING may result in sealant age greater than 12 Volts or damage to the
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal- canister rupture and serious injury or death. battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty system may occur.
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme- JUMP STARTING Preparations For Jump Start
diately. If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be The battery in your vehicle is located in the front
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a of the engine compartment, behind the left
Replacing The Sealant battery in another vehicle or by using a portable headlight assembly.
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be
NOTE: dangerous if done improperly so please follow
Replace the sealant canister prior to the expira- the procedures in this section carefully.
tion date at an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is Positive Battery Post
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
NOTE: Proceed as follows: Jump Starting Procedure

The positive battery post is covered with a
1. Apply the Electric Park Brake, shift the
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access WARNING!
automatic transmission into PARK (P)
to the positive battery post.
(manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
place the ignition OFF. could result in personal injury or property
WARNING! damage due to battery explosion.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all
 Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
unnecessary electrical accessories.
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can CAUTION!
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
be injured by moving fan blades. battery, park the vehicle within the jumper Failure to follow these procedures could
 Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, cables reach, set the parking brake and result in damage to the charging system of
watch bands and bracelets that could make sure the ignition is OFF. the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
Connecting The Jumper Cables
could be seriously injured. WARNING! 6
 Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
burn your skin or eyes and generate cable to the positive (+) post of the
this could establish a ground connection and
hydrogen gas which is flammable and discharged vehicle.
personal injury could result.
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
away from the battery.
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
CAUTION!
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
battery. Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
jumper cable from the engine ground of
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) the vehicle with the discharged battery.
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
jumper cable to a good engine ground
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
(exposed metal part of the discharged
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of without engine operation, the vehicle’s bat-
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the booster battery. tery will discharge sufficiently to degrade bat-
the fuel injection system.
tery life and/or prevent the engine from
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the starting.
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY — IF EQUIPPED
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive The fuel filling procedure for in case of an
(+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post emergency is described in the “Emergency Gas
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Can Refueling” procedure. Refer to “Adding
Fuel” in “Starting And Operating” for further
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
information.
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel.
Suitable Engine Ground (Example Engine Shown) If refueling is necessary, while using an
dealer.
approved gas can, please insert the refueling
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
funnel into the filler neck opening.
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow down
In any of the following situations, you can an impending overheat condition:
reduce the potential for overheating your
engine by taking the appropriate action.  If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
 On the highways — slow down.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
 In city traffic — while stopped, put transmis- help remove this heat.
sion in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase
engine idle speed.  You can also turn the temperature control to
Refueling Funnel maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
CAUTION! heater core to act as a supplement to the
Driving with a hot cooling system could dam- radiator and aids in removing heat from the
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge engine cooling system.
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle 6
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off WARNING!
until the pointer drops back into the normal
You or others can be badly burned by hot
range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
off immediately and call for service.
from under the hood, do not open the hood
Inserting Funnel until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE

If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you
can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.
3. Carefully separate the gear selector boot Removing Gear Selector Bezel Gear Selector Override Location
assembly from the bezel.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the 6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
brake pedal. position.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool 7. The vehicle may then be started in
down into the gear selector override access NEUTRAL.
hole (at the right front corner of the gear
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot on the
selector assembly), and push and hold the
bezel.
override release lever down.
Gear Selector Bezel Location

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE:

Push the “ESC OFF” switch (if necessary), to
CAUTION!
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)  Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking system in “Partial Off” mode, before rocking the may lead to transmission overheating and
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
clear the area around the front wheels. For System” in “Safety” for further information. transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
vehicles with automatic transmission, push and Once the vehicle has been freed, push the “ESC minute after every five rocking-motion
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then OFF” switch again to restore “ESC On” mode. cycles. This will minimize overheating and
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission
REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission) or failure during prolonged efforts to free a
WARNING!
SECOND gear (2) and REVERSE (R) (with stuck vehicle.
manual transmission), while gently pressing the Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
accelerator.
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle between DRIVE/SECOND gear and
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain 6
without spinning the wheels or racing the someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
damage may result.
engine. faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without stop-  Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission: too fast may lead to transmission over-
ping when you are stuck and do not let any-
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be one near a spinning wheel, no matter what heating and failure. It can also damage the
achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or the speed. tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
less. Whenever the transmission remains in (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
NEUTRAL (N) for more than two seconds, you shifting occurring).
must press the brake pedal to engage DRIVE or
REVERSE.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS FOUR WHEEL DRIVE
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to  You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, CAUTION!
bars and other equipment designed for this to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake  Do not use sling type equipment when
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. enabled or disabled via the customer
 When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main programmable features in the Uconnect
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
structural members of the vehicle, not to Settings.
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
bumpers or associated brackets. State and may result from improper towing.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
observed. Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
must be in the RUN mode. If the key fob is
NOTE: unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is The manufacturer recommends towing your
discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground on a
 Vehicles with a discharged battery or total this section for instructions on shifting the flatbed.
electrical failure when the Electric Park Brake transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle
(EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or If flatbed equipment is not available, this
can be moved. vehicle must towed with the front wheels OFF
jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground
when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed. the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift
equipment with the front wheels raised).
NOTE: front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, CAUTION! (Continued) located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
and remains released, while being towed.  Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
NOTE:
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
CAUTION! Internal damage to the transmission or
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
power transfer unit will occur if a front or
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above rear wheel lift is used when towing. of damage to the vehicle.
requirements can cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
covered under the New Vehicle Limited War- requirements can cause severe transmis-
ranty. sion and/or power transfer unit damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The manufacturer requires towing with all four
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped 6
are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with one
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end
will be one in the rear and two mounted on the Front Tow Hook Locations
on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
 DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its
wheels on the ground. Damage to the drive-
train will result.
(Continued)
Rear Tow Hook Location

Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,

without opening the door. During towing
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
remember that not having the aid of the power (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
brakes and the electromechanical power Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
steering, greater force is needed in applying the to record data that will assist in understanding
Accident Response System.
brakes and steering of the vehicle. how a vehicle’s systems performed under
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
WARNING! “Safety” for further information on the as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) obstacle.
 Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck function.
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
injury or death. “Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
 Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to res-
cue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use
tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway
towing. You could damage your vehicle.
279
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check engine oil level.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), 1
change indicator system. The oil change year or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever  Check windshield washer fluid level.
indicator system will remind you that it is time to comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle  Check the tire inflation pressures and look
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. time is generally only a concern for fleet for unusual wear or damage.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil customers.
change indicator message will illuminate in the  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
instrument cluster. This means that service is Severe Duty All Models and brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or as needed.
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow and 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
 Check function of all interior and exterior
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will operated in a dusty and off road environment or
lights.
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change is operated predominately at idle or only very
Required” message is displayed. Severe low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
Operating Conditions can cause the change oil considered Severe Duty. 7
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
NOTE:
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate
serviced as soon as possible, within the next
under these conditions.
500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change.
280 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

Change oil and filter.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses.
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
Refer to the “Maintenance Chart” on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 281
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Replace the Uconnect box (telematic box) bat-

• • •
tery (if equipped).1
Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure,
if necessary, check Tire Service Kit expiration • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
date (if equipped).
Check operation of lighting system (headlamps,
direction indicators, hazard warning lights, lug-
gage compartment, passenger compartment, • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
7
glove compartment, instrument panel warning
lights, etc.).
Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels
(brakes/hydraulic clutch, windshield washer, • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
engine coolant, etc.).2
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Check engine control system operation (via diag-

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
nostic tool).
Visually inspect condition of: exterior bodywork,
underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust
• • • • • • • •
- fuel system - brakes), rubber elements (boots,
sleeves, bushings, etc.).
Check windshield/rear window wiper blade posi-
• • • • • • • •
tion/wear.
Check operation of windshield washer system
• • • • • • • •
and adjust jets if necessary.
Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate locks
• • • • • • •
and cleanliness and lubrication of linkages.
Visually check the condition and wear of the
• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
front and rear brakes.
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Check the front suspension, tie rods, CV joints

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
and replace if necessary.
Visually inspect the condition of the accessory
• • •
drive belt.3
Check the tension of the accessory drive belt. • •
Inspect and replace, if required, front end acces-
• •
sory drive belt, tensioner, and, idler pulley.3 7
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. •
Change engine oil and replace oil filter.4 5 6
Inspect the PTU fluid level. • • •
Inspect the rear differential fluid level. • • •
Replace spark plugs (1.3L Turbo Engine)7 • • •
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Replace spark plugs (2.4L Engine)7 •

Replace engine air filter.8 • • • • • • •
Replace brake fluid every two years.9 • • • • • • •
Replace cabin filter. ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○
Change the manual transmission fluid if using
your vehicle for any of the following: trailer tow-
ing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service
• •
(commercial service), off-road, desert operation
or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
10,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
16,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years

or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes • •
first.
1. The Uconnect box (telematic box) battery replacement has to be done every five years, regardless of mileage.
2. Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damage.
3. The maximum mileage is 75,000 miles (120,000 km). The belt must be replaced every six years, regardless of distance traveled. If the vehicle is used in heavy conditions
(dusty areas, cold climates, urban driving, long periods of idling), the maximum mileage is 37,500 miles (60,000 km). The belt must be replaced every four years regardless
of the mileage.
4. The oil and oil filter replacement must be carried out when indicated by a warning light or message on the instrument panel, or in any case should not exceed one year or 7
10,000 miles (16,000 km).
5. Always only use the liquids shown in the handbook for topping up after having checked that the system is not damage.
6. If the engine oil quality detected by the vehicle diagnostics is lower than 20%, it is advisable to replace the engine oil and engine filter in order to avoid another service operation
after a short time.
7. The spark plug change is distance based only, yearly intervals do not apply. The following are essential to ensure correct operation and prevent serious damage to the engine:
 Only use spark plugs of the same make and type which are specially certified for such engines (refer to “Fluids and Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further informa-tion).
 Strictly comply with the spark plug replacement interval given in the “Maintenance Schedule” for spark plug replacement.
 Contact an authorized dealer if you have any questions.
8. The engine air cleaner should be inspected at every oil change if used in dusty areas.
9. The brake fluid change interval is time based only, mileage intervals do not apply.
○ Recommend replacement
• Mandatory service
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1.3L Turbo Engine
1 — Oil Fill Cap/Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

2 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Battery 7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2.4L Engine
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap

2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 7 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
4 — Battery 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
Checking Oil Level There are four possible dipstick types: Cooling System
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine  Crosshatched zone.
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
WARNING!
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as  You or others can be badly burned by hot
every fuel stop. The best time to check the  Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully low end of the range and MAX at the high end your radiator. If you see or hear steam
warmed up engine is shut off. of the range. coming from under the hood, do not open
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level the hood until the radiator has had time to
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
readings. cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
NOTE: hot.
Engine Oil Cap/Dipstick Installation — 1.3L
Always maintain the oil level within the cross- Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
Turbo Engine 
hatch markings on the dipstick. away from the radiator cooling fan when
Install the oil cap/dipstick aligning arrow on the
cap with arrow on the engine cover. Adding 1 quart (1.0 liters) of oil when the the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
reading is at the low end of the dipstick range cally and may start at any time, whether the
will raise the oil level to the high end of the engine is running or not.
7
range marking.  When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
CAUTION! ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will temperature controlled and can start at any
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This time the ignition is in the ON mode.
could damage your engine.
Oil Cap
1 — Oil Cap/Dipstick Arrow
2 — Engine Cover Arrow
Coolant Checks Maintenance-Free Battery

CAUTION!
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection Your vehicle is equipped with a
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing  It is essential when replacing the cables on
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
weather, where applicable). If the engine the battery that the positive cable is
to add water, nor is periodic maintenance
coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in attached to the positive post and the nega-
required.
appearance, the system should be drained, tive cable is attached to the negative post.
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant WARNING! Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
(antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C negative (-) and are identified on the battery
 Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
condenser for any accumulation of bugs, can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying terminal posts and free of corrosion.
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
water from a garden hose vertically down the clothing. Do not lean over a battery when  If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
face of the condenser. attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
or on skin, flush the area immediately with battery cables before connecting the
Adding Washer Fluid
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located charger” to provide starting voltage.
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer-
in the engine compartment, and the fluid level gency” for further information.
should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the Pressure Washing
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not  Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
engine coolant/ antifreeze). Refer to “Engine Keep flame or sparks away from the CAUTION!
Compartment” in this section for further battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
information. pressure washer is not recommended. Pre-
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other. cautions have been taken to safeguard all
WARNING!
parts and connections however, the pres-
Commercially available windshield washer  Battery posts, terminals, and related acces- sures generated by these machines is such
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and sories contain lead and lead compounds. that complete protection against water
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling Wash hands after handling. ingress cannot be guaranteed.
or working around the washer solution.
DEALER SERVICE Engine Oil Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 1.3L Turbo
Engine
An authorized dealer has the qualified service Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-30 SN PLUS synthetic engine oil
personnel, special tools, and equipment to Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section
approved to FCA Material Standard MS-13340
perform all service operations in an expert for the proper maintenance intervals.
such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or equivalent is
manner. Service Manuals are available which
NOTE: recommended for all operating temperatures.
include detailed service information for your
Under no circumstances should oil change This engine oil improves low temperature
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), starting and vehicle fuel economy.
attempting any procedure yourself.
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time, The engine oil filler cap also shows the
NOTE: whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine recommended engine oil viscosity for your
Intentional tampering with emissions control run or idle time is generally only a concern for engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
systems may void your warranty and could fleet customers. location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this
result in civil penalties being assessed against section.
you. Engine Oil Selection — 1.3L Turbo Engine
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
For best performance and maximum protection
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
WARNING! for turbocharged engines under all types of
viscosity grade number should not be used.
operating conditions, the manufacturer 7
You can be badly injured working on or recommends synthetic engine oils that are API Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.4L
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Engine
for which you have the knowledge and the Material Standard MS-13340.
proper equipment. If you have any doubt Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
about your ability to perform a service job, Engine Oil Selection — 2.4L Engine Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all
For best performance and maximum protection
operating temperatures. This engine oil
under all types of operating conditions, the
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
manufacturer only recommends 0W-20 engine
fuel economy.
oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS-6395.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the Engine Oil Filter Air Conditioner Maintenance
recommended engine oil viscosity for your
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a For best possible performance, your air
engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
new filter at every engine oil change. conditioner should be checked and serviced by
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in this
Engine Oil Filter Selection an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
section.
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow season. This service should include cleaning of
Lubricants which do not have both the engine the condenser fins and a performance test.
oil certification mark and the correct SAE type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement Drive belt tension should also be checked at
viscosity grade number should not be used. this time.
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
Materials Added To Engine Oil filters should be used to ensure most efficient NOTE:
The manufacturer strongly recommends service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
against the addition of any additives (other than
cants approved by the manufacturer for your
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil Engine Air Cleaner Filter air conditioning system. Some unapproved
is an engineered product and its performance
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
for the proper maintenance intervals. injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters or lubricants can cause the system to fail,
Care should be taken in disposing of used
WARNING! requiring costly repairs. Refer to the Warranty
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, Information Book for further warranty infor-
mation.
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
present a problem to the environment. Contact the case of engine backfire. Do not remove  Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
an authorized dealer, service station or the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, cants approved by the manufacturer for your
governmental agency for advice on how and etc.) unless such removal is necessary for air conditioning system. Some unapproved
where used oil and oil filters can be safely repair or maintenance. Make sure that no refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
discarded in your area. one is near the engine compartment before injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants
starting the vehicle with the air induction sys- or lubricants can cause the system to fail,
tem (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure requiring costly repairs.
to do so can result in serious personal injury.
 The air conditioning system contains refrig- A/C Air Filter Windshield Wiper Blades
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of See an authorized dealer for service. Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
personal injury or damage to the system,
Body Lubrication the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
lines to be disconnected should be done by Locks and all body pivot points, including such remove accumulations of salt or road film.
an experienced technician. items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
CAUTION! periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
Do not use chemical flushes in your air condi- periodically with a lithium based grease, such
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
tioning system as the chemicals can damage as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
windshield.
your air conditioning components. Such dam- easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
Warranty. the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess out of contact with petroleum products such as
oil and grease should be removed. Particular engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf attention should also be given to hood latching NOTE:
components to ensure proper function. When Life expectancy of wiper blades varies 7
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
performing other underhood services, the hood depending on geographical area and frequency
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
latch, release mechanism and safety catch of use. Poor performance of blades may be
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
should be cleaned and lubricated. present with chattering, marks, water lines or
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer The external lock cylinders should be lubricated wet spots. If any of these conditions are
recommends that air conditioning service be twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
performed by an authorized dealer using Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, necessary.
recovery and recycling equipment. such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Service Position Strategy Function Deactivation:

The service position allows the wiper blades to The functionality is reset if:
be placed in a position that allows the wiper  The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN posi-
blades to be easily changed. tion.
To enable the Service Position Strategy, the
 Number of subsequent activations is three.
wipers must be in the Park position before
placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF position.  Two minutes timer has expired after turning
Service mode must be activated within two the ignition OFF.
minutes after the ignition is placed in the STOP/ NOTE: 1 — Wiper Blade
OFF position. When turning the ignition ON, the blades will go 2 — Release Button
To have a correct activation of strategy, the into the parking position. 3 — Wiper Arm
Service Position command (antipanic) must be
active for at least half a second. Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the
At every valid activation of Service Position 1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
command, the wiper blades are activated for wiper blade off of the windshield.
250 ms.
2. Push the release button on the arm of the
The Service Position command can be repeated
wiper blade.
several times to bring the blades into the
desired position, up to a maximum of three 3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.
times.
After three subsequent activations the strategy
is disabled.
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation connections could permit exhaust fumes to

seep into the passenger compartment. In
CAUTION!
1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to addition, have the exhaust system inspected  The catalytic converter requires the use of
raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
glass. oil change. Replace as required. destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the an emissions control device and may seri-
wiper blade end while pushing the wiper
WARNING! ously reduce engine performance and
blade towards the liftgate glass to unsnap  Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They cause serious damage to the engine.
the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is  Damage to the catalytic converter can
holder on the wiper arm. colorless and odorless. Breathing it can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
make you unconscious and can eventually operating condition. In the event of engine
3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to malfunction, particularly involving engine
wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper “Safety Tips” in “Safety” for further informa- misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
arm, and firmly push the wiper blade until it tion. mance, have your vehicle serviced
snaps into place. promptly. Continued operation of your
 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such vehicle with a severe malfunction could
Exhaust System
materials might be grass or leaves coming cause the converter to overheat, resulting 7
The best protection against carbon monoxide in possible damage to the converter and
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
entry into the vehicle body is a properly not park or operate your vehicle in areas vehicle.
maintained engine exhaust system. where your exhaust system can contact
If you notice a change in the sound of the Under normal operating conditions, the
anything that can burn.
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be catalytic converter will not require
detected inside the vehicle; or when the maintenance. However, it is important to keep
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; the engine properly tuned to ensure proper
have an authorized technician inspect the catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
complete exhaust system and adjacent body damage.
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
NOTE: Cooling System Coolant Checks

Intentional tampering with emissions control Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
systems can result in civil penalties being WARNING! every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
assessed against you. weather, where applicable). If the engine
 You or others can be badly burned by hot
In unusual situations involving grossly engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching your radiator. If you see or hear steam appearance, the system should be drained,
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst coming from under the hood, do not open flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn the hood until the radiator has had time to (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, cool. Never open a cooling system pressure condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
specifications, should be obtained immediately. hot. water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter  Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
damage: away from the radiator cooling fan when Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
 Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the NOTE:
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
engine is running or not. Some vehicles require special tools to add
motion.
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
 When working near the radiator cooling fan,
 Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or properly could lead to severe internal engine
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
towing the vehicle. damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
the system please contact an authorized
 Do not idle the engine with any ignition temperature controlled and can start at any
dealer.
components disconnected or removed, such time the ignition is in the ON mode.
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
periods during very rough idle or malfunc- contains visible sediment, have an authorized
tioning operating conditions. dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(antifreeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant  This vehicle has not been designed for use Please review these recommendations for
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical with propylene glycol-based engine coolant using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
Specifications” for further information. (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) that meets the
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom- requirements of FCA Material Standard
NOTE: mended. MS.90032. When adding engine coolant
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other (antifreeze):
  Some vehicles require special tools to add
than specified Organic Additive Technology coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems  We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result properly could lead to severe internal engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT
in engine damage and may decrease corro- damage. If any coolant is needed to be added (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the
sion protection. Organic Additive Technology to the system please contact an authorized requirements of FCA Material Standard
(OAT) engine coolant is different and should dealer. MS.90032.
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti- Adding Coolant
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
system in an emergency, the cooling system intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an 7
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles authorized dealer for assistance.
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon reducing this extended maintenance period, it  Use only high purity water such as distilled or
as possible. is important that you use the same engine deionized water when mixing the water/
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
 Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
throughout the life of your vehicle. of lower quality water will reduce the amount
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
system.
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
NOTE: The cap should be inspected and cleaned if or pet, seek emergency assistance
there is any accumulation of foreign material on immediately. Clean up any ground spills
 It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
the sealing surfaces. immediately.
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in WARNING! Coolant Level
the area where the vehicle is operated. The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
 Do not open hot engine cooling system.
 Some vehicles require special tools to add Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when visual method for determining that the coolant
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or level is adequate. With the engine off and cold,
properly could lead to severe internal engine remove the cap to cool an overheated the level of the coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines
to the system, please contact an local autho- the cooling system. To prevent scalding or marked on the bottle.
rized dealer. injury, do not remove the pressure cap As long as the engine operating temperature is
while the system is hot or under pressure. satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
 Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is
checked once a month.
not recommended and can result in cooling  Do not use a pressure cap other than the
system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are one specified for your vehicle. Personal When additional coolant (antifreeze) is needed
mixed in an emergency, have a authorized injury or engine damage may result. to maintain the proper level, it should be added
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as Disposal Of Used Coolant See an authorized dealer for service.
possible.
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) Points To Remember
Cooling System Pressure Cap is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to NOTE:
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
determine the disposal rules for your When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based coming from the front of the engine compart-
the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
recovery tank if so equipped.
in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-  Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Brake Master Cylinder
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti- Winter operation. If replacement is ever The fluid level in the master cylinder should be
freeze) to enter the radiator. necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther- checked when performing under hood services,
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis- or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is
If an examination of your engine compartment factory engine coolant (antifreeze)
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, on.
performance, poor gas mileage, and
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder
increased emissions.
soon dissipate. area before removing the cap. If necessary, add
 Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. Brake System fluid to bring the fluid level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid
In order to ensure brake system performance,
 Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as
all brake system components should be
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine the brake pads wear. The brake fluid level
inspected periodically. Refer to the
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the should be checked when the pads are replaced.
“Maintenance Plan” in this section for the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle However, low fluid level may be caused by a
must also be protected against freezing. proper maintenance intervals.
leak and a checkup may be needed.
 If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi- WARNING! NOTE:
tions are required, the cooling system should Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans- 7
be pressure tested for leaks. and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot mission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid
 Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen- resting or riding on the brake pedal can result to both the brake system and the clutch release
tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant in abnormally high brake temperatures, system. The two systems are separated in the
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled excessive lining wear, and possible brake reservoir, and a leak in one system will not
water for proper corrosion protection of your damage. Riding the brakes may also reduce affect the other system. The manual transmis-
engine which contains aluminum compo- braking capacity in an emergency. sion clutch release system should not require
nents. fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle.
If the brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake
 Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your system does not indicate any leaks or other
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
problems, it may be a result of a leak in the Manual Transmission — If Equipped

hydraulic clutch release system. See an autho- WARNING! (Continued)
rized dealer for service.  To avoid contamination from foreign matter Lubricant Selection
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or Use only the manufacturers recommended
Use only manufacturer's recommended brake transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids And
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in the Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
“Technical Specifications” section for further voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in further information.
information. a open container absorbs moisture from Please see an authorized dealer for service.
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
WARNING! Fluid Level Check
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
 Use only manufacturer’s recommended hard or prolonged braking, resulting in Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug.
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri- sudden brake failure. This could result in a The fluid level should be between the bottom of
cants” in the “Technical Specifications” collision. the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 inch
section for further information. Using the (4.7 mm) below the bottom of the hole.
 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
wrong type of brake fluid can severely Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
damage your brake system and/or impair level.
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
its performance. The proper type of brake
Brake fluid can also damage painted and Please see an authorized dealer for service.
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
original factory installed hydraulic master Frequency Of Fluid Change
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
cylinder reservoir.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
(Continued) installed at the factory will give satisfactory
CAUTION! lubrication for the life of the vehicle. Fluid
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall changes are not necessary unless lubricant has
clutch system performance. Improper brake become contaminated with water.
fluids may damage the clutch system result- NOTE:
ing in loss of clutch function and the ability to If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
shift the transmission. changed immediately.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped Special Additives malfunction, visit an authorized dealer

The manufacturer strongly recommends immediately to have the transmission fluid level
Selection Of Lubricant checked. Operating the vehicle with an
against using any special additives in the
It is important to use the proper transmission transmission. improper fluid level can cause severe
fluid to ensure optimum transmission transmission damage.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an
performance and life. Use only the
engineered product and its performance may CAUTION!
manufacturer's specified transmission fluid.
be impaired by supplemental additives.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
Specifications” for fluid specifications. It is authorized dealer immediately. Severe trans-
transmission. The only exception to this policy is
important to maintain the transmission fluid at mission damage may occur. An authorized
the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
the correct level using the recommended fluid. dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they
NOTE: may adversely affect seals. level accurately.
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant CAUTION! Fluid And Filter Changes
should be used. Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis- Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
sion as the chemicals can damage your trans- installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
CAUTION! mission components. Such damage is not lubrication for the life of the vehicle. 7
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Routine fluid and filter changes are not
Using a transmission fluid other than the
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
Fluid Level Check the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
cause deterioration in transmission shift
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
quality and/or torque converter shudder.
not require adjustment under normal operating any reason.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications. conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
RAISING THE VEHICLE Tire Markings the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service  European — Metric tire sizing is based on
station. European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
TIRES into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
Tire Safety Information size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
 LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
on US design standards. The size designation
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. Tire Markings
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code molded into the sidewall preceding the size
(TIN) designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
2 — Size Designation
 Temporary spare tires are designed for
3 — Service Description temporary emergency use only. Temporary
4 — Maximum Load high pressure compact spare tires have the
5 — Maximum Pressure letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera- T145/80D18 103M.
ture Grades
 High flotation tire sizing is based on US
NOTE: design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on 31x10.5 R15 LT.
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
7
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
EXAMPLE:
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or

 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN,
including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the
vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
EXAMPLE:
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind
B-Pillar
the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehi- 7
cle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is
measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire
Maximum Inflation Pressure inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded
into the sidewall.
Term Definition
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s load-
Tire Placard ing capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold
tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle. Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
Tire And Loading Information Placard rear, and spare tires.
Loading Steps For Determining Correct Load exceed the available cargo and luggage
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not Limit— load capacity calculated in Step 4.
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on (1) Locate the statement “The combined (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
weight of occupants and cargo should load from your trailer will be transferred
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading vehicle's placard. determine how this reduces the
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the (2) Determine the combined weight of available cargo and luggage load
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual. the driver and passengers that will be capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: riding in your vehicle. Metric Example For Load Limit
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, (3) Subtract the combined weight of the For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front driver and passengers from XXX kg or and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
and rear axles must not be exceeded. vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
XXX lbs. luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle (4) The resulting figure equals the (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle available amount of cargo and luggage
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” NOTE: 7
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
section of this manual.
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
To determine the maximum loading conditions be five 150 lb passengers in your from your trailer will be transferred to your
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The vehicle. The following table shows examples
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
combined weight of occupants and cargo on how to calculate total load, cargo/
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. luggage, and towing capacities of your
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) vehicle with varying seating configurations
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage (5) Determine the combined weight of and number and size of occupants. This table
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should luggage and cargo being loaded on the is for illustration purposes only and may not
never exceed the weight referenced here. vehicle. That weight may not safely
be accurate for the seating and load carry

capacity of your vehicle.
 For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the

WARNING! stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Over- WARNING! of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle  Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and the steering.
handling, and increase your stopping dis- can cause collisions. NOTE:
tance. Use tires of the recommended load
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload  Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
can result in overheating and tire failure.
them. cause erratic and unpredictable steering
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to response.
Tires — General Information cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result  Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
Tire Pressure in tire failure. cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the  Overinflated or underinflated tires can Fuel Economy
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. affect vehicle handling and can fail Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
pressure: control.
Tread Wear
 Safety  Unequal tire pressures can cause steering Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
7
 Fuel Economy problems. You could lose control of your abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
vehicle. resulting in the need for earlier tire
 Tread Wear replacement.
 Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
 Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
to drift to the right or left. Proper tire inflation contributes to a
 Always drive with each tire inflated to the comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a
recommended cold tire inflation pressure. jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures maximum inflation pressure molded into the reduced vehicle loading may be required for
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed tire sidewall. high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to an
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the Check tire pressures more often if subject to a authorized tire dealer or original equipment
driver's side door. wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating
pressures vary with temperature changes. speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
At least once a month:
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi pressures.
 Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature WARNING!
make a visual judgement when determining change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
proper inflation. Tires may look properly pressure inside a garage, especially in the High speed driving with your vehicle under
inflated even when they are under-inflated. Winter. maximum load is dangerous. The added
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible You could have a serious collision. Do not
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
damage. drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capac-
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi ity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
CAUTION! (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside (120 km/h).
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres- temperature condition.
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi Radial Ply Tires
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
the valve stem, which could damage the valve WARNING!
this normal pressure build up or your tire
stem. pressure will be too low. Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation handle poorly. The instability could cause a
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire The manufacturer advocates driving at safe collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure speeds and within posted speed limits. Where four. Never combine them with other types of
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least speed limits or conditions are such that the tires.
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) vehicle can be driven at high speeds,
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the very important. Increased tire pressure and
Tire Repair Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Tire Spinning

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
repaired if it meets the following criteria: 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
 The tire has not been driven on when flat. rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
 The damage is only on the tread section of A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Emergency” for further information.
 The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
inch (6 mm). limited driving capabilities and needs to be WARNING!
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
and additional information. generated by excessive wheel speeds may
driving with underinflated tire condition, please cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
have experienced a loss of pressure should be be reused when driven under run flat mode vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire 14 psi (96 kPa) condition. for more than 30 seconds continuously when
of identical size and service description (Load
NOTE: you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 7
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
be reused. vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tread Wear Indicators Life Of Tire NOTE:

Tread wear indicators are in the original The service life of a tire is dependent upon Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
equipment tires to help you in determining varying factors including, but not limited to: when installing new tires due to wear and tear
when your tires should be replaced. in existing tires.
 Driving style.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
 Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
to develop across the tire tread. These tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, Replacement Tires
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
ment.
of many characteristics. They should be
 Distance driven. inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
strongly recommends that you use tires
Tire Tread V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
1 — Worn Tire performance when replacement is needed.
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
2 — New Tire Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear
highly recommended.
Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
These indicators are molded into the bottom of Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands WARNING! Certification Label for the size designation of
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an Tires and the spare tire should be replaced your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the after six years, regardless of the remaining your tire will be found on the original equipment
tread wear indicators, the tire should be tread. Failure to follow this warning can result tire sidewall.
replaced. in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for and have a collision resulting in serious injury
further information. or death.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the

“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
WARNING! CAUTION!
for more information relating to the Load Index  Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or Replacing original tires with tires of a differ-
and Speed Symbol of a tire. speed rating other than that specified for ent size may result in false speedometer and
It is recommended to replace the two front tires your vehicle. Some combinations of unap- odometer readings.
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire proved tires and wheels may change
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If suspension dimensions and performance Tire Types
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your All Season Tires — If Equipped
wheel’s specifications match those of the
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
original wheels.
handling and stress to steering and (Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
It is recommended you contact an authorized levels may vary between different all season
suspension components. You could lose
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any control and have a collision resulting in tires. All season tires can be identified by the
questions you may have on tire specifications or serious injury or death. Use only the tire and M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
capability. Failure to use equivalent wheel sizes with load ratings approved for sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
replacement tires may adversely affect the your vehicle. failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. and handling of your vehicle.
 Never use a tire with a smaller load index or 7
capacity, other than what was originally Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
a smaller load index could result in tire
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
overloading and failure. You could lose
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
control and have a collision.
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
 Failure to equip your vehicle with tires tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
having adequate speed capability can conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
result in sudden tire failure and loss of when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
vehicle control. (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to “Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets original equipment or an authorized tire dealer towing with a spare tire designated for
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the for recommended safe operating speeds, temporary emergency use.
safety and handling of your vehicle. loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
While studded tires improve performance on
WARNING! And Wheel — If Equipped
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice condi- surfaces may be poorer than that of Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
tions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting non-studded tires. Some states prohibit and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for studded tires; therefore, local laws should be original equipment tire and wheel found on the
conditions also creates the possibility of loss checked before using these tire types. front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
of vehicle control. may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
Spare Tires — If Equipped If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
NOTE: authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
Snow Tires rotation pattern.
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
Some areas of the country require the use of
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol The compact spare is for temporary emergency
on the tire sidewall. use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
If you need snow tires, select tires equipped with a compact spare by looking at
CAUTION! the spare tire description on the Tire and
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow Because of the reduced ground clearance, do Loading Information Placard located on the
tires only in sets of four; failure to do not take your vehicle through an automatic driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
so may adversely affect the safety and handling car wash with a compact or limited use tem- the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
of your vehicle. porary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings may result. designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
than what was originally equipped with your T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
vehicle and should not be operated at
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original Full Size Spare — If Equipped
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
WARNING!
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first use only. This tire may look like the originally Limited use spares are for emergency use
opportunity. equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the drive more than the speed listed on the lim-
since the wheel is designed specifically for the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full ited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
one compact spare tire and wheel on the not the same as your original equipment tire, and Loading Information Placard located on
vehicle at any given time. replace (or repair) the original equipment tire the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
WARNING! opportunity. original equipment tire at the first opportunity
Compact and collapsible spares are for tem- and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped so could result in loss of vehicle control.
porary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph The limited use spare tire is for temporary
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim- emergency use only. This tire is identified by a Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the label located on the limited use spare wheel. 7
This label contains the driving limitations for All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
tread wear indicators, the temporary use and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
follow the warnings, which apply to your to maintain their luster and to prevent
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
tire failure and loss of vehicle control. solution recommended for the body of the
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire vehicle and remember to always wash when the
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first surfaces are not hot to the touch.
opportunity.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium recommended or select a non-abrasive, Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on wheels. CAUTION!
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild If your vehicle is equipped with these spe-
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh CAUTION! cialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These permanently damage this finish and such
from corroding and tarnishing. products may damage the wheel's protective damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
finish. Such damage is not covered by the Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING
CAUTION! New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Avoid products or automatic car washes that soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline addi- recommended. required to maintain this finish.
tives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes NOTE: Tire Chains And Traction Devices
may damage the wheel's protective finish. If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
Use of traction devices require sufficient
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehi- an extended period after cleaning the wheels
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these
cle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
recommendations to guard against damage.
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom- the brakes to remove the water droplets from
 Traction device must be of proper size for the
mended. the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including vehicle vibration when braking.
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the  Install on front tires only.
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
 Due to limited clearance, the following trac-

tion devices are recommended: CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,  Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
All Models:
observe the following precautions: instructions on the method of installation,
 The use of 7mm tire chains is permitted with operating speed, and conditions for use.
the use of 215/65R16 tires only. Chain front  Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension Always use the suggested operating speed
tires ONLY. All other size tires are NOT chain- of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
able. components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used. than 30 mph (48 km/h).
 No other tire sizes can be chained. Broken devices can cause serious damage.  Do not use traction devices on a compact
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise spare tire.
CAUTION! occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device Tire Rotation Recommendations
 Use on front tires ONLY.
before further use. The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
 Damage may result if tire chains or traction operate at different loads and perform different
 Install device as tightly as possible and
devices are used with original equipment steering, handling, and braking functions. For
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
size tires. these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation 7
WARNING!  Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
 Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
Snow) between front and rear axles can large bumps, especially with a loaded
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
vehicle. and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
control and have a collision.
 Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry smooth, quiet ride.
pavement. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
(Continued) for the proper maintenance intervals. The
reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation

method is the “forward cross” shown in the
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
following diagram. This rotation pattern does UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
not apply to some directional tires that must not The following tire grading categories
be reversed.
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross) shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
CAUTION!
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles to Federal safety requirements in
depends on tires of equal size, type and cir- addition to these grades.
cumference on each wheel. Any difference in
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross) Treadwear
tire size can cause damage to the power
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should be
rotation method is the “rearward cross” shown
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
followed to balance tire wear.
in the following diagram. rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to Temperature Grades

WARNING!
variations in driving habits, service The Temperature grades are A (the
practices, and differences in road The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
characteristics and climate. resistance to the generation of heat and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-infla-
Traction Grades its ability to dissipate heat, when tested tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
The Traction grades, from highest to under controlled conditions on a in combination, can cause heat buildup and
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. possible tire failure.
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet Sustained high temperature can cause
pavement, as measured under the material of the tire to degenerate STORING THE VEHICLE
controlled conditions on specified and reduce tire life, and excessive If the vehicle should remain stationary for more
government test surfaces of asphalt and temperature can lead to sudden tire than a month, observe the following
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor failure. The grade C corresponds to a precautions:
level of performance, which all  Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and
traction performance.
passenger vehicle tires must meet possibly airy location the windows open
WARNING! under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety slightly. 7
The traction grade assigned to this tire is Standard No. 109. Grades B and A  Check that the Electric Park Brake is not
based on straight-ahead braking traction represent higher levels of performance engaged.
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor- on the laboratory test wheel, than the  Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from the
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
minimum required by law. battery post and be sure that the battery is
teristics.
fully charged. During storage check battery
charge quarterly.
 If you do not disconnect the battery from the
electrical system, check the battery charge
every thirty days.
 Clean and protect the painted parts by NOTE: vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
applying protective waxes. When the vehicle has not been started or driven and other extreme conditions will have an
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Start adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
 Clean and protect polished metal parts by
Procedure is required to start the vehicle. Refer underbody protection.
applying protective waxes.
to “Starting The Engine” in “Starting And Oper- The following maintenance recommendations
 Apply talcum powder to the front and rear ating” for further information. will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
wiper blades and leave raised from the glass. the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
 Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover
CAUTION!
What Causes Corrosion?
taking care not to damage the painted Before removal of the positive and negative
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
surface by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do terminals to the battery, wait at least a min-
removal of paint and protective coatings from
not use plastic sheeting which will not allow ute with ignition switch in the OFF position
your vehicle.
the evaporation of moisture present on the and close the drivers door. When reconnect-
surface of the vehicle. ing the positive and negative terminals to the The most common causes are:
battery be sure the ignition switch is in the  Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
 Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi
OFF position and the drivers door is closed. Stone and gravel impact.
(+50 kPa) higher than recommended on the 
tire placard and check it periodically.
BODYWORK  Insects, tree sap and tar.
 Do not drain the engine cooling system.
Protection From Atmospheric Agents  Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
 Whenever you leave the vehicle is stationary
Vehicle body care requirements vary according  Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
for two weeks or more, idle the engine for
approximately five minutes with the air condi- to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
tioning system on and high fan speed. This that make roads passable in snow and ice and
will ensure a proper lubrication of the system, those that are sprayed on trees and road
thus minimizing the possibility of damage to surfaces during other seasons are highly
the compressor when the vehicle is put back corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
into operation. parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
Body And Underbody Maintenance  Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as  If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film, the paint, touch them up immediately. The
Cleaning Headlights stains and to protect your paint finish. Take cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights care never to scratch the paint. sibility of the owner.
and fog lights that are lighter and less
 Avoid using abrasive compounds and power  If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin or similar cause that destroys the paint and
headlights.
out the paint finish. protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
CAUTION! is considered the responsibility of the owner.
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the  Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning  If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping materials such as steel wool or scouring fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with powder that will scratch metal and painted materials are well packaged and sealed.
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. surfaces.
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,  Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
consider mud or stone shields behind each
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
wheel.
material to clean the lenses. removal of paint and decals.
7
Preserving The Bodywork  Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
Special Care soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
Washing  If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you touch up paint to match the color of your
 Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar- vehicle.
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car riage at least once a month.
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
 It is important that the drain holes in the
panels completely with clear water.
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
 If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have trunk be kept clear and open.
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
INTERIORS WARNING!
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
Seats And Fabric Parts A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a colli- vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
upholstery and carpeting. the belt system periodically, checking for avoid scratching the plastic.
cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
WARNING! must be replaced immediately. Do not disas- 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
semble or modify the system. Seat belt solution may be used, but do not use high
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning pur- alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
poses. Many are potentially flammable, and if soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retrac-
used in closed areas they may cause respira- cloth.
tor, torn webbing, etc.).
tory harm.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Plastic And Coated Parts
Seat Belt Maintenance Leather Parts
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
CAUTION! for leather upholstery.
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.  Direct contact of air fresheners, insect Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani- by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
surfaces of the interior may cause perma- and damage the leather upholstery and should
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
nent damage. Wipe away immediately. be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
soft cloth.
 Damage caused by these type of products Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
or if the buckles do not work properly. may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or Glass Surfaces

ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
is not required to maintain the original
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
condition.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
NOTE: when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to with electric defrosters or windows equipped
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather other sharp instruments that may scratch the
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom- elements.
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed. cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean 7
leather upholstery, as damage to the uphol-
stery may result.
324
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION BRAKE SYSTEM WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Vehicle Identification Number Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is systems loses normal capability, the remaining the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
stamped on a plate located on the left front system will still function. However, there will be and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
corner of the instrument panel cover, which is some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You bolts should be torqued using a properly
visible from outside the car through the may notice increased pedal travel during calibrated torque wrench using a high quality six
windshield. application, greater pedal force required to slow sided (hex) deep wall socket.
or stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Torque Specifications
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason Wheel Bolt **Wheel Bolt Wheel Bolt
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the Torque Size Socket Size
engine OFF) the brakes will still function. 89 Ft-Lbs
However, the effort required to brake the M12 x 1.25 17 mm
(120 N·m)
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating. **Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 325
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt While operating on gasoline with the required
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
loose particles. properly seated against the wheel. from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
WARNING! knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until octane number can cause engine failure and
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol- may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
low this warning may result in serious injury. Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
FUEL REQUIREMENTS experience these symptoms, try another brand
1.3L Turbo Engine of gasoline before considering service for the
Wheel Mounting Surface vehicle.
This engine is designed to meet all
Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
emission regulations, and provide 2.4L Engine
each bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure that
satisfactory fuel economy and This engine is designed to meet all
the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt.
performance, when using high-quality emissions regulations and provide
unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane excellent fuel economy and
rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2 performance when using high quality 8
Method. unleaded “regular” gasoline having a octane
The use of a 91 or higher octane “premium” rating of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use
gasoline will allow these engines to operate to of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
optimal performance. This increase in will not provide any benefit over regular
performance is most noticeable in hot weather gasoline in these engines.
or other heavier load conditions, such as While operating on gasoline with an octane
towing. number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
Torque Patterns from the engine is not a cause for concern.
326 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
with oxygenates such as ethanol. with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void
(E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited CAUTION! may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Warranty.
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing metha- If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
nol, or gasoline containing more than 15% E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may these symptoms:
experience these symptoms, try another brand
result in starting and drivability problems,  Operate in a lean mode.
of gasoline before considering service for the
damage critical fuel system components,
vehicle.  OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
Reformulated Gasoline standard, and/or cause the Malfunction Indi-  Poor engine performance.
Many areas of the country require the use of cator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly communi-  Poor cold start and cold drivability.
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated cate if a fuel contains greater than 15% etha-  Increased risk for fuel system component
gasoline contains oxygenates and are nol (E-15). corrosion.
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
Problems that result from using gasoline CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
emissions and improve air quality.
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
The use of reformulated gasoline is Modifications that allow the engine to run on
gasoline containing methanol are not the
recommended. Properly blended reformulated compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
gasoline will provide improved performance propane (LP) may result in damage to the
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
and durability of engine and fuel system engine, emissions, and fuel system
Warranty.
components. components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle

performance. CAUTION! (Continued)
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic Designated TOP TIER Detergent  An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
additive that is blended into some gasoline to Gasoline contains a higher level of tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
detergents to further aide in converter to overheat. If you notice a
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
minimizing engine and fuel system pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
provides no performance advantage beyond
deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
gasoline of the same octane number without
Detergent Gasoline is recommended. Visit tioning and may require immediate service.
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Contact an authorized dealer for service
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
Detergent Gasoline Retailers. assistance.
performance in some vehicles. The
manufacturer recommends that gasoline Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning  The use of fuel additives, which are now
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT agents should be avoided. Many of these being sold as octane enhancers, is not
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the materials intended for gum and varnish recommended. Most of these products
gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your removal may contain active solvents or similar contain high concentrations of methanol.
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and and diaphragm materials. mance problems resulting from the use of
California reformulated gasoline. such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
Fuel System Cautions bility of the manufacturer and may void or
Materials Added To Fuel not be covered under the New Vehicle
CAUTION! Limited Warranty.
8
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehi-
NOTE:
detergents, corrosion, and stability additives cle’s performance:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
are recommended. Using gasolines that have  The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by control system can result in civil penalties being
these additives will help improve fuel economy, Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can assessed against you.
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
(Continued)
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to pre-
vent carbon monoxide poisoning:
 Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
 Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1.3L Turbo / 2.4L Engine 12.7 Gallons 48 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
1.3L Turbo Engine (SAE 0W-30 SN PLUS Synthetic, API Certified) 4.8 Quarts 4.5 Liters
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System *
1.3L Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
8.8 Quarts 8.3 Liters
(240,000 km) Formula)
2.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile
6.8 Quarts 6.5 Quarts
(240,000 km) Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
8
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Engine Coolant (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meet-
ing the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-30 SN PLUS API Certified Synthetic
Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
Engine Oil – 1.3L Turbo Engine
MS-13340 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine
oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Penn-
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
zoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 1.3L Turbo Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0–15% Ethanol
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engines 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, Up To 85% Ethanol.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch Trans-
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
mission Fluid.
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or per-
formance of your transmission.
We recommend you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake fluid is not avail-
Brake Master Cylinder able, then DOT 3 is acceptable.
DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every 2 years regardless of mileage.
8
332
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY WARNING!
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and  FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
 It is not possible to know or to predict all of
may be equipped with both wired and wireless directly regarding software updates.
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to systems are breached. It may be possible  To help further improve vehicle security and
send and receive information. This information that vehicle systems, including safety minimize the potential risk of a security
allows systems and features in your vehicle to related systems, could be impaired or a breach, vehicle owners should:
function properly. loss of vehicle control could occur that may
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain result in an accident involving serious injury  Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
security features to reduce the risk of or death. (US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle (Canadian Residents) to learn about
 ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or available Uconnect software updates.
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
software technology continues to evolve over trusted source. Media of unknown origin  Only connect and use trusted media
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, could possibly contain malicious software, devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as and if installed in your vehicle, it may USBs, CDs).
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, increase the possibility for vehicle systems
your vehicle may require software updates to Privacy of any wireless and wired
to be breached.
improve the usability and performance of your communications cannot be assured. Third
 As always, if you experience unusual parties may unlawfully intercept information
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to the and private communications without your
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately. consent. For further information, refer to the
vehicle systems.
“Connected Services — If Equipped” section
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
within this chapter or “Onboard Diagnostic
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Know Your Instrument Panel”.
Uconnect software) is installed.
MULTIMEDIA 333
UCONNECT SETTINGS Customer Programmable Features — NOTE:

Only one touchscreen area may be selected at
Uconnect 3 Settings
The Uconnect system uses a combination of a time.
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the When making a selection, press the button on
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
access and change the Customer Once in the desired mode, press and release
Programmable Features. Many features can the preferred setting and make your selection.
vary by vehicle. Once the setting is complete, press the X/Done
Buttons on the faceplate are located below icon on the touchscreen to return to the
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
center of the instrument panel. In addition, buttons on the right side of the screen will allow
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on you to toggle up or down through the available
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Buttons On The
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll settings.
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
through menus and change settings. Push the 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen NOTE:
center of the control knob one or more times to 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate All settings should be changed with the ignition
select or change a setting. in the ON/RUN position.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Push the Settings button on the touchscreen to
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate. The following tables list the settings that may be
display the settings menu screen. In this mode
found within the Uconnect 3 radio, along with
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to the Uconnect system allows you to access all of
the selectable options pertaining to each
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button the available programmable features.
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
setting. 9
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
334 MULTIMEDIA
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options

Display Mode Auto Manual
Brightness + -
NOTE:
The “Brightness” setting can be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.
Language English Español Français
NOTE:
Selecting any option within the “Language” setting will change the language for all displayed nomenclature.
Touchscreen Beep Yes No
Voice Settings Voice Response Length Show Command List
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
 The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measurement.
 The “Custom” option allows setting the “Fuel Consumption” (L/100km or km/L), “Distance” (mi or km), “Temperature” (°C or °F), and “Pressure”
(kPa or bar) units of measurement independently.
MULTIMEDIA 335
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Clock & Date

After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Set Time and Format 12 hour 24 hour AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct time.
Set Time Hours + –
Set Time Minutes + –
Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow
NOTE:
Within the “Set Date” setting, press the corresponding Arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct date.
Show Time Status — If Equipped On Off 9
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
336 MULTIMEDIA
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active
On Off
Guidelines
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines” setting overlays the Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate the
width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)
Far Med Near
Sensitivity — If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+) Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be
at before the system will warn you of a possible collision based on the option selected. “Far” will give you the most amount of reaction time, whereas
“Near” will give you the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)
Off Sound Only Sound and Brake
— If Equipped
MULTIMEDIA 337

NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Plus (FCW+)” setting includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver
requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Sound Only” option is selected, a chime will sound alerting you
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Sound and Brake” option is selected, it will apply
the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sound an audible chime to alert you.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped Low Medium High
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Medium Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system will warn you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible
lane departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights and Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
not operating to specification.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If 9
On Off
Equipped
Electric Park Brake Service Mode Yes No
NOTE:
The “Electric Park Brake Service Mode” feature provides a means for a technician or vehicle owner to utilize a vehicle integrated, menu driven system,
to command the electric park brake retraction, to service the rear foundation brakes (brake pads, calipers, rotors, etc.).
338 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes — If Equipped
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Auto Park Brake On Off
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Level 1: minimum
Headlight Sensitivity — If Equipped Level 2: medium sensitivity Level 3: maximum sensitivity
sensitivity
NOTE:
The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the headlights
turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2).
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Greeting Lights — If Equipped On Off
Automatic High Beam Headlamps — If
On Off
Equipped
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only available if allowed by
law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
MULTIMEDIA 339

Cornering Lights — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Cornering Lights” feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated
in the fog light) will illuminate on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
Interior Ambient Lights + -
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.
Doors & Locks

After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the
driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off 9
Horn With Lock On Off
Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock Driver All
340 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:
When “Driver” is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button; you must push the key fob unlock button
twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is
programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s
door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped

After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel
Off Remote Start All Starts
With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on with vehicle start when temperatures are
below 40°F (4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C), the driver vented seat will turn on.
Engine Off Options

After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec

NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
MULTIMEDIA 341
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Radio Off Delay 0 min 20 min

NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the radio will stay on for a preset time after the ignition key is turned to OFF.
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up
or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Up Arrow But- Down Arrow But- Left Arrow But- Right Arrow But-
Balance/Fade Center C Button
ton ton ton ton
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from
the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the C button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting. 9
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Loudness On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
342 MULTIMEDIA

AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to “Phone Mode” within the “Uconnect
Modes” section.
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
MULTIMEDIA 343

NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all of the audio settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data

After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options 9

Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected, it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
344 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features — Push the Settings button on the touchscreen to NOTE:
Uconnect 4 Settings display the settings menu screen. In this mode, All settings should be changed with the ignition
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of in the ACC position.
the available programmable features.
The following tables list the settings that may be
NOTE: found within the Uconnect 4 system, along with
Only one setting can be selected on the touch- the selectable options pertaining to each
screen at a time. setting.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release
the preferred setting and make your selection.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Buttons On The Once the setting is complete, either press the
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate Back Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen or
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen the Back button on the faceplate to return to the
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
buttons on the right side of the screen will allow
you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
MULTIMEDIA 345
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Display

Display Brightness With Headlights
+ -
ON
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
the "party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness With Headlights
+ -
OFF
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in
9
the "party" or "parade" position.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Display Trip B On Off
346 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

NOTE:
When US is selected, Distance is set on miles, Fuel Consumption is set on MPG (US), Pressure is set on psi, and Temperature is set on °F. When
Metric is selected, Distance is set on km, Fuel Consumption is set on L/100 km, Pressure is set on bar, and Temperature is set on °C.
After pressing the Custom button with Units on the touchscreen, you may select from the following menu items:

Distance — If Equipped mi km
Fuel Consumption — If
MPG (US) MPG (UK)
Equipped
Pressure — If Equipped psi kPa bar
Temperature — If Equipped °C °F
Voice — If Equipped

Show Command List Always With Help Never
MULTIMEDIA 347
Clock & Date

After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

12 hour 24 hour
Set Time And Format
AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct time.
Show Time Status On Off
Set Date (MM/DD/YY) - +
NOTE:
This feature allows you to set the date, month, and year using the + and - buttons.
Sync Date — If Equipped On Off
Sync Time — If Equipped On Off
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off 9
NOTE:
348 MULTIMEDIA

ParkView Backup Camera Active
On Off
Guide Lines
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
Forward Collision Warning — If
Off Only Warning Warning + Active Braking
Equipped
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned Off, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Only Warning” option is selected, a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning + Active Braking” option is selected, it applies the brakes to
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sounds an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitiv-
Near Med Far
ity — If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the
system warns you of a possible collision based on the option selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” gives you
the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
ParkSense — If Equipped Off Sound Only Sound and Display
MULTIMEDIA 349

Front ParkSense Volume — If
Low Med High
Equipped
Rear ParkSense Volume — If
Low Med High
Equipped
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Med Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering wheel feedback, of a possible lane
departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights and Chime
NOTE:
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
not operating to specification.
Side Distance Warning Off Sound Only Sound and Display
Side Distance Warning Volume Low Med

High
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If
9
On Off
Equipped
350 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes — If Equipped
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:

Brake Service Yes No
Lights

Interior Ambient Lighting — If Equipped + -
Headlight Sensitivity — If Equipped Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
NOTE:
 When this feature is selected, it allows the Headlight Sensitivity to be adjusted according to three levels.
 The greater the sensitivity set, the less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a setting on level 3 at sunset, the head-
lights turn on earlier than in levels 1 and 2). To change the Headlight Sensitivity setting, press the 1, 2, or 3 button on the touchscreen to select
your desired Headlight Sensitivity level.
Headlight Off Delays — If Equipped 0 sec 30 sec 60 sec 90 sec
Automatic High Beam Headlamps — If Equipped On Off
MULTIMEDIA 351

NOTE:
Cornering Lights — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will
illuminate on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with
or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected.
Doors & Locks


Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). 9
Auto Unlock On Exit — If Equipped Off

On
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the
driver's door is opened.
352 MULTIMEDIA

Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Remote Door Unlock — If Equipped Driver All
NOTE:
 When “Driver” is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock
button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button.
 If “All” is programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the
driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once.
If the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Auto-On Comfort — If Equipped

After pressing the Auto-On Comfort button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start — If Equipped
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F
(4.4°C).
MULTIMEDIA 353
Engine Off Options


Headlight Off Delay — If Equipped + –
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Radio Off Delay — If Equipped + –
Audio

Equalizer + –
NOTE:
Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade When in this display you may adjust the Balance and Fade settings.
Loudness — If Equipped On Off 9
Auto-On Radio — If Equipped On Off Recall Last
NOTE:
The Radio automatically turns on when vehicle is in ON/RUN or will recall whether it was on or off at last ignition off.
Radio Off With Door On Off
354 MULTIMEDIA

AUX Volume Offset On Off
AutoPlay — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When activated, the “AutoPlay” setting automatically starts playing music off of a connected device as soon as it is connected.
Phone/Bluetooth®

Paired Phones and Devices List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to “Phone Mode” within the “Uconnect
Modes” section.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off


SXM Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you
can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background,
so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
MULTIMEDIA 355

Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE:
scanning. To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Restore Settings to Default Yes No
NOTE: 9
When this feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings. To restore the settings to their default setting, press the Restore Settings
button on the touchscreen. A pop-up will appear asking "Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
356 MULTIMEDIA
Clear Personal Data

After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

NOTE:
Customer Programmable Features — Press the Settings button to display the menu When making a selection, press the button on
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect the touchscreen to enter the desired mode.
Settings system allows you to access programmable Once in the desired mode, press and release
features that may be equipped such as the preferred setting and make your selection.
Language, Display, Units, Voice, Clock & Date, Once the setting is complete, either press the
Camera, Safety & Driving Assistance, Mirror & Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to return
Wipers, Brakes — If Equipped, Lights, Doors & to the previous menu, or press the X button on
Locks, Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped, the touchscreen to close out of the settings
Engine Off Options, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped, and Reset. on the right side of the screen will allow you to
toggle up or down through the available
NOTE:
settings.
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons On The
Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
MULTIMEDIA 357
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

NOTE:
When the “Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature,
including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired language
button on the touchscreen until a check mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Display

Display Brightness Headlights ON + -
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness Headlights ON" setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the
"party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness Headlights OFF + -
9
NOTE:
To make changes to the "Display Brightness Headlights OFF" setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the
"party" or "parade" position.
Set Theme List of Themes
358 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:
When the “Set Theme” feature is selected, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on
the touchscreen, then select the desired theme option button until a check mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
Metric
Units — If Equipped US
Touchscreen Beep On Off

Controls Screen Timeout — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Timeout” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the
feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Fuel Saver Display in Cluster — If Equipped On Off
Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed in Cluster — If
On Off
Equipped
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn Displayed In Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the instrument cluster display
as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster —
On Off
If Equipped
MULTIMEDIA 359
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measurement independently displayed in the instrument cluster display.
The following selectable units of measurement are listed below:

NOTE:
When US is selected, Distance is set on miles, Fuel Consumption is set on MPG (US), Pressure is set on psi, and Temperature is set on °F. When
Metric is selected, Distance is set on km, Fuel Consumption is set on L/100 km, Pressure is set on bar, and Temperature is set on °C.
After pressing the Custom button with “Units” on the touchscreen, you may select from the following menu items:

Speed — If Equipped MPH km/h
Distance mi km
Fuel Consumption MPG (US) MPG (UK)
Pressure psi kPa bar
Temperature °C °F
Voice
9

Show Command List Never w/Help Always
360 MULTIMEDIA
Clock & Date

After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
12 hrs 24 hrs
Time Format
AM FM
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
Set Date in Cluster (MM/DD/YY) + -
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
MULTIMEDIA 361

Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines On Off
NOTE:
The “Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle, and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
Safety & Driving Assistance

After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Forward Collision Warning — If
Off Only Warning Warning + Active Braking
Equipped
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned Off, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
Forward Collision Warning includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. When the “Only Warning” option is selected, a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning + Active Braking” option is selected, it applies the brakes to 9
slow your vehicle in case of potential forward collision and sounds an audible chime to alert you.
362 MULTIMEDIA

Forward Collision Warning Sensitiv-
Near Med Far
ity — If Equipped
NOTE:
The “Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity” setting determines at what relative distance the vehicle directly in front of you needs to be at before the
system warns you of a possible collision based on the option selected. “Far” gives you the most amount of reaction time, whereas “Near” gives you
the least amount of reaction time, based on the distance between the two vehicles.
LaneSense Warning — If Equipped Early Med Late
NOTE:
The “LaneSense Warning” setting determines at what distance the LaneSense system warns you, through steering wheel feedback of a possible lane
departure.
LaneSense Strength — If Equipped Low Med High
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound and Display
Front ParkSense Volume — If
Low Medium High
Equipped
Rear ParkSense Volume — If
Low Medium High
Equipped
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights + Chime
MULTIMEDIA 363

NOTE:
When the “Blind Spot Alert” feature is selected, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is activated and will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors,
or it will show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as play an audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the BSM system
is deactivated.
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to
specification.
Side Distance Warning — If
Off Sound Only Sound and Display
Equipped
Side Distance Warning Volume — If
Low Med High
Equipped
Mirror & Wipers

After pressing the Mirror & Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off
Brakes — If Equipped 9
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Brake Service Yes No
364 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:
Selecting the “Brake Service” feature will display a pop-up asking if you would like to retract the park brakes to allow brake system service.
Lights

Interior Ambient Lighting — If Equipped + -
Headlight Off Delay 0 30 60 90
Headlight Illumination on Approach 0 30 60 90
Headlights with Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Auto High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped On Off
Headlight Dip — If Equipped On Off
MULTIMEDIA 365
Doors & Locks


Auto Door Lock Yes No
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit Yes No
Flash Lights With Lock — If
Yes No
Equipped
Sound Horn With Lock — If
Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Equipped
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If
Yes No
Equipped
1st Press of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
Passive Entry — If Equipped Yes No
NOTE:
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to press the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
Auto-On Comfort Systems — If Equipped 9

After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Auto-on Dr Heat Seat & Steering
Wheel — If Equipped
366 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on with vehicle start when temperatures are
below 40°F (4.4°C).
Engine Off Options


Headlight Off Delay — If Equipped + –
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension — If Equipped On Off
Radio Off Delay 0 MIN 20 MIN
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped On Off
Audio

Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker Icon toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble
MULTIMEDIA 367

NOTE:
When in this display you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid” and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons on the touchscreen
or by selecting any point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the touchscreen. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up
or down to change the setting as well as press directly on the desired setting.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
AutoPlay On Off
NOTE:
The “AutoPlay” setting, when activated, automatically starts playing music off of a connected device as soon as it is connected.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped On Off
Phone/Bluetooth®
Setting Name Selectable Options 9

Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
On Off
— If Equipped
Do Not Disturb List of Settings
368 MULTIMEDIA

NOTE:
The “Do Not Disturb” feature allows the paired phone to send a predetermined Call, Text, or Both, to any incoming call or text before sending it directly
to voicemail. It also keeps a counter of all missed calls and texts while on the road.
Auto Reply Text Call Both
Auto Reply Message Default Custom
Customize Auto Reply Message Customize Message
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones And Audio Sources
NOTE:
The “Paired Phones And Audio Devices” feature shows which phones or media devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further infor-
mation, refer to “Phone Mode” within the “Uconnect Modes” section.
Smartphone Projection Manager List Of Connected Phones
NOTE:
Pressing “Smartphone Projection Manager” feature allows you to see a list of all connected phones and gives you the option to determine which phone
will be used for projection (Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto™).
Smartphone Device Mirroring — If
On Off
Equipped
Enable Android Auto™ — If
On Off
Equipped
Autoshow Display Upon Connec-
On Off
tion — If Equipped
MULTIMEDIA 369


Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you
can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background,
so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip Channel Skip
NOTE:
scanning. To make your selection, press the Channel Skip button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Information Subscription Info
NOTE:
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider 9
online. SiriusXM Travel Link® is a separate subscription.
370 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:

Reset App Drawer OK Cancel
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.
NOTE:
Modem Reset — If Equipped Yes Cancel
MULTIMEDIA 371
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
Identifying Your Radio
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display

1 — Radio Button 1 — Radio/Media Button
2 — Media Button 2 — Climate Button
3 — Climate Button 3 — Apps Button
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
4 — Apps Button 4 — Controls Button
1 — Radio Button
5 — Controls Button 5 — Navigation Button
2 — Compass Button
6 — Phone Button 6 — Phone Button
3 — Settings Button
7 — Settings Button 7 — Settings Button
4 — More Button
8 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob 8 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
5 — Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll Knob
9 — Screen Off Button 9 — Screen Off Button
6 — Screen Off Button
10 — Mute Button 10 — Mute Button
7 — Mute Button
11 — Volume and On/Off 11 — Volume and On/Off 9
8 — Volume and On/Off
9 — Phone Button
10 — Media Button
372 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
Feature Description
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Radio/Media Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources.
Refer to “Uconnect Modes” in this section for further information.
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
Phone phone system.
Refer to “Uconnect Modes” in this section for further information.
Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings.
Settings
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in this section for further information.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a highlighted selection on the
Enter/Browse & Tune/Scroll screen. Rotate the TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a list or
tune a radio station.
Screen Off Push the Screen Off button to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button to turn off the audio of the radio system. Press it
Mute
again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume On/Off but-
Volume and On/Off
ton to turn the system on and off.
Feature Description
Compass Press the Compass button to access the vehicle’s compass.
More Press the More button to access additional options.
MULTIMEDIA 373
Feature Description
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific feature like heated
Controls
seats and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate
control functions.
Climate
Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Feature Description
Press the Nav button to enter Navigation Mode and use the system’s
Nav (Navigation) built-in navigation software.
Refer to “Navigation” in this section for further information.
Your Uconnect System may be equipped with Drag & Drop Menu Bar
Connected Services. Refer to “Connected
The Uconnect features and services in the main
Services — If Equipped” for information on
menu bar are easily changed for your
activation, mobile app functionality, and
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
available features.
9
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop

374 MULTIMEDIA
Safety And General Information  Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.

Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
Safety Guidelines to the product. Return it to an authorized
dealer for repair.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the  Ensure the volume level of the system is set
steering wheel. You have full responsibility to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to  The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci- tronic device. Do not let young children use
dent involving serious injury or death. the system.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Drag & Drop
Please read this manual carefully before using  Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
1. Press the Apps button to open the App the system. It contains instructions on how to your music or sound system at loud volumes.
screen. Exercise caution when setting the volume on
use the system in a safe and effective manner.
the system.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
to replace an existing shortcut in the main Doing so can result in damage to the  Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
menu bar. touchscreen. ture away from the system. Besides damage
Please read and follow these safety to the system, moisture can cause electric
NOTE: precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury shocks as with any electronic device.
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in or property damage. NOTE:
PARK.
 Glance at the screen only when safe to do so. Many features of this system are speed depen-
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required, dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
park in a safe location and set the parking use some of the touchscreen features while the
brake. vehicle is in motion.
MULTIMEDIA 375
Care And Maintenance 1. This device may not cause harmful La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
 Do not press the touchscreen with any hard interference, and siguientes dos condiciones:
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry, 2. This device must accept any interference 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
etc.), which could scratch the surface. received, including interference that may cause interferencia perjudicial y
 Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly cause undesired operation.
on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the
dÌnnovation, Science and Economic pueda causar su operación no deseada.
touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened RF Exposure Requirements
 exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl aux deux conditions suivantes: To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water requirements, the device must be installed and
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de operated to provide a separation distance of at
solvent manufacturer's precautions and brouillage, et least 20 cm from all persons.
directions. 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout This equipment complies with Canada radiation
TBM2 General Information brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro- environment. This equipment should be
The following regulatory statement applies to installed and operated with minimum distance
mettre le fonctionnement.
TMB2 devices equipped in this vehicle: 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
FCC ID: RX2TCUFCA02SN
9
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
376 MULTIMEDIA
Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations UCONNECT MODES left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établies Steering Wheel Audio Controls The following describes the left-hand control
pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet The remote sound system controls are located operation in each mode.
équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un at the rear of the steering wheel. Reach behind
minimum de 20 cm de distance entre la source Radio Operation
the wheel to access the switches.
de rayonnement et votre corps Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for
the next listenable station and pushing the
NOTE: bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for the
Changes or modifications not expressly next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
the equipment.
you have programmed in the radio preset
button.
Media Mode
Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel) Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the
next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
with a push button in the center that controls
once will go to the beginning of the current
the volume and mode of the sound system.
track, or to the beginning of the previous track if
Pushing the top of the rocker switch increases
it is within eight seconds after the current track
the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
begins to play.
rocker switch decreases the volume.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays
Pushing the center button changes the source
the second track; three times, it will play the
(AM, FM, SXM, Bluetooth®, etc.)
third, etc.
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
MULTIMEDIA 377
Radio Mode
Radio Controls

1 — Preset Radio Stations
2 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display 3 — Status Bar
1 — Preset Radio Stations
1 — Preset Radio Stations 4 — Bottom Menu Bar
2 — View Next Preset Radio Station
2 — All Preset Radio Stations 5 — Audio Settings
3 — Status Bar
3 — Seek Up 6 — Seek Up
4 — Map Button
4 — Audio Settings 7 — Tune Button
5 — HD Radio (if equipped)
5 — Station Info 8 — Seek Down
6 — Bottom Menu Bar
6 — Tune 9 — Browse Button
7 — Audio Settings
7 — Radio Band (AM/FM) 10 — Radio Bands
8 — Seek Up
8 — Seek Down 9
9 — Tune Button
10 — Seek Down
11 — Browse Button
12 — Source Select/Radio Bands
378 MULTIMEDIA
The radio is equipped with the following modes: TUNE/SCROLL Control station after passing through the entire band
 AM Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob two times, the radio will stop at the station
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to where it began.
 FM
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped) ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection. Press, hold, and then release the Seek Up or
HD Radio™ — If Equipped Seek Down button to advance the radio
Press the Radio button or Media button on the
touchscreen to enter the Radio Mode. The HD Radio™ technology (available only in the US through the available stations or channels at a
different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can and Canadian markets) works similar to faster rate. The radio stops at the next available
then be selected by pressing the corresponding conventional radio except it allows station or channel when the button on the
buttons in Radio mode. broadcasters to transmit a high-quality digital touchscreen is released.
signal. With an HD Radio™ receiver, the listener
VOLUME and ON/OFF Control NOTE:
is provided with a clear sound that enhances
Push the VOLUME and ON/OFF control knob to Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
the listening experience. HD Radio™ can also
turn on and off the Uconnect system. Seek Down button will scan the different
transmit data such as song title or artist.
The electronic volume control turns frequency bands at a slower rate.
Seek
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction, Info — If Equipped
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
without stopping. Turning the VOLUME and ON/
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the Press the Info button to display information
OFF control knob clockwise increases the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio related to the currently playing song and radio
volume, and counterclockwise decreases it.
station display or by pressing the left Steering station.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound Wheel Audio Control button up or down. Direct Tune
will be set at the same volume level as last
played. Seek Up and Seek Down Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek Down the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
MUTE Button
button to tune the radio to the next available radio station or channel.
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the
station or channel. During a Seek Up/Down
system.
function, if the radio reaches the starting
MULTIMEDIA 379
Press the available number button on the Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
station. Once a number has been entered, any push the VR button on the steering wheel and
numbers that are no longer possible (stations say “Help”. The system provides you with a list
that cannot be reached) will become of commands.
deactivated/grayed out.
Setting Presets
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press GO. The Direct Tune screen will Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Radio Presets
close, and the system will automatically tune to
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
that station.
and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
Radio Voice Commands buttons, located at the top of the screen.
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Radio Presets When you are on a station that you wish to save
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would as a preset, press and hold the numbered
like to hear. (Subscription or included button on the touchscreen for more than two
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.) seconds.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel and The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the 9
wait for the beep to say a command. See some Radio modes.
examples below. A total of six presets will appear on the screen.
 “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM” You can switch between the radio presets list by
pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
 “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1” right of the radio touchscreen.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets

380 MULTIMEDIA
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display: Deleting Presets

A set of four presets will appear on the screen. A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
Press the All button to view all saved presets. To screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
remove a saved preset, a new preset must be corresponding Preset.
saved over the old one. Return To Main Radio Screen
Preset Features — If Equipped You can return to the Main Radio Screen by
pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button
Browse In AM/FM
when in the Browse Presets screen.
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To
entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE Equipped SiriusXM®
button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scroll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/
SCROLL knob or by pressing the Up and Down
arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Changing To
select the currently highlighted Preset. SiriusXM®
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Presets. Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
MULTIMEDIA 381
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct This functionality is only available for radios NOTE:
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
provide clear, coast to coast radio content. receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service. outside with a clear view to the sky.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might SXM button on the touchscreen.
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
When in Satellite mode:
Manual kit. receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground  The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
parking garages or tunnels. lighted.
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your No Subscription  The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
service at the end of your trial subscription, the Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver, top of the screen.
plan you choose will automatically renew and require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
bill at then-current rates until you call  The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
When the Radio does not have the necessary
SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See in the center.
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete Preview channel only.  The Program Information is displayed at the
terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription bottom of the Channel Number.
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). All fees and
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio  The SiriusXM® function buttons are
programming subject to change. Our satellite
subscription, US visit www.UconnectPhone.com displayed below the Program Information.
service is available only to those at least 18 and
or call:
older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C. Our Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
SiriusXM® satellite service is also available in 1-800-643-2112
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands. 9
PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet Canada visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call:
In addition to the tuning Operation functions
radio service is available throughout our 1-800-465-2001 (English) common to all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
satellite service area and in AK. © 2019 1-800-387-9983 (French) Weather button, and Favorite button functions
SiriusXM® Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM®
Radio Inc.
382 MULTIMEDIA
Radio 3 — Seek Down Button

1 — Browse 4 — Direct Tune Button
2 — Replay Bands 5 — Seek Up Button
3 — Seek Down Button 6 — Traffic & Weather Button (if equipped)
4 — Direct Tune Button 7 — Audio Settings Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Radio Bands
3 — Direct Tune
4 — Info Button
5 — Next Button
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display SiriusXM®

Satellite Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Replay Bands
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite

MULTIMEDIA 383
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched,
content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay
time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay mode.
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing
Play/Pause of live or rewound content at any time. Play can be resumed again by
pressing the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen.
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in
steps of five seconds. Pressing the Rewind button on the touchscreen
Rewind
for more than two seconds rewinds the content. The Radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is released.
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the
content in steps of five seconds. Forwarding of the content can only
be done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore, can
Forward
not be done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward but-
ton on the touchscreen also forwards the content. The Radio begins
playing the content at the point at which the press is release.
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of 9
Live Live
Live content.
384 MULTIMEDIA
Favorites Traffic & Weather — Available On The 4C NAV (If

Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen Equipped)
to activate the favorites menu, which will time Press the Traffic & Weather button on the
out within 20 seconds in absence of user touchscreen to tune to a SiriusXM® Traffic and
interaction. Weather channel. To set a Traffic & Weather
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of alert for any one of the cities in the Jump
the X button. Browse list, see Browse in SXM.
The favorites feature enables you to set a If the Traffic & Weather alert city is not set, you
favorite artist or song that is currently playing. are presented with a pop-up to allow you to
The Radio then uses this information to alert select the favorite city using the Browse screen.
you when either the favorite artist or song are
Browse In SXM
being played at any time by any of the Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Browse Button
SiriusXM® Channels.
1 — All Button
The maximum number of favorites that can be 2 — Presets Button
stored in the Radio is 50.
3 — Favorites Button
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set 4 — Game Zone Button
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
button on the touchscreen. edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on Channel List.
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button This Screen contains many sub menus. You can
button on the touchscreen. 1 — All Button exit a sub menu to return to a parent menu by
2 — Presets Button pressing the Back arrow.
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
MULTIMEDIA 385
All BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to Alert Settings

Press the All button on the Browse Screen. select the currently highlighted Preset. When Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
When pressing the All button, the following selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu
categories become available: in the Preset. allows you to choose from a Visual alert or
 Channel List Press the Channel List, or Deleting A Preset Audible and Visual alert when one of your
Genre, to display all the SiriusXM® Channel A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
Numbers. You can scroll the Channel list by screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the channels.
pressing the Up and Down arrows, located on corresponding Preset. Game Zone
the right side of the screen. Scrolling can also Favorites Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
be done by operating the TUNE/SCROLL of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
Press the Favorites button on the Browse
knob. with the ability to select teams, edit the
screen.
 Genre Press the Genre button on the touch- The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit selection, and set alerts.
screen to display a list of Genres. You can the Favorites list and to configure the Alert On Air
select any desired Genre by pressing the Settings, along with providing a list of Channels Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
Genre list, the Radio tunes to a channel with currently airing any of the items in the Favorites On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
the content in the selected Genre. list. airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
Presets — If Equipped You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of radio to that channel.
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located
at the left of the Browse screen. the screen. Scrolling can also be done by Select Team Or Add/Delete — If Equipped
operating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well. Press the Select Team or Add/Delete button on
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up 9
and Down arrows located at the right side of the Remove Favorites the touchscreen to activate the League Scroll
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the list. Press the chosen league and a scroll list of
the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well. screen. Press the Delete All button on the all teams within the league will appear, then you
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or can select a team by pressing the
Preset Selection
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the teams that are chosen.
be deleted.
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/
386 MULTIMEDIA
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon Audio Settings

Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the Press the Audio button within the settings main
screen. Press the Delete All button on the menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or The audio settings can also be accessed on the
press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio
be deleted. button. You can return to the Radio screen by
Alert Settings pressing the X button.
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when 1 — Balance/Fade
one or more of your selections is airing on any 2 — Equalizer
of the SiriusXM® channels. 3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
Tune Start 4 — Surround Sound — If Equipped
Tune Start begins playing the current song from 5 — Loudness
the beginning when you tune to a music 6 — Aux Volume Offset
channel using one of the 12 presets. This 7 — Radio Off With Door
feature occurs the first time the preset is
selected during that current song. 1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
Refer to the “Uconnect Settings” section in this
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
chapter for further information.
4 — Surround Sound — If Equipped
5 — Loudness
6 — Aux Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door
MULTIMEDIA 387

1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound — If Equipped
5 — Aux Volume Offset
6 — Auto Play
7 — Radio Off With Door
9
388 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description

Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to Balance audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
Balance/Fade
speakers. Pressing the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and
drag the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
Equalizer decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from Off, 1, 2, or 3.
This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with variation
Speed Adjusted Volume
to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed increases to
compensate for normal road noise.
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direc-
Surround Sound — If Equipped
tion as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This
AUX Volume Offset alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media
Auto Play device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is
turned on. Press Off to turn the setting off.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
Radio Off With Door the driver or passenger door is opened, or when the Radio Off Delay
selected time has expired.
MULTIMEDIA 389
Media Mode Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Operating Media Mode

Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode

1 — Repeat
2 — Track Time
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display Operating Media Mode Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Operating
3 — Shuffle
1 — Seek Down Media Mode
4 — Info
2 — Seek Up 1 — Repeat
5 — Tracks
3 — Additional Functions 2 — Track Time
6 — Browse
4 — Info 3 — Shuffle
7 — Select Source
5 — Pause/Play 4 — Info
6 — Source 5 — Tracks
7 — Browse 6 — Browse 9
7 — Source Select
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
390 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Source Selection Types of Media Modes Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
USB Mode communicate with the Uconnect System.
Source Select button on the touchscreen and
the desired mode button on the touchscreen. Overview On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, push the
USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB MEDIA button located on the faceplate. Once in
sources available. When available, you can device into the USB Port, or by selecting the USB Media Mode, press the Source button on the
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the touchscreen and select the Bluetooth® button.
be given these options: Source Select/Select Source button and then
NOTE:
 Now Playing selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped), or by
See the pairing procedure in the “Phone Mode”
pressing the Media button on the faceplate and
 Artists section for more details.
then selecting the USB button.
 Albums On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, if you To access Bluetooth® mode, press the
insert a USB device with the ignition ON, the unit Bluetooth® button on the left side of the
 Genres will switch to USB mode and begin to play when touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select
 Songs you insert the device. The display will show the Source button (if equipped).
track number and index time in minutes and
 Playlists seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
 Folders Bluetooth® Mode
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the Overview
Info button on the touchscreen for artist Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or
information on the current song playing. Bluetooth® Mode is entered by pairing a
For the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, Media Bluetooth® device, containing music, to the
Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA button Uconnect System.
located on the faceplate.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
MULTIMEDIA 391
the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX mode In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the
and begin to play when you insert the device Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next
cable. selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
Controlling The Auxiliary Device release the Seek Down button on the
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g., touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.) current selection, or return to the beginning of
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the is within the first second of the current
Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or selection.
the ON/OFF rotary knob, or with the volume of Browse
the attached device. In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Source Select NOTE:
USB Mode, the left side of the browse window
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
AUX Mode displays a list of ways you can browse through
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the contents of the USB device. If supported by
Overview the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
the device, you can browse by Folders, Artists,
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
Playlists, Albums, Songs, etc. Press the desired
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio the radio unit to play the music on the device.
button on the touchscreen on the left side of the
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX screen. The center of the browse window shows
Seek Up /Seek Down
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or items and its sub-functions, which can be
under the Source Select button (if equipped) or In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down
pushing the Media button on the faceplate and touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
buttons to the right. The TUNE/SCROLL knob
9
then selecting the Source button and then the device. Press and release the Seek Down
can also be used to scroll.
AUX button. button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or to return
To insert to auxiliary device, gently insert the
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX Port. If you
USB device is within the first three seconds of
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and
the current selection.
392 MULTIMEDIA
On the Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display, rotate Shuffle In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
the Browse button on the touchscreen to scroll In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the supports this feature, press the Tracks button
through and select a desired track on the touchscreen to play the selections on the USB on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the
iPod®, MP3 player, phone, or USB. Press the device in random order to provide an interesting Song List. The currently playing song is
Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the indicated by a red arrow and lines above and
cancel the Browse function. touchscreen a second time to turn this feature below the song title.
Media Mode off. Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the Audio while the pop-up is displayed will close the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source: For information on audio setting, refer to “Audio pop-up.
USB. Settings” in the “Radio Mode” section. Voice Commands Media
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on Info Uconnect offers connections via USB,
the touchscreen to select the desired audio In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info Bluetooth®, and auxiliary ports. Voice operation
source: Bluetooth®. button on the touchscreen to display the is only available for connected USB and AUX
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the current track information. Press the Info or X devices.
touchscreen to select the desired audio source: button on the touchscreen a second time to Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
AUX. cancel this feature. the beep, say one of the following commands
Repeat Tracks and follow the prompts to switch your media
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks source or choose an artist.
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality. button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up  “Change source to Bluetooth®”
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is with the Song List. The song currently playing is
highlighted when active. The Radio will continue indicated by an arrow and lines above and  “Change source to AUX”
to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as below the song title. When in the Tracks List  “Change source to USB”
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button screen you can rotate the TUNE/SCROLL knob
again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue to highlight a track (indicated by the line above  “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long and below the track name) and then push the Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
as the repeat function is active. To cancel ENTER/BROWSE knob to start playing that Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time. track.
MULTIMEDIA 393
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the  Call logs on screen (“Show Incoming Calls,” NOTE:
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed Calls,” Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
device. Your Voice Command must match “Show Recent Calls”). via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre properly.
 Searching Contacts phone number (“Search
information is displayed.
for John Smith Mobile”). Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
Phone Mode through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
Screen Activated Features
will automatically mute your radio when using
Overview  Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
the Uconnect Phone.
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
 Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone- For Uconnect customer support:
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
books displayed on the touchscreen.  US - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone.  Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so 877-855-8400
Uconnect Phone supports the following they are easily accessible on the Main Phone  Canada - visit UconnectPhone.com or call
features: screen. 800-465-2001 (English) or call
Voice Activated Features  Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent 800-800-387-9983 (French)
 Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Call logs.  Visit UconnectPhone.com
Smith Mobile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”).
 Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
 Hands-Free text to speech listening of your Messages. between the system and your mobile phone as
incoming SMS messages. you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
 Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device
mute the system's microphone for private
 Hands-Free Text Message Reply. Forward via the touchscreen. 9
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to conversation.
 Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
incoming calls/text messages.
easy access to connect to them quickly.
 Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
 Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
394 MULTIMEDIA
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your You will be prompted for a specific command
WARNING! signal to give a command. and then guided through the available options.
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the Voice Command Button  Prior to giving a voice command, one must
steering wheel. You have full responsibility The Voice Command button on your steering wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
and assume all risks related to the use of the wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you prompt or another prompt.
Uconnect features and applications in this are already in a call or want to make another
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to  For certain operations, compound
call. commands can be used. For example,
do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
The button on your steering wheel is also used instead of saying “Call” and then “John
dent involving serious injury or death.
to access the Voice Commands for the Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
Uconnect Voice Command features if your compound command can be said: “Call John
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your vehicle is equipped. Smith mobile.”
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology - the Phone Operation  For each feature explanation in this section,
global standard that enables different only the compound command form of the
electronic devices to connect to each other Operation voice command is given. You can also break
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you Voice commands can be used to operate the the commands into parts and say each part
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the of the command when you are asked for it.
has been paired to the vehicle's Uconnect Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice For example, you can use the compound
Phone. The Uconnect Phone allows up to commands are required after most Uconnect command form voice command “Search for
10 mobile phones or audio devices to be linked Phone prompts. There are two general methods John Smith,” or you can break the compound
to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile for how Voice Command works: command form into two voice commands:
phone and one audio device can be used with “Search Contact” and when asked, “John
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
the system at a time.
Smith mobile”. Phone works best when you talk in a normal
Phone Button
conversational tone, as if speaking to
The Phone button on your steering wheel is 2. Say the individual commands and allow the
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
used to get into the phone mode and make system to guide you to complete the task.
you.
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
view phonebook, etc. When you press the
MULTIMEDIA 395
Natural Speech Help Command To complete the pairing process, you will need
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you to reference your mobile phone’s manual.
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR) want to know your options at any prompt, say Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
engine. “Help” following the beep. mobile phone compatibility information.
Natural speech allows the user to speak To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
commands in phrases or complete sentences. simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
The system filters out certain non-word steering wheel and say a command or say
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” “Help”. All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with
The system handles fill-in words such as “I a push of the VR button or the Phone button on
would like to.” the touchscreen or Phone button on the radio
The system handles multiple inputs in the same faceplate.
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
Cancel Command
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
identifies the topic or context and provides the “Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do menu.
you want to call?” in the case where a phone You can also push the VR button or Phone
call was requested but the specific name was button (if active) on your steering wheel when
not recognized. the system is listening for a command and be
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the returned to the main or previous menu.
system requires more information from the
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone 9
user, it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
button on the steering wheel. pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
396 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: 5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to

pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
 If there are no phones currently connected
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
main screen.
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
 Press the Paired Phones and Audio
 This pop-up only appears when the user Devices button and then press Paired
enters phone mode and no other device(s) Phones button or press the Paired
have previously been paired. If the system Phones button.
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the  Search for available devices on your
system, this pop-up will not appear. Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. select “Uconnect” and accept the
4. Search for available devices on your connection request.
NOTE:
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone. 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
 You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your  Press the Settings button on your mobile screen while the system is connecting.
phone to complete this procedure. phone.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
 The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.  Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
Follow the steps below to pair your phone: enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth® 8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN connections. accept the connection request from
position. Uconnect Phone.
2. Press the Phone button.

MULTIMEDIA 397
9. When the pairing process has successfully You can also use the following VR command to 3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
completed, the system will prompt you to bring up the Paired Phone screen from any touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
choose whether or not this is your favorite screen on the radio: Devices screen.
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone  “Show Paired Phones”
4. Press the Add Device button on the
the highest priority. This phone will take
NOTE: touchscreen.
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect Software updates on your phone or the Ucon- NOTE:
system automatically when entering the nect system may interfere with the Bluetooth® If there is no device currently connected with
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one connection. If this happens, simply repeat the the system, a pop-up will appear.
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected pairing process. However, first, make sure to
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is delete the device from the list of phones on your 5. Search for available devices on your
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth® Uconnect from the list of devices in your prompted on the device, confirm the PIN
screen, and the Uconnect system will phone’s Bluetooth® settings. shown on the Uconnect screen.
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device. 6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
NOTE: screen while the system is connecting.
For information on how to pair a Bluetooth®
For phones which are not made a favorite, the streaming audio device with the Uconnect 3 7. When the pairing process has successfully
phone priority is determined by the order in with 5-inch Display radio, please refer to “Pair completed, the system will prompt you to
which it was paired. The latest phone paired will (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone” choose whether or not this is your favorite
have the higher priority. within this section. device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
NOTE: 1. Press the Media button on the
the highest priority. This device will take 9
precedence over other paired devices
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a touchscreen to begin.
within range.
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
System to access your “messages” and
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect System.
398 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: 3. Press to select the particular phone or the

For devices which are not made a favorite, the particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
device priority is determined by the order in appear; press “Connect Phone”.
which it was paired. The latest device paired will
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
have the higher priority.
screen.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices: Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
Device
 “Show Paired Phones”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display

Audio Device After Pairing 1 — Disconnect Device or Disconnect Phone
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to 2 — Make Favorite
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio 3 — Delete Device/Phone
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or audio device follow these
steps:
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
Settings button on the touchscreen. Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
2. Press the Paired Phones and Audio Devices 1 — Disconnect Device or Disconnect Phone
button and then press Paired Phones/Audio 2 — Make Favorite
Sources buttons or press the Paired 3 — Delete Device/Phone
Phones/Audio Sources buttons.
MULTIMEDIA 399
3. Press the Settings button located to the Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
right of the device name for a different Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
phone or audio device than the currently If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
connected device or press the preferred has the ability to download contact names and
Connected Phone from the list. number entries from the mobile phone’s
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
Device button on the touchscreen. pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect
System to access your “messages” and
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
screen.
your contacts with the Uconnect System.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite See Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
1 — Disconnect Device or Disconnect Phone for supported phones.
2 — Make Favorite 1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
 To call a name from a downloaded mobile
3 — Delete Device/Phone screen, press the Settings button located
to the right of the device name for a phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Voice Command” in this section.
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or different phone or audio device than the
Settings button. currently connected device or press the  Automatic download and update of a phone-
preferred Connected Phone from the list. book, if supported, begins as soon as the
2. Press the Paired Phones and Audio Devices
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
button and then press Paired Phones/Audio 2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed. 9
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
Sources buttons or press the Paired after you start the vehicle.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
Phones/Audio Sources buttons.
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
 A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
move to the top of the list.
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings and updated every time a phone is
screen. connected to the Uconnect Phone.
400 MULTIMEDIA
 Depending on the maximum number of 2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Phone Call Features
entries downloaded, there may be a short Contacts from the Phone main screen, and The following features can be accessed through
delay before the latest downloaded names then select the appropriate number. Press the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
can be used. Until then, if available, the previ- the Down Arrow symbol button next to the available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
ously downloaded phonebook is available for selected number to display the options mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
use. pop-up. In the pop-up, select Add to service plan provides three-way calling, this
Favorites. feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
 Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible. NOTE: Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to for the features that you have.
 This downloaded phonebook cannot be
remove an existing favorite. Listed below are the phone options with
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped  Redial
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next 1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”  Dial by pressing in the number
phone connection. from the Phone main screen.
 Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped 2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
There are two ways you can add an entry to your contact you want to remove from your Call Back)
Favorites. favorites. This will bring up the options for
that Favorite contact.  Favorites
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the  Mobile Phonebook
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add Favorite Favorite.  Recent Call Log
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
 SMS Message Viewer
MULTIMEDIA 401
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:

1 — Answer
2 — Mute/Unmute
3 — Transfer
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display 4 — Join Calls
1 — Answer
1 — Answer 2 — Join Calls
5 — End
2 — Mute/Unmute 3 — Transfer
3 — Transfer 4 — Mute/Unmute
4 — Ignore 5 — Ignore/Decline
Other phone call features include:

 End Call
9
 Hold/Unhold/Resume
 Swap two active calls
402 MULTIMEDIA
Key Pad Number Entry Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call

Currently In Progress
1. Press the Phone button.
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
touchscreen. audio system. Push the Uconnect Phone button
on the steering wheel, press the Answer button
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
on the touchscreen.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the You can also press the Caller ID box to place the
touchscreens to enter the number and current call on hold or answer the incoming call.
press Dial/Call. Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 — Answer Button
Recent Calls — If Equipped
2 — Caller ID Box
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
 All Calls
 Incoming Calls or Calls Received

 Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
 Missed Calls Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display
 Calls without a reply 1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and perform the above
operation. For example, say “Show my incoming
calls”.
MULTIMEDIA 403
NOTE: NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
system in the market today do not support touchscreen while typing a custom message.
rejecting an incoming call when another call is
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
selected so you can still place a second call
an incoming call or ignore it.
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
Do Not Disturb
NOTE:
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,  Reply with text message is not compatible
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and with iPhones®.
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,  Auto reply with text message is only available
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display there is a counter display to keep track of your on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
1 — Answer Button missed calls and text messages while Do Not Access Profile (MAP).
2 — Caller ID Box Disturb is active
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call text message, a call, or both when declining an During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
Currently In Progress incoming call and send it to voicemail. Hold button on the Phone main screen.
If a call is currently in progress and you have Automatic reply messages can be:
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
another incoming call, you will hear the same  “I am driving right now, I will get back to you Progress
network tones for call waiting that you normally shortly.”
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the You can place a call on hold by pressing the 9
Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel,  Create a custom auto reply message up to Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
press the Answer button on the touchscreen, or 160 characters. dial a number from the keypad, recent calls,
press the Caller ID box to place the current call SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back
on hold and answer the incoming call. to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between Call”.
To combine two calls, refer to “Join Calls”.
404 MULTIMEDIA
Toggling Between Calls Call Termination

To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
push the VR button and after the “Listening”
Uconnect 3 With 5-inch Display prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
If two calls are in progress (one active and one that was dialed from your mobile phone.
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the
Phone main screen. Only one call can be placed Call Continuation
on hold at a time. Call continuation is the progression of a phone
You can also push the Phone button to toggle call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
between the active and held phone call. ignition has been switched to OFF.
Join Calls NOTE:

The call will remain within the vehicle audio
When two calls are in progress (one active and
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display system until the phone becomes out of range
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls Call
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
button the Phone main screen to combine all
mended to press the Transfer button on the
calls into a Conference Call.
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
MULTIMEDIA 405
Advanced Phone Connectivity  Smooth Road Surface Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone  Fully Closed Windows
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be  Dry Weather Condition be supported.
transferred from your mobile phone to the Audio Performance
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To WARNING! Audio quality is maximized under:
transfer an ongoing call from your connected
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the  Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone wheel. You have full responsibility and
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
main screen. assume all risks related to the use of the Uco-
nnect features and applications in this vehi-  Low Road Noise
Things You Should Know About Uconnect cle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to do
 Smooth Road Surface
Phone so. Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.  Fully Closed Windows
Voice Command
For the best performance:  Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
 Always wait for the beep before speaking. languages and accents, the system may not  Operation From The Driver's Seat
always work for some.
 Speak normally, without pausing, just as you Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/ NOTE: loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
meters away from you. It is recommended that you do not store names and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
 Ensure that no one other than you is 9
speaking during a voice command period. in motion. by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
 Low-To-Medium Blower Setting Number and name recognition rate is optimized

when the entries are not similar. You can say
 Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
 Low Road Noise
406 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Voice Commands Voice Text Reply — If Equipped

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
Making and answering hands-free phone calls Uconnect can announce incoming text
RESPONSES
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook messages. Push the VR button or Phone
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your button and say: I’ll call you I need direc- See you in 5
system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for later. tions. <or 10, 15,
1. “Listen” to have the system read an 20, 25, 30,
mobile phone compatibility and pairing
incoming text message. (Must have I’m on my 45, 60> min-
instructions.
compatible mobile phone paired to way. Can’t talk utes.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep Uconnect system.) right now.
to say a command. See some examples below: Thanks.
I’m lost.
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
 “Call John Smith”
been read.
 “Dial 123 456 7890” NOTE:
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the Only use the numbering listed in the provided
 “Redial” (call previous outgoing phone beep, repeat one of the predefined messag- table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
number) es and follow the system prompts. the message.
 “Call back” (call previous incoming phone Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have
number) PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
the full implementation of the Message Access
RESPONSES
Did You Know: When providing a Voice Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature.
Stuck in traf- For details about MAP, visit
Command, push the Phone button and say Yes. See you later.
fic. UconnectPhone.com.
“Call,” then pronounce the name exactly as it
Start without Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
appears in your phone book. When a contact No. I’ll be late.
me. incoming text messages only. For further
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work.” Where are I will be 5 <or information on how to enable this feature on
Okay. your Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s®
you? 10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45, “User Manual”.
Are you there 60> minutes
Call me.
yet? late.
MULTIMEDIA 407
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not Power-Up 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is After switching the ignition key from OFF to brouillage, et
equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
voice to send a text message. language change, you must wait at least 15 brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped seconds prior to using the system. brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
When used with your Apple® iPhone® mettre le fonctionnement.
General Information
connected to your vehicle, Siri lets you use your
voice to send text messages, select media, The following regulatory statement applies to all La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this siguientes dos condiciones:
your natural language to understand what you vehicle:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
mean and responds back to confirm your This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
cause interferencia perjudicial y
requests. The system is designed to keep your Rules and with Innovation, Science, and
eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel Economic Development Canada license-exempt 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks. RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the following two conditions: pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
1. This device may not cause harmful NOTE:
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
interference, and Changes or modifications not expressly
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other 2. This device must accept any interference approved by the party responsible for compli-
useful requests. received, including interference that may ance could void the user’s authority to operate
cause undesired operation. the equipment.
Bluetooth® Communication Link 9
Mobile phones may lose connection to the Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the dÌnnovation, Science and Economic
connection can generally be re-established by Development applicables aux appareils radio
restarting the mobile phone OFF/ON. Your exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
mobile phone is recommended to remain in aux deux conditions suivantes:
Bluetooth® ON mode.
408 MULTIMEDIA
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF 1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your
EQUIPPED Android™-powered smartphone.
Android Auto™ 2. Connect your Android™-powered
smartphone to one of the media USB ports
NOTE:
in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
was not downloaded, the first time you plug
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
your device in, the app begins to download.
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language. NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
system, and your Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or
cables may not work. Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display And LTE Data
higher powered smartphone with a data plan,
Coverage
that allows you to project your smartphone and
a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio NOTE:
display. Android Auto™ brings you useful To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
information, and organizes it into simple cards area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
that appear just when they are needed. Android use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
Auto™ can be used with Google's best-in-class shown in the upper right corner of the radio
speech technology, the steering wheel controls, screen. Data plan rates apply.
the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate,
3. Once the device is connected and
and the radio display’s touchscreen to control
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
many of your apps. To use Android Auto™ follow
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display And LTE Data Coverage drop menu bar changes to the Android
the following procedure:
Auto™ icon. Android Auto™ launches
immediately. You can also launch it by
pressing the Android Auto™ icon on the
touchscreen.
MULTIMEDIA 409
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your NOTE:

Uconnect system, the following features can be If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan: the built-in Uconnect Navigation system (if
 Google Maps™ for navigation equipped) will launch instead of the Android
Auto’s™ Google Maps™.
 Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
 Hands-free Calling and Texting for communi-
 Navigation
cation
 Live traffic information
 Various compatible apps
 Lane guidance
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition
(VR) button until the beep on the NOTE:
steering wheel or tap the Microphone If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation
icon to ask Google to take you to a system, and you try and start a new route using
desired destination by voice. You can also touch the Android Auto™, via voice or any other
the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access method, a pop-up appears asking if you would
Google Maps™. like to switch from Uconnect navigation to
smartphone navigation. A pop-up also appears,
asking if you’d like to switch, if Android Auto™ is 9
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display currently in use and you attempt to launch a
built-in Uconnect route. Selecting “Yes”
switches the navigation type to the newly used
method of navigation and a route is planned for
the new destination. If “No” is selected the navi-
gation type remains unchanged.
410 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: and you must be signed in to the app through

Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set your mobile device for it to work with Android
up on your smartphone prior to using Android Auto™.
Auto™ for them to work with Android Auto™. Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list
NOTE: of available apps for Android Auto™.
To see the track details for the music playing Android Auto™ Voice Command
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen. NOTE:
For further information, refer to https:// mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
support.google.com/androidauto. Auto™ features may or may not be available in
Communication every region and/or language.
For further information, refer to With Android Auto™ connected, press Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
www.android.com/auto/ (US) or https:// and hold the VR button on the interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canada). steering wheel to activate voice technology through your vehicle’s voice
recognition specific to the Android recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
For further information on the navigation
Auto™. This allows you to send and reply to text data plan to project your Android™-powered
function, please refer to https://
messages, have incoming text messages read smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
support.google.com/android or https://
out loud, and place and receive hands-free Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
support.google.com/androidauto/.
calls. 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher to one of the media USB
Music ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and
Apps press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces
Android Auto™ allows you to access
The Android Auto™ App displays all the your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
and stream your favorite music with
compatible apps that are available to use with begin Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR
apps like Google Play Music,
Android Auto™ every time it is launched. You button on the steering wheel, or press and hold
iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
must have the compatible app downloaded, the “Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream
endless music on the road.
MULTIMEDIA 411
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
natural voice commands, to use a list of your your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
smartphone’s features: Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
 Maps To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
 Music
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
 Phone the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
 Text Messages
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
 Additional Apps Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display And LTE Data Coverage
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE: NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download cable that came with your phone, as after-
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, market cables may not work.
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
2. Once the device is connected and
Apple CarPlay® recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
NOTE: drop menu bar changes to the Apple
Feature availability depends on your carrier and CarPlay® Icon. Apple CarPlay® launches
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple immediately. You can also press the Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen to launch 9
in every region and/or language. it.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display And LTE Data
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Coverage
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
412 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: NOTE: Maps

To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the Push and hold the VR button until the
data is turned on, and that you are in an area steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR beep on the steering wheel or tap the
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular session, not a Siri session, and it will not func- Microphone icon to ask Apple® to
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio tion with Apple CarPlay®. take you to a desired destination by
screen. Data plan rates apply. voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Music
Apple CarPlay® to access Apple® Maps.
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your Apple CarPlay® allows you to access
Uconnect system, the following features can be all your artists, playlists, and music If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan: from iTunes®. Using your iPhone’s® the built-in Uconnect Navigation system (if
data plan, you can also use select equipped) will launch instead of the Apple
 Phone
third party audio apps including music, news, CarPlay’s® Apple® Maps.
 Music sports, podcasts, and more.
 Messages Messages
 Maps Press and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
Phone
recognition session. Apple CarPlay®
With Apple CarPlay®, press and hold allows you to use Siri to send or reply
the VR button on the steering wheel to to text messages. Siri can also read incoming
activate a Siri voice recognition text messages, but drivers will not be able to
session. You can also press and hold read messages, as everything is done via voice.
the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or
listen to voicemail as you normally would using
Siri on your iPhone®.
MULTIMEDIA 413
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command

NOTE:
mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay®
features may not be available in every region
and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher
to one of the media USB ports, using the
NOTE: Apps
factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the
If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation The Apple CarPlay® App displays all the new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
system, and you try and start a new route using compatible apps that are available to use with “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®, via voice or any other method, Apple CarPlay®, every time it is launched. You Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button
a pop-up appears asking if you would like to must have the compatible app downloaded, on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
switch from Uconnect navigation to iPhone® and you must be signed in to the app through Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
navigation. A pop-up also appears, asking if your mobile device for it to work with Apple Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands
you’d like to switch, if an Apple CarPlay® navi- CarPlay®. 9
to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
gation is currently in use and you attempt to
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/  Phone
launch a built-in Uconnect route. Selecting
(US) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/
“Yes” switches the navigation type to the newly Music
carplay/ (Canada) to see the latest list of 
used method of navigation and a route is
available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
planned for the new destination. If “No” is
selected the navigation type remains
unchanged.
414 MULTIMEDIA
 Messages NOTE: NOTE:

AutoPlay is not supported by Android Auto™. Android Auto™ and Apple CarPlay® features
 Maps — If Equipped
cannot be used with Bluetooth®. A USB connec-
 Additional Apps — If Equipped tion is required for its use. Android Auto™ and
Apple CarPlay® use both Bluetooth® and USB
NOTE: connections to function, and the connected
Requires compatible iPhone® and app down- device is unavailable to other devices when
loaded from the Apple® IOS App Store. Apple connected using Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc. CarPlay®.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple® Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
terms of use and privacy statements apply. System
It is possible to have multiple devices
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips
connected to the Uconnect system. For
And Tricks
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
AutoPlay Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display AutoPlay CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic place hands-free phone calls or send
that begins playing music off of the connected Bluetooth® Pairing hands-free text messages. However, another
device as soon as it is connected. This feature After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple device can also be paired to the Uconnect
can be turned On or Off in the Uconnect Settings CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so
within the Audio Settings category. setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the the passenger can stream music.
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
MULTIMEDIA 415
NAVIGATION MODE — IF EQUIPPED  Press Where To? to find or route to a destina-

tion.
Where To?
(UCONNECT 4C NAV WITH 8.4-INCH  Press View Map to view the map.
Where To? — Main Menu
DISPLAY ONLY)
 Press Home to navigate to a preset home
Operating Navigation address. If not already, set the system will
To access the Navigation system, press the Nav prompt you to add a home address.
button on the touchscreen.  Press Work to navigate to a preset work
address. If not already, set the system will
prompt you to add a work address.
 Press Information to view Traffic, Where Am
I? and Trip Computer information.
 Press Emergency to search for Hospitals,
Police and Fire Stations near your current
location. You can also display your current Where To? Button
location and save any Emergency facility From the Nav Main Menu, press the Where To?
location to your Favorites. button and select one of the following methods
to program a route guidance.
 Press the search bar at the top of the screen
to search for a specific address to route to.
Navigation Button 9
 Press Route Options and select from a list of
options to alter your route such as Express-
ways, Toll Roads, Ferries, Carpool Lanes, and
more.
416 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Refer to the individual section of the chosen option for further information.
Search All Press this button to search all “Where To?” categories for a location.
Press this button to search by a street address or a street name with

Address
house number.
Recent Press this button to access previously routed addresses or locations.
Favorites Press this button to access previously saved addresses or locations.
Press this button when you want to route to a point of interest. The
Point of Interest Point of Interest (POI) database allows you to select a destination from
a list of locations and public places, or points of interest.
Trips Press this button to program a new trip or recall a saved trip.
Intersection Press this button to enter in two street names as a destination.

MULTIMEDIA 417
Press this button to select a destination directly from the Map screen.
Point on Map By selecting a street segment or icon, you can quickly enter a destina-
tion without the need to input the city name or street.
Press this button to program or confirm a route to the saved home

Home
address.
Press this button to program or confirm a route to the saved work

Work
address.
Press this button to route to a particular city. The navigation system will
City Center calculate a route with the destination at the center of the city.
Press this button to route to a nearby city. The screen will display an
Closest Cities alphabetical listing of nearby cities. The navigation system will calcu-
late a route with the destination at the center of the nearby city.
Press this button to route to a location or point of interest by the phone

Phone Number
number.
Press this button to route to a GEO Coordinate. A GEO coordinate is a

coordinate used in geography. You can determine a GEO coordinate
GEO Coordinates 9
with the help of a handheld GPS receiver, a map, or the navigation sys-
tem.
418 MULTIMEDIA
Press the Trails button and select the option to start trail recording to
track the route you are driving. Select the option to “stop trail record-
Trails
ing” to end tracking. This gives you a point of reference for a particular
route if needed.
Press this button and select which “Where To?” categories you would
Edit Where To?
like to appear in the “Where To?” menu, and which ones you don’t.
If you are currently on a route guidance and you Where To? — Search All, Address, Recent,
select Recent, the system will ask you to choose And Favorite Destinations
one of the following:
Search All
 Cancel previous route
1. Press the Search All button.
 Add to Current Route
Within “Add to Current Route”, you can add 2. Enter the location name, street address,
the destination to your current route, or set it city, etc., you wish to search for, to search
as the final destination. all “Where To?” categories for the entered
location, and press OK.
NOTE:
You can press the Back Arrow button to return
to the previous screen or the X button to exit. Search
MULTIMEDIA 419
3. Select the desired location from the list of Address

locations that appears. Once the correct
1. Press the Address button.
location has been selected, you will be
asked to confirm your route by pressing 2. Press Spell City or Spell Street to begin
Route To. entering the address of your destination.
4. Press the GO! button on the touchscreen to
begin your route.
Select Street
To change the state and/or country, press
the state, country button and follow the
prompts to change the state and/or coun-
try.
Enter Address Once the correct City, Street and Number

If you press Spell City, you will have to enter have been entered, you will be asked to con-
and select/press the desired city name, fol- firm your route by pressing Route To.
GO! Button
lowed by the desired street name, and then 3. Press the GO! button to confirm your
9
the house number. destination and begin your route.
If you press Spell Street, you will have to en-
ter and select/press the desired street
name in the correct city, and then you will
have to enter the house number.
420 MULTIMEDIA
Recent Favorite Destinations

1. Press the Recent button. 1. Press the Favorites button.
2. Press the button with the name of the 2. Press the button with the name of the
desired destination. desired favorite destination and confirm the
To display the options for a destination from route with “Route To.” Press GO! to confirm
the list, press the Gear Icon, which opens a the destination, and start the route
pop-up menu with the options for that desti- guidance.
nation. 3. To delete a destination from the list, press
To delete a destination from the list, press the Gear icon next to the destination and
Delete in that pop-up menu. select “Delete” in the pop-up menu on the
Manage Destinations touchscreen.
 Edit Name 4. To save a favorite destination, press the
Add Favorite and follow the steps to route a
 Phone Number
destination.
 Move Up
5. To display the options for a favorite
 Move Down destination press the Options that looks like
 Place Pin (saves the spot on the list) a gear.
 Delete
3. Select “Route To” to confirm your route.
4. Press GO! to confirm your destination, and
Gear Icon begin your route.
The following Options are available for each
destination:
MULTIMEDIA 421
The following Options are available for each The Point of Interest database allows you to You can also change your POI search area by
favorite destination: select a destination from a list of locations and pressing any of the category buttons and
public places, or points of interest. pressing the Search Area button.
 Edit Name
You have the following POIs to choose from:
 Phone Number
 Move Up Search By Name
 Move Down
 Delete POI Categories
Where To? — Point of Interest
To enter a destination by Point of Interest (POI), Restaurants
press the Where To? button from the Nav Main
Menu, then press the POI Categories button.
Hotel/Motel
Search Area
You will have the following options to change
Gas Stations your search area:
 Around Here
 In a City or Zip Code 9

Rest Area
 Along Route (only available during route guid-
ance)
ATM/Bank  Around Destination (only available during
route guidance)
POI Categories Button  Around Next Waypoint
422 MULTIMEDIA
POI — Search By Name  Community

1. Press the Search by Name button.  Entertainment
A keyboard will appear on the screen. Type  Gas Stations
in the POI that you want to search and press
the List button to display available items.  Highway Exit
2. Press the desired POI and press Route To to  Hotels or Motels

confirm the route.  Local Services
3. Press the GO! button to confirm the  Medical
destination and begin the route.
 Parking
POI — POI Categories  Parks and Recreation ABC Keyboard
1. Press POI Categories button.  Restaurants 2. Press the desired POI and press Route To to
You can search through the available POI
 Shopping confirm the route.
categories to find your desired POI.
 Travel and Transportation 3. Press the GO! button to confirm the
The available categories are:
destination and begin the route.
 List All POIs NOTE:
Select a category and then select a subcategory
 ATM or Banking if necessary. Press the ABC button to activate a
 Automotive keyboard to search within the POI categories.
 Coffee Shops
MULTIMEDIA 423
POI — Restaurant, Hotel/Motel, Gas Stations, 2. Press the desired POI destination and press d. Choose from the following options to add
Rest Area, And ATM/Banking Route To to confirm the route. a destination
• Address
1. Press the corresponding button for the POI 3. Press the GO! button to confirm the
category you would like to navigate to. destination and begin the route. • Recent
You can search for a POI by the following • Point of Interest
categories, which are button tabs at the top Where To? — Trips • Favorites
of the screen: • Home
1. Press the Trips button
• Intersection
 Name 2. To route to a saved Trip, follow these steps: • GEO Coordinates
 Distance • Point on Map
a. Press the button with the name of the
 ABC (Search) desired Trip and press the first destina- • City Center
tion in the list. • Closest Cities
• Phone Number
b. Confirm the route by pressing Route To,
and then press GO! to confirm the desti- NOTE:
nation and to start the route guidance. Refer to the individual section of the chosen
option for further information.
3. To add a Trip, follow these steps:
e. To save your Trip, you must press Calcu-
a. Press the Create New Trip button. late Route and press Save.
b. Press the Destination button, and then f. Your new Trip will appear on the Trips list. 9
press Pick Destination.
4. To delete a Trip from the list, press the Gear
c. Press Add Destination or Insert Final icon and then select “Delete” from the
Destination to add waypoints and desti- pop-up menu.
POIs Around Here nations to your trip.
424 MULTIMEDIA
5. To display the options for a trip, press the NOTE:

Gear icon. If the system automatically recognizes the city,
or street, it will populate a list of recognized
6. The following Options are available for each
cities, or streets. If not, press the List button to
trip:
select from the available options.
 Edit Name
 Move Up
 Move Down
 Delete
Where To? — Point on Map And Intersection

Point On Map
Point On Map
3. To enter a destination by Point on Map,
1. Press the Point on Map button. follow these steps:
2. Use the touchscreen to drag the center of a. Once your cross is where you want it,
the cross over the desired destination. press Route To, or select “Places Nearby”
Select Street
to select a nearby destination. Then
press GO! to confirm the destination and 3. If “Spell Street” was selected, you must
begin route guidance. select the correct street, you will then be
asked to spell the intersecting street, and
Intersection
then the desired city.
1. Press the Intersection button.
4. Press the Route To button to confirm your
2. Press the Spell City or Spell Street button to route, and then press GO! to confirm the
enter the desired city or street name. destination and begin your route.
MULTIMEDIA 425
Where To? — Home And Work 3. To delete a saved Home location (or other NOTE:
saved locations), so you can save a new Refer to the individual section of the chosen
Home Home location, follow these steps: option for further information.
1. Press the Home button. If there is no Home a. Press the Nav button, and in the “Where Once you have generated your Work Ad-
Address entered, press “Yes” to enter it To” screen, press Edit Where To. dress, you will be asked to Save it.
now.
b. Press the Home button. 3. Press the Save Work button to confirm your
2. To enter your Home Address, follow these destination and begin the route to your
steps: c. Under the Manage screen, press the
Work Address.
Reset Location button.
a. To set your Home Address choose one of 4. This address will be saved as your Work
the following options: A confirmation screen will appear asking,
“Are you sure you want to reset this loca- Address and it can be accessed by pressing
• Spell City the Work button in the Where To? Menu.
tion?”. Press “Reset” to confirm the deletion
• Spell Street
and then set a new Home location by follow-
NOTE: ing the previous instructions.
Refer to the individual section of the chosen
option for further information. Work
Once you have generated your Home Ad- 1. Press the Work button. If there is no Work
dress, you will be asked to Save it. Address entered, press “Yes” to enter it
now.
b. Press the Save Home button to confirm
your destination and begin the route to 2. To set your Work Address, choose one of the 9
your Home Address. following options:
 Spell City
c. This address will be saved as your Home
Address and it can be accessed by  Spell Street
pressing the Home button in the Where
To? Menu.
426 MULTIMEDIA
Where To? — City Center And Closest Cities Closest Cities GEO-Coordinates
City Center 1. Press the Closest Cities button. 1. Press the GEO-Coordinates button.
1. Press the City Center button. 2. Press the desired city from the list. 2. Enter the Latitude by typing in the numbers.
Use the dial pad to select specific numbers
2. To enter a destination by City Center, follow 3. Press the Route To button to confirm your
in the location shown.
these steps: route and then press GO! to confirm your
destination and begin your route.
a. Enter the name of the City you would like
to route to. Where To? — Phone, GEO-Coordinates, And
Trails
Phone
1. Press the Phone Number button.
2. To enter a destination by Phone number,
follow these steps:
a. Enter the Phone Number of the business
you would like to route to.
GEO Coordinates
b. Press the desired destination from the
list. 3. Press the OK button.
Select City Or Zip c. Press the Route To button to confirm your 4. Enter the Longitude by typing in the
route, and then press GO! to confirm your numbers. Use the dial pad to select specific
b. Press the desired city from the list. destination and begin your route. numbers in the location shown.
c. Press the Route To button to confirm your
route, and then press GO! to confirm your
destination and begin your route.
MULTIMEDIA 427
5. Press OK to confirm the destination. 3. When you want to end the recording of a
route, press the Record button, and press
6. Press the Route To button to confirm your
Yes to confirm.
route, and then press GO! to confirm your
destination and begin your route. The trip you recorded will be added to the
Recent Trails list.
Trails
Before Route Guidance
1. Press the Trails button.
Before confirming the destination with the GO!
2. Press Start Recording. button, it is possible to select options different
from the default route settings.
 Route Options — Press the Route Options
button to display a list of options to alter your
Route Options
route. To make a selection press and release
the desired setting. 1 — Round Trip
2 — Expressways Allowed
3 — Toll Roads Allowed
4 — Ferries Allowed
5 — Carpool Lanes Allowed
6 — Car Shuttle Trains Allowed
 Avoid — Press the Avoid button to choose

road types to avoid during your route. To 9
Start Recording Trails make a selection, press and release the
desired setting.
Route Options Button

428 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE: View Map

Since toll roads, tunnels and ferries are built for
the purpose of shortening travel distances, View Map — Main Menu
avoiding these road types may increase Press the View Map button from the Nav Main
distance and travel time. Menu to display a map of your current position.
 Save — Press the Save button to save the

destination as a Trip.
Press the GO! button to confirm your
destination and to start your route guidance.
Avoid Button
View Map Button

With the map displayed you have the following
features available:
Menu
Press this button to return to the Nav Main
Menu.
Detour Types
MULTIMEDIA 429
Zoom In +/Zoom Out – Options (only during route guidance) View Map — Settings
Press the Zoom In (+) or Zoom Out (–) buttons Press the Options button to display the following With the Map displayed, press the button on the
to change the zoom level. Roads with lower options. bottom right of the map that has three
functional classification are not shown in higher  2D North Up/Map View 2D/Map View 3D horizontal lines on it. Then press the Settings
zoom levels. (e.g., residential streets, button.
lightly-traveled county roads.) Press this button to scroll between the three
viewing options.
Time of Arrival/Time to Destination/Distance
(only during route guidance)  Repeat Directions
Press the button in the upper right area of the Press this button to repeat the current voice
screen to the display items available. Press the prompt.
desired option button.
 Mute Guidance
 Time of Arrival
Press this button to mute the voice prompts.
 Time to Destination
 Stop Guidance
 Distance
Press this button to stop route guidance.
Turn List (only during route guidance)  Settings
Press the area in the upper center part of the
Press this button to view all the available View Map Settings Icon
screen that displays your next turn to see a Turn
List for your current route. settings. See View Map — Settings for more
information.
Press a turn in the displayed Turn List for the 9
following options:
 Show on Map
 Avoid Street
430 MULTIMEDIA
The following Map Settings are available:  Guidance — Press this button to display items
to customize your route guidance. Refer to
“Settings — Guidance” within this section for
 Traffic — Press this button to set how you
receive traffic information updates.
 GPS (DMS) — Press this button to change the
GPS display.
 Decimal
 Degrees-Minutes-Seconds (DMS)
View Map Settings Button
 Degrees-Minutes (DM)
Map Settings
 Map Setup — Press this button to display
items to customize how your map is viewed.
Refer to “Settings — Map Setup” within this
 Speed Limit — Press this button to turn on/off
speed limit warning announcements and to
enter a pre-defined speed limit for your route.
MULTIMEDIA 431
Settings — Map Setup The following Map Setup options are available: Map Appearance
With the Map displayed, press the button in the Press this button to select different themes for
bottom right corner of the map that has three your map.
horizontal bars on it, then press the Settings Display Current Street
button and then the Map Setup button. Press this button to turn on/off the current
street display on the lower center of the Map
View. Press and release the button until a
check-mark appears, showing the setting has
been selected.
Display Current City
Press this button to turn on/off the current city
display in the lower right of the Map View. Press
and release the button until a check-mark
Map Setup Options appears, showing the setting has been
Map View selected.
Press this button to change how the Map View Destination Information
is displayed. Press this button to change the Destination
Map Setup  3D (Must Select 3D City Models Or 3D Land- Information that is displayed in the upper right
marks For 3D Map View To Display.) corner of the Map View.
 Time of Arrival
 2D 9
 2D North Up  Time to Destination
 Distance
432 MULTIMEDIA
Auto Zoom Vehicle Icon

Press this button to change how the Auto Zoom Press this button to change the Vehicle icon
feature adjusts the zoom level during guidance that is displayed while in Map View. Press
in Map View. Previous or Next to view the available icons.
 Far Press the Back icon button when you've made
your selection.
 Medium
 Low
 Off
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to show the selected Point
Show POI Icons of Interest icons while in Map View. Press and release the button until a
check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display the available
Point of Interest icons you would like displayed while in Map View. Press
POI Categories
and release the desired selection until a check mark appears, showing
the setting has been selected.
Press the Traffic button within the Map Setup screen to show Traffic Mes-
sage Channel (TMC) Incidents while in Map View. Press and release the
Traffic Incidents — If Equipped
button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been
selected.
Press the Speed Limit button within the Map Setup screen to show the
Speed And Flow Speed and Flow of traffic while in Map View. Press and release the button
until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
MULTIMEDIA 433
Press the 3D City Models button within Map Setup screen to display 3D
3D City Models City Models while in Map View. Press and release the button until a check
mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Press the 3D Landmarks within the Map Setup screen to display 3D
3D Landmarks Landmarks while in Map View. Press and release the button until a check
mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display the area’s ter-
Digital Terrain Model rain while in Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark
appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display Park Areas while
Park Areas in Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears,
showing the setting has been selected.
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display Railroad tracks
Railroads while in Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display City Areas while
City Areas in Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark appears,
Press this button within the Map Setup screen to display River Names
River Names while in Map View. Press and release the button until a check mark 9
434 MULTIMEDIA
Settings — Guidance menu by pressing the Settings button in the The following Guidance options are available:
With the Map displayed, press the Options lower right of the Nav Main Menu.
button, then press the Settings button and then
the Guidance button. You can also access this
Guidance Button
Press this button to enable Voice Guidance Prompts during route guid-
Play Voice Guidance ance. Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing
Press the + or – buttons to adjust the Nav Voice Prompt Volume.
NOTE:
Nav Guidance Volume If the NAV Volume Adjustment setting is set between level 0 and 11, it will
default to level 12 on a vehicle restart. If the NAV Volume Adjustment
setting is set between level 13 and 38 it will RETAIN the setting on a
vehicle restart.
MULTIMEDIA 435
Press this button to enable Lane Recommendation during route guid-

Lane Recommendation ance. Press and release the button until a check mark appears, showing
Press this button to enable Junction View during route guidance. Press
Junction View and release the button until a check mark appears, showing the setting
has been selected.
Press this button to change how the Traffic Message Channel (TMC)
Route Mode functions during route guidance. Select from:
 Automatic
TMC Route Mode (If Equipped)  By Delay Time
 Manual
 Off
Press this button to display the available Traffic Message Channel (TMC)
Avoidance Types you would like displayed while in route guidance. Press
TMC Avoidance Types (If Equipped)
and release the desired selection button until a check mark appears,
Press this button to display the Sign Posts types you would like displayed
Sign Posts while in route guidance. Press and release the desired selection button
until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected. 9
Press this button to display the Route Progress Bar while in route guid-
Route Progress Bar ance. Press and release the selection button until a check mark appears,
436 MULTIMEDIA
Press this button to determine which road types are OK to travel on while
Route Options in route guidance. Press and release the desired selection button until a
check mark appears, showing the setting has been selected.
Press this button to display Highway Services while in route guidance.
Offer Highway Services Press and release the selection button until a check mark appears, show-
ing the setting has been selected.
Press this button to display the available Highway Service Types you
would like displayed while in route guidance. Press and release the
Highway Services
desired selection button until a check mark appears, showing the setting
has been selected.
Press this button to display Real Time Traffic Updates while in route guid-
Use Real Time Traffic ance. Press and release the desired selection button until a check mark
Press this button to display detours on traffic events while in route guid-
Provide Detours on Traffic Events ance. Press and release the desired selection button until a check mark
Press this button to make it mandatory for you to have to confirm detours
manually while in route guidance. Press and release the desired selec-
Confirm Detours Manually
tion button until a check mark appears, showing the setting has been
selected.
Press this button to allow the navigation system to display the available
detours if they save you a predetermined amount of minutes, while in
Provide Detours That Save More Than X Min. route guidance. Press and release the desired plus or minus button until
you have selected the desired number of minutes saved, from five min-
utes to one hour in increments of five minutes.
MULTIMEDIA 437
Information From the Nav Main Menu, press the Information

button and select one of the following options to
Information view additional information:
Information Button
Traffic Traffic displays detailed traffic information, .
Weather displays detailed weather information about your current posi-

Weather 9
tion.
Where Am I? displays the address and GEO-Coordinates of your current

location.
Where Am I?
1. Press the Show GPS Info button to view the GPS information.
2. Press the Save button to save the location in your Favorites.
438 MULTIMEDIA
Trip Computer displays the following trip information from your last trip:
 Travel Direction
 Distance to final Destination
 Vehicle Speed
 Distance Traveled
Trip Computer  Overall average speed

 Moving average speed
 Maximum speed
 Total time traveled
 Travel time spent moving
 Travel time spent stopped
Select the desired country on the touchscreen. Information, such as aver-
Country Info age speed limits and specific phone number country codes, will be pro-
vided about the selected country.
MULTIMEDIA 439
Emergency You can search for a Hospital, Police

Department, or Fire Department by the
Emergency following categories, which are button tabs at
From the Nav Main Menu, press the Emergency the top of the screen:
button and press one of the following options to  Name
search and route to a specific location.
 Distance
 ABC (Search)
NOTE:
In case of emergency, please contact the facility
to verify their availability before proceeding.
Emergency Nearby Options  Press the desired Hospital, Police Depart-
1 — Hospital ment, or Fire Department and press Route To
2 — Police to confirm your route, and then press GO! to
3 — Fire Department confirm the destination and begin route guid-
ance.
Press the Where Am I? button to display your
exact current location.
Emergency Button
Press the Save button to save your current
location in Favorites.
9
440 MULTIMEDIA
Map Updates 3. Or, if you wish, you can also visit your dealer  Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel
or place a phone call to request your Map prices in your area and route to the station of
The map data available in your vehicle is the
Update. US/CAN General Consumer your choice.
most up-to-date information that was available
Support:
when your vehicle was built. Map data is  Sports Scores — In-game and final scores as
updated periodically as map information 888-628-6277 well as weekly schedules.
changes. Follow the steps below if you wish to
FCA US LLC Dealer Garmin Support:  Movie Listings — Check local movie theaters
obtain an update for your vehicle.
and listings in your area and route to the
877-628-4480
1. Please visit chryslergroup.navigation.com theater of your choice.
to obtain your map update. At the top of the FCA US LLC Consumer FreshMaps
SiriusXM® Travel Link feature is completely
page, click the brand of your vehicle. Then,
866-422-8171 integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes after
at the drop down menu, select your vehicle
you start your vehicle, Travel Link information
model and its model year. You will then be
SiriusXM® Travel Link arrives and updates in the background. You can
directed to a page that will let you know if
In addition to delivering over 160 channels of access the information whenever you like, with
your vehicle needs a map update or not.
the best sports, entertainment, talk, and no waiting.
2. Or, visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or DriveU- commercial-free music, SiriusXM® offers  To access SiriusXM® Travel Link, press the
connect.ca (Canada) and follow these premium data services that work in conjunction Apps button on the touchscreen, then the
steps: with compatible navigation systems. SiriusXM® SiriusXM® Travel Link button.
 Under the “Help & Support” tab, select Travel Link brings a wealth of useful information NOTE:
your vehicle brand, model, and year. into your vehicle and right to your fingertips. SiriusXM® Travel Link requires a subscription,
Then, click “SYSTEM UPDATES.” Simply  Weather — Check variety of local and national sold separately after the trial subscription
follow the steps and place your order. weather information from radar maps to included with your vehicle purchase.
current and five day forecast.
MULTIMEDIA 441
SiriusXM® Traffic Plus CONNECTED SERVICES— IF EQUIPPED What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?

“Don't drive through traffic. Drive around it.” SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device
Introduction To SiriusXM Guardian™ in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By
enhancing your vehicle's navigation system with One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s which receives GPS signals and communicates
the ability to see detailed traffic information, Uconnect system is that you can now take with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
you can pinpoint traffic incidents, determine advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected center via wireless and landline
average traffic speed and estimate travel time vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of communications networks. Depending on the
along your route. Since the service is integrated SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM
with a vehicle's navigation system, SiriusXM® need to activate SiriusXM® services. Guardian™ services require an operable LTE
Traffic Plus can help drivers pick the fastest (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
WARNING! compatible with your device. SiriusXM
route based on traffic conditions.
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to Guardian™ is available only on equipped
1. Detailed information on traffic speed, the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands vehicles purchased within the continental
accidents, construction, and road closings. on the steering wheel. You have full responsi- United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and
bility and assume all risks related to the use Canada.
2. Traffic information from multiple sources,
including police and emergency services, of the features and applications in this vehi- NOTE:
cameras and road sensors. cle. Only use the features and applications Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may dependent on a properly installed and opera-
3. Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic result in an accident involving serious injury tional Uconnect device, cellular network avail-
information. or death. ability that is compatible with the device in your
4. View conditions for points along your route vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all 9
and beyond. NOTE: features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection, everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
transmission and use of data from your vehicle. enclosed areas. Other factors outside the
Refer to “Data Collection and Privacy” in this control of SiriusXM Guardian™ that may limit or
section for further information. prevent service delivery are hills, structures,
buildings, tunnels, weather, damage to the elec-
442 MULTIMEDIA
trical system or other important parts of your  Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App. SiriusXM Guardian™ services from your date of
vehicle, network congestion, civil disturbances, Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map purchase.
actions of third parties or the government, and send your locations directly to your Ucon- * Included Trials apply to new vehicles only.
Internet failure, and/or the physical location of nect Navigation.
For a more complete description, please refer to
your vehicle, such as in an underground parking DriveUconnect.com (US Residents) or
 The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
structure or under a bridge. DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
For a complete list of available SiriusXM Finder function of the Uconnect App.
Features And Packages
Guardian™ services, please visit:
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the After the trial period, you must purchase a
 US residents: https://www.driveucon- easy-to-use Uconnect System and SiriusXM subscription to continue your services by
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html. Guardian™ services. visiting the SiriusXM Guardian™ Store or calling
 Canadian residents: https://www.siri- The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent at:
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/. The ASSIST Button is used for contacting  US residents call: 1-844-796-4827
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are  Canadian residents call: 1-877-324-9091
Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
available for all models.
The SOS Call button connects you directly to Getting Started With SiriusXM Guardian™
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides: SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
 The ability to remotely lock/unlock your doors assistance in an emergency. Activation
using the Uconnect App, by calling SiriusXM To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or by logging on Included Trial Period For New Vehicles Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate
to your owner site at www.mopar.com/en-us/ Your new vehicle may come with an included your SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
care/owners-manual.html (US Residents) or trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents). You services starting on the date of vehicle 1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
can also remotely start your vehicle (if purchase. To get started with your trial, in-vehicle touchscreen.
equipped) from virtually anywhere and acti- enrollment in SiriusXM Guardian™ is required. 2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
vate your horn and lights via the app or owner The Uconnect system includes a trial* of list of apps.
site.
MULTIMEDIA 443
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a To use the Uconnect app: Using Your Owner’s Site
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent  Once you have activated your SiriusXM Your Owner’s Site website www.mopar.com/
who will activate services in your vehicle, or Guardian™ services, download the Uconnect en-us/care/owners-manual.html (US
select “Enter Email” to activate on the web. app to your mobile device. Use your Owner Residents), or www.mopar.ca (Canadian
Account login and password to open the app. Residents) provides you with all the information
For further information, please visit:
you need, all in one place. You can track your
 US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-  Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin
service history, find recommended accessories
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote
Vehicle Start, and activate your horn and for your vehicle, watch videos about your
 Canadian residents visit: https://www.siri- lights remotely, if equipped. vehicle's features, and easily access your user
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/ guides and manuals. It is also where you can
 Press the Location button on the bottom manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account. This
Download The Uconnect App menu bar of the app to bring up a map to section will familiarize you with the key
Once you have activated your services, you’re locate your vehicle or send a location to your elements of the website that will help you get
only a few steps away from using remote Uconnect Navigation, if equipped. the most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
commands.  Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper  Edit Profile:
left corner of the app to bring up app settings To manage the details of your SiriusXM
and access the Assist Call Centers. Guardian™ account, such as your contact
NOTE: information, password and SiriusXM
For further information: Guardian™ PIN, click on the “Edit Profile”
button to access the details of your account.
 US residents visit: https://www.driveucon- 9
 Connected Services Status:
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html
 Canadian residents visit: https://www.siri- This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/ Guardian™ equipped vehicle.
444 MULTIMEDIA
 Remote Commands: 4. You can enter one mobile phone and/or SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
E-mail address to notify you, and you can Features
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM
customize the types of messages. With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
Guardian™ subscription, press one of these
icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM on-board assistance features located on the
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ rear view mirror designed to enhance your
Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely start (if
equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the SOS Call driving experience if you should ever need
horn and lights. assistance or support.
CAUTION! Description
Editing Your Notifications
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services, includ- SOS Call is a feature that, at the push of a
Notifications are an important element of your
ing SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call button, can contact emergency services. It’s a
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any
will NOT work without an operable LTE (voice/ convenient way to get in contact with a SiriusXM
time you use your remote services (such as
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection Guardian™ Customer Care agent in the event of
Remote Door Unlock), or if your security alarm is
compatible with your device. an emergency. When the connection between
set off, you can elect to receive a text message,
the vehicle and the live agent is made, your
push notifications, and/or E-mail to notify you of
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A vehicle will automatically transmit location
the event. To set up the notifications, please
Button information to SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
follow these instructions.
Care. In the event of a minor collision, medical
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at or any other emergency, press the SOS button
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/ to be connected to a call center agent who can
owners-manual.html (US Residents), or send emergency assistance to your vehicle’s
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents). location.
2. Click the Edit Profile button. NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
3. Once there, you can edit Notification dependent on a properly installed and opera-
Preferences. tional Uconnect system, cellular network avail-
ability that is compatible with the device in your
vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all
MULTIMEDIA 445
features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available 2. Once a connection between the vehicle and If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent any of the following may occur at the time the
enclosed areas. is made, the SOS Call system will connect malfunction is detected:
your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian™  The SOS light will continuously be illuminated
How It Works
Customer Care agent who will stay on the red.
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator line with you.
 The screen will display the following message
light will turn green indicating a call has
NOTE: “Vehicle phone requires service. Please
been placed.
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the contact your dealer.”
NOTE: SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may
be recorded or monitored for quality assurance  An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
 In case the SOS Call button is accidentally purposes. Through your enrollment in and use “Vehicle phone requires service. Please
pushed, there is a 10 second delay before of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services, you contact your dealer.”
the SOS call is placed. The system will consent to being recorded. Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
verbally alert you that a call is about to be
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection, SOS Call System Limitations prevent or stop SOS Call system operation.
push the SOS Call button or press the Cancel Vehicles that have been purchased in the US These include, but are not limited to, the
button on the touchscreen within 10 and that travel into Mexico and Canada may following factors:
seconds. have limited services. In particular, responses  The ignition key has been removed from the
 During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth® paired to SOS calls or other emergency services may ignition and the delayed accessories mode is
phone is disconnected so incoming or be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles active.
outgoing calls will go through mobile versus purchased outside the United States and
The ignition key is in OFF position.
9
the hands-free system which is not available Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM 
due to the SOS Call. Guardian™ services.
446 MULTIMEDIA
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
intact. SiriusXM Guardian™ System. Vehicle must WARNING! (Continued)
be registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and  Do not add any aftermarket electrical
 The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
have an active subscription that includes the equipment to the vehicle’s electrical
ware is damaged during a vehicle crash.
applicable feature. system. This may prevent your vehicle from
 The vehicle battery loses power or becomes sending a signal to initiate an emergency
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
disconnected during a vehicle crash. call. To avoid interference that can cause
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
the SOS Call system to fail, never add after-
 LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage compatible with your device.
market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals  Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
are unavailable or obstructed. ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func- vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
 Network congestion. tioning electrical system. antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON (IN-
 Weather. CLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
WARNING!
 Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or DENT), NEITHER THE UCONNECT APPS
 Never place anything on or near the NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN SERVICES
tunnels. vehicle’s LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G WILL NOT OPERATE.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any (data) and GPS antennas. You could
(Continued)
reason (including during or after an accident) prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and
the SOS Call System, among other vehicle GPS signal reception, which can prevent
systems, will not operate. your vehicle from placing an emergency
call.
Requirements
(Continued)
 This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US.
MULTIMEDIA 447
 SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care —

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) Contact the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
 The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)  Failure to perform scheduled maintenance Care call center to activate your services,
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the and regularly inspect your vehicle may renew after your trial has expired, and for
instrument panel if a malfunction in any result in vehicle damage, accident or injury. in-vehicle support for your SiriusXM
part of the air bag system is detected. If the Guardian™ system or help answering any
Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air Roadside Assistance Call general questions surrounding your
bag system may not be working properly connected services.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
and the SOS Call system may not be able to
Features  Uconnect Care Call — In-vehicle support for
send a signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has all non-connected Uconnect system features,
Customer Care center. If the Air Bag
on-board assistance features located on the such as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service your vehicle rear view mirror designed to enhance your  Vehicle Care Call — Total support for your
immediately. driving experience if you should ever need vehicle.
assistance or support.
 Ignoring the SOS light could mean you will How It Works
not have SOS Call services if needed. If the Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™ You or someone in the vehicle simply presses
SOS light is illuminated, have an authorized
system feature will contain an ASSIST button. the ASSIST button and you will be presented
dealer service the SOS Call system immedi-
Once your SiriusXM Guardian™ services have with your ASSIST options on the touchscreen.
ately.
been activated, the ASSIST button can connect Make your selection by pressing the
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger touchscreen.
you directly to one of four important care
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
centers for support. 9
voice contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™  Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a flat
Customer Care agent. All occupants should tire, or need a tow, you’ll be connected to
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a someone who can help anytime. Additional
safe location. fees may apply. (See the Disclaimers section
below for more details.)
(Continued)
448 MULTIMEDIA
Requirements information obtained through such recording 2. Select your destination from the list that
 This feature is available only on vehicles sold and monitoring in accordance with regulatory appears. Location information will then be
in the U.S. requirements. You acknowledge, agree and displayed on the map.
consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing From this screen, you will be able to:
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the of information obtained through any such call
SiriusXM Guardian™ system. recordings.  View the location on a map.
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/ Send & Go  See the distance from your current loca-
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. tion.
Use the mobile app to easily search and send
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM your locations directly to your vehicle navigation  Send the address by selecting “Send to
Guardian™ and have an active subscription system. It’s easy to enter and great for quick Vehicle” from the mobile app.
that includes the applicable feature. access on the go.
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
 Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or Description
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func- The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App the destination by pressing the Call button.
tioning electrical system. allows you to search for a destination on your
mobile device, and then send the route to your 4. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle
Disclaimers by pressing the “Send To Vehicle” option on
vehicle’s navigation system.
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your the pop-up that appears on the radio
How It Works
vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any touchscreen.
additional roadside assistance service costs 1. Use the Uconnect App to find the
that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM destination. Requirements
Guardian™ services to you, we may record and There are multiple ways to find a destina-  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
monitor your conversations with Roadside tion. After selecting the “Location” tab at data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or the bottom of the App, browse through one compatible with your device.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether of the categories provided, or type the name
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
such conversations are initiated through the or keyword in the search box at the top of
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
SiriusXM Guardian™ services in your vehicle, or the App. You can also select categories
that includes the applicable feature.
via a landline or mobile device, and may share such as Favorites or Contact List.
MULTIMEDIA 449
Vehicle Finder 3. You can also select the “Person” icon to see  Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
Forget where you parked your car? We'll help your location. data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
you locate it! Simply use the Uconnect App on compatible with your device.
4. Once the vehicle has been located, you can
your smartphone and you'll be on track. map a route to your vehicle.  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Description Guardian™ and have an active subscription
NOTE: that includes the applicable feature.
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to find the location of your stationary  You are responsible for using remote  Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
vehicle when you have lost it. You can also services that sound horn and flash lights in within 14 days.
sound the horn and flash the lights to make accordance with the laws, rules and ordi-
finding your vehicle even easier. nances in effect at the location of your Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
How It Works vehicle. Create A Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your Vehicle
Use the Uconnect App to find the location of  Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are Description
your vehicle. dependent on a properly installed and opera- Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service
tional Uconnect system, cellular network that connects your device to the AT&T
1. Select the “Location” tab at the bottom of
availability that is compatible with the device LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
the App. Then touch the Vehicle icon to find
in your vehicle, and GPS network availability. that is ready to go where ever you are.
your vehicle.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are After you've made your purchase, turn on your
2. Choose how you want to view the available everywhere at all times, particularly device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
information by pressing the layers button. in remote or enclosed areas.
Three options will appear:
Requirements 9
 Map  Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in
 Satellite motion.
 Hybrid  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the

Uconnect System.
450 MULTIMEDIA
data. The trial can be activated any time within

WARNING! the first year of new vehicle ownership.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the Wi-Fi Give it a Try! Always drive safely with your hands on the
Hotspot while driving the vehicle. Failure to do Purchase a subscription to the Wi-Fi Hotspot steering wheel and obey all applicable laws.
so may result in an accident involving serious feature 3 different ways: You have full responsibility and assume all
injury or death. risks related to the use of the features and
1. From your in-vehicle touchscreen select applications in this vehicle. Only use the fea-
 Enables all your passengers to be simultane- the Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the “How tures and applications in this vehicle when it
ously connected to the web. To Purchase” button and follow the is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result in
on-screen instructions. an accident involving in serious injury or
 Connect several devices at one time. death.
2. Log onto your owner site and click the link to
 Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop the AT&T portal to get setup.
or any other portable enabled media can Stolen Vehicle Assistance
connect over your private in-vehicle network. 3. For existing Connect Car customers: Press Description
the ASSIST button to be routed to an AT&T
 A high-speed, secured connection lets If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent who will assist you.
anyone on your private network access the Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
Web — great for working and relaxing. Once the Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased you can stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
change its name and the password by selecting help recover it. You should contact local law
How It Works enforcement immediately to file a stolen vehicle
the Wi-Fi App and pressing the “Setup Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides the vehicle Hotspot” button. You can also view the report. Once the report has been filed with law
passengers with an internet access hotspot in connected devices from the app screen by enforcement, you may notify SiriusXM
the vehicle, using the radio as an access point. pressing the “View Connected Devices” button. Guardian™ Customer Care that you have filed
The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi enabled in-vehicle the report. The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
devices (such as a laptop or any other portable NOTE: Care agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report
enabled media device) to wirelessly connect to A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not number issued by local law enforcement. The
the internet. Uconnect offers a complimentary required in order to purchase and use the Wi-Fi vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
3-month trial period that includes 1GB of total Hotspot. data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
MULTIMEDIA 451
and must be registered with SiriusXM 3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will NOTE:
Guardian™ with an active subscription that authenticate that you are the owner of the Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
includes this feature. In addition, the vehicle vehicle and contact the law enforcement dependent on a properly installed and opera-
must be within the United States. with whom you filed the stolen vehicle tional Uconnect system, cellular network avail-
How It Works report. ability that is compatible with the device in your
vehicle, and GPS network availability. Not all
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law 4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are available
enforcement as soon as possible. They will work with your local law enforcement to
everywhere at all times, particularly in remote or
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report. locate the vehicle. You will be contacted by
enclosed areas.
law enforcement if your vehicle is
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer recovered. While the investigation is Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Care that your vehicle has been stolen. ongoing, you should also contact your Lock Or Unlock Your Vehicle From Virtually
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care can be insurance company to inform it of the Anywhere Using Your Computer, Mobile Device,
reached by: situation. Or SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care App.
 US residents calling: 1-844-796-4827 Description
Requirements
 Canadian residents calling:  Vehicle must be properly equipped with the The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
1-877-324-9091 Uconnect System. you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
 distance. You can send a request to your vehicle
Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection in one of three ways:
number (as issued by your local law enforce- compatible with your device.
ment). If you have downloaded the Ucon-  Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
device
9
nect App, you can push the “Settings”  Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
button on your device, select “ASSIST Call Guardian™ and have an active subscription  From the your Owner’s Site
Centers,” and then select “SiriusXM Guard- that includes the applicable feature.
ian™ Customer Care” to make the call.  Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care
452 MULTIMEDIA
How It Works Your Owner’s Site website: 4. You will then be asked to enter your
Uconnect App: SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
same four-digit code established when you
1. Download the Uconnect App to a username and password you used when
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
compatible device and login using your activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Please enter your SiriusXM
username and password. system.
Guardian™ Security PIN.
2. To lock the doors, push the button with the NOTE:
5. A message will appear on the screen to let
Closed Lock icon; to unlock the doors push If you forgot your username or password, links
you know if the command has been sent to
the button with the Open Lock icon. are provided on the website to help you retrieve
your vehicle.
them.
3. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
2. If you have more than one vehicle SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care:
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you registered into your Owner’s Site, select the 1. If you need to unlock the doors of your
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™ vehicle you want to send the command by vehicle, contact SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™ clicking on its image along the top. Customer Care by:
Security PIN on the keypad. 3. Push the Door Lock icon next to your vehicle  US residents calling: 1-844-796-4827
4. The Uconnect App will confirm if your information.  Canadian residents calling:
command was sent (or not). 1-877-324-9091
5. It will take a little while for the command to 2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
go through to your vehicle. The time it takes Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
depends on a number of technical your identity by asking for your four-digit
conditions. SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
6. A message will let you know if the command 3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
was received by your vehicle. Security PIN, you can ask them to lock or
unlock your vehicle. The agent will send a
command to your vehicle to get the task
done.
MULTIMEDIA 453
NOTE: NOTE: entered your vehicle with the key, the engine
Anyone with access to your PIN may request The SiriusXM Guardian™ Care agents are will shut off automatically.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsi- trained to help you with unlocking of your door This remote function requires your vehicle to be
bility to protect your PIN appropriately. (for example, in an accidental lock-out). All other equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
Remote Services should be performed via your system.
Requirements
Owner’s Site or through the Uconnect App on You can set up notifications for your account
 Vehicle must be properly equipped with the your compatible device.
SiriusXM Guardian™ system. push notifications every time a command is
Remote Vehicle Start sent to Remote Start or cancel a Remote Start.
 Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/ How It Works
Use Your Computer or Wireless Device App to
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Start the Engine And Remotely Warm Up or Cool SiriusXM Guardian™ For Uconnect App:
If using the Uconnect App to command your
Down the Vehicle
vehicle, your device must be compatible and 1. Download the Uconnect App to a
be connected to an operable LTE (voice/ Description compatible device and login using your
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection. The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you username and password.
with the ability to start the engine on your
 Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM 2. To start the engine, press the “circular
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually any
Guardian™ and have an active subscription arrow.” To turn off an engine that has been
distance. Once started, the preset climate
that includes the applicable feature. remote started, press the circular arrow
controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool
 An ignition cycle is required for some remote down the interior before you have to get in. You with an X in the middle button.
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start can send a request to your vehicle in one of two 3. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
and Remote Door Lock/ Unlock if following a ways: SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
Remote Horn & Lights activation.  Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
9
same four-digit code established when your
 Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will device. registered your SiriusXM Guardian™
not be processed if the vehicle is in motion, system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
 From the Your Owner Site website.
the ignition key is on or during an emergency Security PIN on the keypad.
call. You can also send a command to turn off an
4. The Uconnect App will confirm if your
engine that has been started using Remote
command was sent (or not).
Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes if you have not
454 MULTIMEDIA
5. It will take a little while for the command to has been remote started press the Cancel send a request to your vehicle in one of two
go through to your vehicle. The time it takes button. ways:
depends on a number of technical  Using the Uconnect App from a compatible
4. You will then be asked to enter your
conditions. device.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
6. A message will let you know if the command same four-digit code established when you  From your Owner’s Site website.
was received by your vehicle. activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Please enter your SiriusXM If you want, you can set up, push notifications
Your Owner Site website: Guardian™ Security PIN. every time a command is sent to turn on the
horn and lights.
1. Log on to your Owner Site using the 5. A message will appear on the screen to let Uconnect App:
username and password you used when you know if the command was received by
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™ How It Works
your vehicle.
services in your vehicle. 1. Download the Uconnect App to a
NOTE: compatible device and login using your
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents username and password.
If you forgot your username or password, links
are not trained for Remote Vehicle Start
are provided on the website to help you retrieve 2. To turn on the horn and lights, press the
services.
them. Trumpet icon.
Remote Horn & Lights
2. If you have more than one vehicle 3. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the Can't Find Your Vehicle In The Parking Lot?
Sound The Horn And Flash The Lights On Your SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
vehicle you want to send the command by same four-digit code established when you
clicking on its image along the top. Vehicle To Locate It
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
Description
3. Beneath the image of a vehicle like yours, system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded Security PIN on the keypad.
you will see a row of icons. On your
or noisy parking area by activating the horn and
dashboard you will see remote command 4. The Uconnect App will confirm if your
lights. It may also help if you need to draw
icons. To start the engine, press the command was sent (or not).
attention to your vehicle for any reason. You can
“circular arrow,” to turn-off an engine that
MULTIMEDIA 455
5. It will take a little while for the command to NOTE: top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is
go through to your vehicle. The time it takes A quicker way to turn off your Remote Horn & provided as a convenience to you and does not
depends on a number of technical Lights would be to push the Panic button on substitute for your regular maintenance to your
conditions. your Key Fob if you are near the vehicle. vehicle.
6. A message will let you know if the command 4. You will then be asked to enter your In order to provide the monthly Vehicle Health
was received by your vehicle. SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the Report, the Uconnect System in your vehicle
same four-digit code established when you may collect and transmit vehicle data to
Your Owner Site website: activated your SiriusXM Guardian™ SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your
system). Please enter your SiriusXM vehicle’s health and performance, your
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site website using vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
the username and password you used Guardian™ Security PIN.
features in your vehicle, and other data.
when registering your SiriusXM Guardian™ 5. A message will appear on the screen to let This data collection and transmission begins
system. you know if the command was received by when you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will
 If you forgot your username or password, your vehicle. continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM
links are provided on the website to help Guardian™ subscription unless and until you
you retrieve them. NOTE:
call SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed
2. If you have more than one vehicle us to deactivate your Uconnect system at:
to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the the surroundings when using this feature. You  US residents call: 1-844-796-4827
vehicle you want to send the command by are responsible for compliance with local laws,  Canadian residents call: 1-877-324-9091
clicking on its image along the top. rules and ordinances in the location of your
vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights. Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more 9
3. Beneath the image of a vehicle like yours,
information, located at
you will see a row of icons. To turn on the Monthly Vehicle Health Report www.driveuconnect.com/sirius-xm-guardian/
horn and lights, press the Trumpet icon. To
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect privacy.html (US Residents) or
turn off the horn and lights, press the
service through which a summary of the www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
Trumpet icon again.
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will
be sent to you every month so you can stay on
456 MULTIMEDIA
Vehicle Health Alert Amazon Alexa® Skill — If Equipped An activate subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to is required. To use Amazon Alexa®, first,
senses a problem under the hood with one of command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa®! register for SiriusXM Guardian™ using the
your vehicle’s key systems. For further following steps:
With Amazon Alexa®, you can connect to your
information, go to your Owner’s Site website. vehicle and remotely access key services and 1. Press the apps icon on the bottom bar of
NOTE: features. your in-vehicle touchscreen.
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
register, and activate services. During this Navigation, you can send a destination directly
list of apps.
process you will be asked to provide an email to your vehicle using Alexa®.
address to which the reports will be sent. If you need assistance, you can always ask 3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
Alexa® for help, or complete a list of commands SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped by saying: “Alexa®, ask <vehicle name> for help who will activate services in your vehicle, or
Your vehicle will send you notifications to with my car.” select “Enter Email” to activate on the web.
remind you when services are needed, or to Here are a few of the many questions you can
alert you of other important information, such Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle
ask Alexa®:
as recall notices. When you receive a to Amazon Alexa®:
 “Alexa®, ask Jeep Wrangler to lock my car.”
notification through your touchscreen, press OK
1. Download the Amazon Alexa® app on your
to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to  “Alexa®, ask Dodge Challenger to start my mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer car.”
Care agent. 2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to
 “Alexa®, ask Chrysler Pacifica to drive to SKILLS.
NOTE: 1000 Chrysler Dr, Auburn Hills, MI.”
Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up 3. Search for Uconnect, then tap Enable.
screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the  “Alexa®, what’s the traffic like in Detroit?”
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the
Mailbox, you can reopen messages, or delete
messages.
MULTIMEDIA 457
5. Link Uconnect to the Skill by tapping LINK  Speed Alert  Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
ACCOUNT. remote lock button in the app and entering
Receive a notification whenever your car your security pin.
6. Log In using your Owner Account exceeds a speed limit you set.
credentials. This will be the same user  Valet Alert  Remote start or stop your vehicle.
name and password you used when
Valet Alerts lets you know if and when your  View important vehicle stats, such as fuel
registering for Uconnect Access.
vehicle is driven outside a quarter–mile level, vehicle location, tire pressure warning,
7. CONFIRM account to return to the Uconnect radius of a valet drop-off zone. and more.
Skill.
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
You can now begin using the Uconnect Skill on channel for SmartWatch integration.
SmartWatch integration puts the Uconnect app
Alexa®! right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear. Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™ Account
Drive Alerts— If Equipped To get started, follow these steps: How To Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Family Alerts helps promote safer driving and 1. Download the Uconnect app from the App Account
gives you peace of mind when your loved ones Store® or Google Play. To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
are out on the road. You can set boundary press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
limits, monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your 2. Log onto the app from your smartphone
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use the using the username and password you
Uconnect app to set alerts: created when you first set up your account. NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
 Boundary Alert 3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM
connected through Bluetooth®.
Guardian™ Care to remove your personal data.
9
Boundary Alert lets you know the moment
your vehicle is driven either out of or into a 4. The Uconnect app should appear on your
For further assistance call SiriusXM Guardian™
geographic boundary that you set. SmartWatch.
Customer Care:
 Curfew Alert
Once the app is downloaded on your  US residents call: 1-844-796-4827
Curfew Alerts lets you know when your car is SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features:
 Canadian residents call: 1-877-324-9091
being driven outside of the curfew time.
458 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS Connected Services SOS FAQs 2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
does it cover towing or other expenses
For additional information about SiriusXM 1. What happens if I accidentally push the SOS incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
Guardian™ if you have an active subscription, Call button on the mirror? You have 10 however your new vehicle may include
push the ASSIST button on the rear view mirror seconds after pushing the SOS Call button Roadside Assistance Call services.
and then select SiriusXM Guardian™ Call on to cancel the call. To cancel the call, either
your in-vehicle touchscreen to contact SiriusXM push the SOS Call button again, or press Connected Services Send & Go FAQs
Guardian™. Your call will be directed to a the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
SiriusXM Guardian™ agent or held in a queue touchscreen. 1. How long does it take to send the route and
until an agent is available or go to your Owner’s destination to my vehicle? Depending on
2. What type of information is sent when I use various conditions, it can take up to three
Site website. If you do not have an active
the SOS Call button from my vehicle? minutes for the request to get through to
subscription, push the ASSIST button and click
Certain vehicle information, such as make your vehicle.
the Activate button to activate services.
and model, is transmitted along with the
You can also phone SiriusXM Guardian™ last known GPS location. 2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle?
directly by: Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start
 US calling: 1-844-796-4827
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You the engine, the pop-up message stating that
can use the SOS Call button to make a call you have a new route will appear. There is
 Canada calling: 1-877-324-9091 if you or someone else needs emergency an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel
assistance. the route if selected.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Business Hours:
Central Time Connected Services Roadside Assistance 3. Can I select a different route than the most
 Monday through Friday – 7:00 am to 10:00 FAQs recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
pm you enter the vehicle, and start the engine,
1. What is the phone number for roadside the pop-message has a “Locations” option.
 Saturday – 8:00 am to 9:00 pm assistance call? The phone number is: Once “Locations” is selected, you can
 US: 1-800-521-2779 choose from a list of recently sent
 Canada: 1-800-363-4869 destinations.
MULTIMEDIA 459
Connected Services Vehicle Finder FAQs Connected Services Stolen Vehicle court order telling SiriusXM Guardian™ to
Assistance FAQs do so. We will also provide the service for
1. Can someone else locate my vehicle? Your FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you
vehicle may be located by anyone who has 1. What to do if my vehicle is stolen? First, call have purchased through them.
your PIN and access to your account. It is local law enforcement as soon as possible.
your responsibility to guard your PIN They will work with you to file a stolen 3. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
accordingly. See the Uconnect and vehicle report. Then SiriusXM Guardian™ After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for Customer Care can be contacted by: Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle
more information.  US calling: 1-844-796-4827 report, the agent will work together with law
enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and  Canada calling: 1-877-324-9091 your vehicle is recovered, you will be
flash the lights? Depending on various contacted by law enforcement.
conditions, it can take three minutes or Inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
more for the request to get through to your that your vehicle has been stolen and that 4. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my
vehicle. you have filed a stolen vehicle report with insurance rates? Some insurance providers
law enforcement. SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus- offer lower rates on vehicles equipped with
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I tomer Care will help you through the pro- systems that can deter auto theft. When
turn them on? If you are close enough to the cess. shopping for insurance, be sure to inform
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off the insurance provider of your SiriusXM
the horn and lights by pressing the red 2. Can someone locate my vehicle? To
enhance your privacy, and the privacy of Guardian™ services subscription, to find
“Panic” button. out if the insurance provider can offer you a
others using your vehicle, a stolen vehicle
police report is required for you to activate lower rate.
this service. You must involve local law
9
NOTE:
enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™ Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
locate your vehicle. We may also locate the companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
vehicle for other law enforcement or insurance product. You are responsible for
government agencies, subject to a valid obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle
and yourself.
460 MULTIMEDIA
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/ to remotely command your vehicle. Other vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
Unlock FAQs operating systems may be supported in the the horn and lights by pressing the red
future. Panic button. Otherwise, Remote Horn &
1. How long does it take to unlock or lock the Lights will continue for 20 seconds.
door? Depending on various conditions, it 5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow? The
can take up to three minutes or more for Uconnect App relies on a mobile network 4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
the request to get to your vehicle. connection from your device to send Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
commands to your vehicle which must have designed to work on most devices with the
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door (data) network connection. If either your The capabilities of these devices allow us to
more quickly, however its range is limited device or your vehicle is in an area with remotely command your vehicle. Other
and your Uconnect App comes in handy for below average coverage, it may take longer operating systems may be supported in the
these and other situations. to log in and send commands. future.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights Connected Services Account FAQs
People sometimes lose their mobile
devices, which is why security measures FAQs
1. How do I register for my SiriusXM
have been engineered into the Uconnect 1. How long does it take to sound my horn and Guardian™ account? Push the ASSIST
App. Asking for your username, password flash the lights? Depending on various button on your rearview mirror. Press the
and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are conditions, it can take three minutes or Activate button on the touchscreen. Select
required for the activation of Remote more for the request to get through to your “Call Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
services through your mobile device. It is vehicle. Guardian™ Customer Care agent or select
your responsibility to protect your “Enter Email” to activate on the web. If you
passwords and PINs. 2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect choose to enter your email address, you
App? Your key fob will sound the horn and will then confirm your email address. You
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the flash the lights quicker; however its range is will receive an email with an activation link
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is limited. that will be good for 72 hours. Once you
compatible with most devices with the
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I click the activation link, you will be
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
turn them on? If you are close enough to the prompted to fill out your information and
The capabilities of these devices allows us
MULTIMEDIA 461
accept Terms and Conditions. Then, you PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s certain Apps and services. For more
will be directed to the SiriusXM Guardian™ Site. information, please contact SiriusXM
home page to complete your profile and You can also call SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus- Guardian™:
demo the remote services. tomer Care:  US call: 1-844-796-4827
2. Why do I need an email address? Without  US call: 1-844-796-4827  Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
an email address, customers cannot
register for SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers  Canada call: 1-877-324-9091 8. Can I access every App and service while
need to register so they can subscribe to driving? No, some applications and services
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
receive additional services and create a are not available while driving. For your own
payment account address? Your SiriusXM
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for safety, it is not possible to use some of the
Guardian™ Payment Account address can
remote command requests. touchscreen features while the vehicle is in
be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
motion (e.g. key pad).
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™ Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in
security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM your vehicle. To update online: login to your 9. What happens when my subscription
Guardian™ Security PIN during the Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile > comes up for renewal? If you have added a
registration process. The SiriusXM SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account. credit card to your account information,
Guardian™ Security PIN will be required to your subscription will be automatically
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
authenticate you when accessing your renewed for a term length in accordance
profile? Your name, home address, phone
account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or with the service plan that you have selected
number, email address and SiriusXM
performing any remote services, such as at the then current subscription rate and on
Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn & every renewal date thereafter, unless you
online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your 9
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start. cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM
Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit
Guardian™ Care. If you have not added a
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™ your personal information. Make your edits
credit card to your account, SiriusXM
security PIN? If you’ve already activated and click Save.
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter
services and forgot your SiriusXM in advance of your expiration date to remind
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the you that your subscription is ending soon.
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
come with an included trial period for
462 MULTIMEDIA
10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™ date. When your subscription is about to ex- 16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM pire, you will receive an email or letter noti- Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your fication. you’ll want to remove your account
Owner’s Site and then update your information. This process removes all
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™ personal information, returns the Uconnect
entire subscription? Pro rata refunds are
customer web portal. system to its original factory settings,
provided from the date of cancellation for
removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ services
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact annual plans or longer. Please see the
and account information. To remove your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms &
account information from the Uconnect
pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview Conditions for refunds related to billing
system, contact SiriusXM Guardian™
mirror. plans of other lengths and other circum-
Customer Care at:
stances. Or, for more information, call
12. How do I update my credit card  US call: 1-844-796-4827
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care at:
information? Login to your Owner’s Site,
and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM  US call: 1-844-796-4827  Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
Guardian™ Payment Account, or call  Canada call: 1-877-324-9091 17. What if I forgot to remove my account
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care: information before I returned my lease
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it
 US call: 1-844-796-4827 vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM
expires? Yes. If you have an annual
Guardian™ Customer Care:
 Canada call: 1-877-324-9091 subscription, your subscription will be
canceled the day you cancel. If you have a  US call: 1-844-796-4827
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
monthly subscription, your subscription will  Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM
be canceled on the last day of the month in
Guardian™ Customer Care at: 18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
which you choose to cancel. For other
 US call: 1-844-796-4827 subscriptions, please call SiriusXM data) or 4G (data) network connection
Guardian™ Customer Care at: compatible with my device is temporarily
 Canada call: 1-877-324-9091
unavailable? The SOS Call and ASSIST
 US call: 1-844-796-4827
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and buttons will NOT function if you are not
choose a subscription to view its expiration  Canada call: 1-877-324-9091 connected to an operable LTE (voice/data)
MULTIMEDIA 463
or 3G or 4G (data) network. Services that

required your smartphone only direct calls
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN help to ensure that nobody can start
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
to Roadside Assistance Call may be your vehicle if they happen to find your Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
functioning if you have an operable device. being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
network. noisy performance from your radio. This
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle condition may be lessened or eliminated by
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start using the App? No. Driving your vehicle still relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
FAQs requires the keys to be in the vehicle. The condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
Remote Start feature simply starts the radio performance does not satisfactorily
1. How long does it take to remotely start my engine to warm up or cool down the interior “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
vehicle? Depending on various conditions, before you arrive. recommended that the radio volume be turned
it can take three minutes or more for the down or off during mobile phone operation
request to get through to your vehicle. 5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command?
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel Regulatory And Safety Information
App? Your key fob will remote start your Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop USA/CANADA
vehicle more quickly. However its range is the vehicle.
limited. For example, when you are leaving Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
the stadium after the game, you can use the 6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the The radiated output power of the internal
Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
and have the inside of your vehicle designed to work on most devices with the frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
comfortable by the time you get to it. Apple® and Android™ operating systems. wireless radio will be used in such a manner
The capabilities of these devices allow us to that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the 9
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless remotely command your vehicle. Other human body.
device? People sometimes lose their operating systems may be supported in the The internal wireless radio operates within
wireless devices, which is why security future. guidelines found in radio frequency safety
measures have been engineered into the
standards and recommendations, which reflect
Uconnect App. Asking for your username,
the consensus of the scientific community.
464 MULTIMEDIA
The radio manufacturer believes the internal Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR RF Exposure Requirements
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The dÌnnovation, Science and Economic This equipment complies with Canada radiation
level of energy emitted is far less than the Development applicables aux appareils radio exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée environment. This equipment should be
devices such as mobile phones. However, the aux deux conditions suivantes: installed and operated with minimum distance
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some 20 cm (8 in) between the radiator and your
situations or environments, such as aboard body.
brouillage, et
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you Déclaration d’exposition aux radiations
are encouraged to ask for authorization before 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
turning on the wireless radio. brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
d’exposition aux rayonnements ISED établies
The following regulatory statement applies to all brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
pour un environnement non contrôlé. Cet
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this mettre le fonctionnement.
équipement doit être installé et utilisé avec un
vehicle: minimum de 20 cm (8 in) de distance entre la
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC source de rayonnement et votre corps
siguientes dos condiciones:
Economic Development Canada license-exempt 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no NOTE:
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the cause interferencia perjudicial y Changes or modifications not expressly
following two conditions: approved by the party responsible for compli-
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar ance could void the user’s authority to operate
1. This device may not cause harmful cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que the equipment.
interference, and pueda causar su operación no deseada.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
MULTIMEDIA 465
NOTE:  If this equipment does cause harmful inter-

ference to radio or television reception,
 This equipment has been tested and found to which can be determined by turning the
comply with the limits for a Class B digital equipment off and on, the user is encour-
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. aged to try to correct the interference by one
These limits are designed to provide reason- or more of the following measures:
able protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment a. Increase the separation between the
generates, uses and can radiate radio equipment and receiver.
frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions, b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
may cause harmful interference to radio rienced radio technician for help.
communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
9
466
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
 If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
FOR YOUR VEHICLE you call for an appointment. authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
Prepare For The Appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE  If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to The manufacturer and its authorized dealers
have the right papers with you. Take your the concern, you may contact the manufac-
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We turer's customer center.
warranty folder. All work to be performed may want you to be happy with our products and
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss services. Any communication to the manufacturer's
additional charges with the service manager. customer center should include the following
Warranty service must be done by an
Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle's information:
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
service history. This can often provide a clue to  Owner's name and address
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
the current problem.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most  Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
Prepare A List concerned that you get prompt and high quality and office)
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,  Authorized dealer name
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your special tools, and the latest information to
 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
maintenance log, let the service advisor know. ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.  Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Be Reasonable With Requests
This is why you should always talk to an
If you list a number of items and you must have authorized dealer service manager first. Most
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the matters can be resolved with this process.
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 467
FCA US LLC Customer Center Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
P.O. Box 21–8004
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 To assist customers who have hearing
If you have any questions about the service
Phone: (877) 426-5337 difficulties, the manufacturer has installed
contract, call the manufacturer's Service
special Telecommunication Devices for the
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center Contract National Customer Hotline at
Deaf (TDD) equipment at its customer center.
1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call
P.O. Box 1621 Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
(800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 has access to a TDD or a conventional
French).
teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
communicate with the manufacturer by dialing
(800) 387-9983 French contract you may have purchased from another
1-800-380-CHRY.
In Mexico Contact manufacturer. If you require service after the
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 require assistance can use the special needs
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
and contact the person listed in those
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
Mexico, D. F. documents.
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300 Bell Relay Service operator. We appreciate that you have made a major
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568 investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
Service Contract authorized dealer has also made a major
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands investment in facilities, tools, and training to
You may have purchased a service contract for
FCA Caribbean LLC a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost assure that you are absolutely delighted with
P.O. Box 191857 of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's the ownership experience.
San Juan 00919-1857 New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
Mopar Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY 10
Phone: (877) 426-5337
vehicle extended protection plans authorized,
Fax: (787) 782-3345 endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
468 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING! REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at (888)
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines In The 50 United States And
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go
only), some of its constituents, and certain Washington, D.C.
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemi-
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
cals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other reproduc- defect that could cause a crash or cause Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
tive harm. In addition, certain fluids con- injury or death, you should immediately D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
tained in vehicles and certain products of inform the National Highway Traffic information about motor vehicle safety
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals Safety Administration (NHTSA) in from http://www.safercar.gov.
known to the State of California to cause can- addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
cer and birth defects, or other reproductive In Canada
harm.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
If you believe that your vehicle has a
may open an investigation, and if it finds
safety defect, you should contact the
that a safety defect exists in a group of
WARRANTY INFORMATION vehicles, it may order a recall and
Customer Service Department
See the Warranty Information for the terms and immediately. Canadian customers who
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable wish to report a safety defect to the
cannot become involved in individual
to this vehicle and market. Canadian government should contact
problems between you, an authorized
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
MOPAR PARTS dealer or FCA US LLC.
Investigations and Recalls at (800)
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories 333-0510 or go to wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/
are available from an authorized dealer. They Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP.
are recommended for your vehicle in order to
help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 469
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Owner's Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
To order the following manuals, you may use
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. with the assistance of service and engineering
either the website or the phone numbers listed
These practical manuals make it easy for specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
below.
students and technicians to find and fix LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
Service Manuals problems on computer-controlled vehicle emergency and maintenance procedures as
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide systems and features. They show exactly how to well as specifications, capabilities and safety
the information that students and professional find and correct problems the first time, using tips. To access your Owner’s Information online,
technicians need in diagnosing/ step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability please visitmopar.com
troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete list of all tools and equipment. Information, call Tech Authority toll free at:
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
 1-800-890-4038 (US)
system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,  1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
diagrams, and charts.
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
 www.techauthority.com (US)
10
470
INDEX
A Side Air Bags ............................................ 134 Apple CarPlay ....................................... 408, 413
About Your Brakes .........................................324 Transporting Pets ..................................... 153 Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 106
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Air Bag Light.................................. 87, 131, 154 Audio Settings ............................................... 386
Control) ..........................................................178 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Auto Down Power Windows ..............................60
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............297 Filter) ............................................................ 292 Auto Up Power Windows ..................................61
Adding Fuel ....................................................223 Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 292 Automatic Headlights .......................................41
Adding Washing Fluid ....................................290 Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 292, 293 Automatic High Beams.....................................41
Additives, Fuel ...............................................327 Air Conditioning............................................. 293 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............57
Adjust Air Conditioning Filter ..............................58, 293 Automatic Transmission....................... 165, 301
Forward ....................................................... 31 Air Conditioning System ................................ 292 Adding Fluid ..................................... 301, 331
Rearward..................................................... 31 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................58 Autostick ................................................... 167
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................405 Air Pressure Fluid And Filter Change............................. 301
Air Bag ...........................................................132 Tires ......................................................... 310 Fluid Change............................................. 301
Advance Front Air Bag ...............................132 Alarm Fluid Level Check...................................... 301
Air Bag Operation ......................................133 Arm The System ..........................................20 Fluid Type ........................................ 301, 331
Air Bag Warning Light ................................131 Disarm The System .....................................21 Special Additives ...................................... 301
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................134 Security Alarm ...................................... 20, 90 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........73
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 138, 278 Alexa ............................................................. 456 Auxiliary Power Outlet ......................................73
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................278 Alterations/Modifications Axle Fluid....................................................... 331
Front Air Bag .............................................132 Vehicle.........................................................10 Axle Lubrication ............................................ 331
If Deployment Occurs ................................137 Amazon Alexa ............................................... 456
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................134 Android Auto ........................................ 408, 410 B
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............140 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 297, 329 Back-Up Camera ........................................... 222
Maintenance .............................................140 Disposal ................................................... 298 Battery ................................................... 88, 290
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............131 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................99 Charging System Light .................................88
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................... 90, 91, 94 Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................12
471
Belts, Seat .....................................................154 Certification Label......................................... 225 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 314
Blind Spot Monitoring ....................................107 Changing A Flat Tire ............................. 262, 302 Connector
Bluetooth Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 303 UCI ...............................................................72
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .............72
Or Audio Device After Pairing ................398 Light)................................................................97 Console ............................................................76
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................293 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 153 Floor ............................................................76
Brake Assist System ......................................100 Checks, Safety .............................................. 153 Contract, Service ........................................... 467
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................100 Child Restraint .............................................. 141 Controls ........................................................ 377
Brake Fluid ....................................................331 Child Restraints Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 298
Brake System ...................................... 299, 324 Booster Seats ........................................... 144 Cooling System .................................... 289, 296
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................324 Child Seat Installation .............................. 151 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 297
Fluid Check ...............................................331 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 149 Coolant Level ..........................290, 296, 298
Master Cylinder .........................................299 Infant And Child Restraints....................... 142 Cooling Capacity ....................................... 329
Warning Light .............................................. 87 LATCH Positions ....................................... 145 Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 298
Brakes ...........................................................299 Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 147 Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 296
Brightness, Interior Lights................................ 43 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 145 Inspection ................................................. 298
Bulbs, Light....................................................155 Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 143 Points To Remember ................................ 298
Seating Positions ...................................... 144 Pressure Cap ............................................ 298
C Child Safety Locks ...........................................27 Radiator Cap............................................. 298
Camera ..........................................................222 Clean Air Gasoline......................................... 326 Selection Of Coolant
Camera, Rear ................................................222 Cleaning (Antifreeze) .........................297, 329, 330
Capacities, Fluid ............................................329 Wheels ..................................................... 315 Corrosion Protection ..................................... 320
Caps, Filler Climate Control ................................................48 Cruise Light ......................................................96
Oil (Engine) ...................................... 287, 291 Automatic ....................................................51 Cupholders .......................................................76
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................298 Manual ........................................................49 Customer Assistance .................................... 466
Car Washes ...................................................321 Clutch ........................................................... 299 Customer Programmable
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................. 153, 328 Fluid ......................................................... 299 Features ......................................333, 344, 356
CD..................................................................390 Coin Holder ......................................................76 Cybersecurity ................................................ 332 11
Cellular Phone ...............................................463 Cold Weather Operation ............................... 157
472
D Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........73 Overheating .............................................. 273

Daytime Running Lights ................................... 40 Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM).................... 101 Starting ..................................................... 156
Dealer Service ...............................................291 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ..... 176 Engine Oil Viscosity ....................................... 291
Defroster, Rear Window................................... 47 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 101 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart.............................. 291
Defroster, Windshield ....................................154 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light.........88 Enhanced Accident Response
De-Icer, Remote Start ...................................... 18 Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 272 Feature ................................................ 138, 278
Deleting A Phone ...........................................398 Emergency, In Case Of Ethanol.......................................................... 326
Dimmer Switch Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 238 Exhaust Gas Cautions .......................... 153, 328
Headlight..................................................... 40 Jacking ............................................ 262, 302 Exhaust System ................................... 153, 295
Dipsticks Jump Starting ........................................... 270 Exterior Lighting ...............................................40
Oil (Engine) ................................................289 Overheating .............................................. 273 Exterior Lights ........................................ 40, 155
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................276 Tow Hooks ................................................ 277
Disc Drive ......................................................390 Towing ...................................................... 276 F
Disconnecting ................................................398 Emission Control System Maintenance ...........97 Family Alerts ................................................. 457
Disposal Engine........................................................... 287 Filters
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................298 Air Cleaner ................................................ 292 Air Cleaner ................................................ 292
Disturb ...........................................................403 Break-In Recommendations ..................... 158 Air Conditioning ...........................................58
Door Ajar................................................... 88, 89 Checking Oil Level .................................... 289 Engine Oil ........................................ 292, 330
Door Ajar Light .......................................... 88, 89 Compartment ........................................... 287 Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 292
Door Locks ...................................................... 26 Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 330 Flashers
Drag & Drop ...................................................373 Cooling ............................................ 289, 296 Hazard Warning ........................................ 238
Driver Memory Presets ..................................379 Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 153, 328 Turn Signals ................................ 42, 96, 155
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 28 Fails To Start ............................................ 156 Flash-To-Pass ...................................................41
Driving ...........................................................234 Flooded, Starting ...................................... 156 Flat Tire Changing ......................................... 262
Fuel Requirements ................................... 325 Flat Tire Stowage .......................................... 264
E Jump Starting ........................................... 270 Flooded Engine Starting ................................ 156
Electric Brake Control System .......................100 Oil ........................................... 291, 329, 330 Floor Console ...................................................76
Anti-Lock Brake System............................... 99 Oil Filler Cap .................................... 287, 291 Fluid Capacities ............................................ 329
Electric Park Brake ........................................159 Oil Filter .................................................... 292 Fluid Leaks.................................................... 155
Electric Parking Brake ...................................159 Oil Selection .................................... 291, 329
473
Fluid Level Checks Gear Ranges ................................................. 163 Holder, Coin .....................................................76
Engine Oil ..................................................289 Gear Selector Override ................................. 274 Holder, Cup ......................................................76
Fluid, Brake ...................................................331 General Information...................................... 374 Hood Prop ........................................................66
Fluids And Lubricants ....................................330 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 323 Hood Release...................................................66
Fog Lights ........................................................ 42 Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 227
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 28 GVWR............................................................ 225 I
Forward Collision Warning ................... 107, 112 Ignition .............................................................15
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................275 H Switch ..........................................................15
Fuel ...............................................................325 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 238 Indentifying ................................................... 371
Adding .......................................................223 Head Restraints ...............................................33 Inside Rearview Mirror ........................... 38, 238
Additives ...................................................327 Head Rests ......................................................33 Instrument Cluster ....................................81, 96
Clean Air ....................................................326 Headlights Descriptions.................................................96
Ethanol ......................................................326 Automatic ....................................................41 Engine Oil Reset ..........................................81
Gasoline ....................................................325 Automatic High Beam ..................................41 Menu Items .................................................82
Gauge.......................................................... 91 Cleaning ................................................... 321 Instrument Cluster Display ...............................80
Materials Added ........................................327 Delay ...........................................................42 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 322
Methanol ...................................................326 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........40 Interior Appearance Care .............................. 322
Octane Rating ................................. 325, 330 Lights On Reminder .....................................41 Interior Lights ...................................................43
Requirements ...........................................325 Passing ........................................................41 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ..................45
Specifications............................................330 Switch ..........................................................40 Introduction ....................................................... 8
Fuses .............................................................255 Time Delay...................................................42 Inverter
Heated Mirrors.................................................40 Power...........................................................74
G High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Gasoline, (Fuel) .............................................325 Switch ..............................................................40 J
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................326 Hill Descent Control ...................................... 105 Jack Location ................................................ 262
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................326 Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 105 Jack Operation ............................262, 264, 302
Gauges Hill Start Assist.............................................. 106 Jacking And Tire Changing ............................ 262
Fuel ............................................................. 91 Hitches Jacking Instructions ...................................... 264 11
Trailer Towing ........................................... 228 Jump Starting ................................................ 270
474
K Life Of Tires................................................... 312 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........91

Key Fob Liftgate ..................................................... 67, 68 Park .............................................................96
Arm The Alarm............................................. 20 Closing.........................................................68 Passing ........................................................41
Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 21 Opening .......................................................67 Seat Belt Reminder .....................................89
Keyless Entry............................................... 23 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......................47 Security Alarm .............................................90
Programming Additional Key Fobs ....... 14, 19 Light Bulbs .................................................... 155 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 117
Remote Keyless Entry ................................. 11 Lights ............................................................ 155 Traction Control ........................................ 104
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Air Bag ...................................... 87, 131, 154 Turn Signals ................................ 42, 96, 155
Entry) ............................................................... 12 Automatic Headlights ..................................41 Vanity Mirror ................................................40
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Automatic High Beam ..................................41 Warning Instrument Cluster
Entry) ............................................................... 14 Brake Assist Warning ............................... 104 Descriptions .....................................89, 96
Keyless Enter-N-Go .......................................... 23 Brake Warning .............................................87 Loading Vehicle ............................................. 225
Enter The Trunk ........................................... 23 Cruise ..........................................................96 Tires .......................................................... 306
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ............................ 23 Daytime Running .........................................40 Locks
Passive Entry ............................................... 23 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................40 Child Protection ...........................................27
Passive Entry Programming......................... 23 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Power Door ..................................................22
Remote Control ........................................... 23 Indicator ..................................................89 Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 117
Unlock From The Driver’s Side .................... 23 Exterior ..................................................... 155 Lubrication, Body .......................................... 293
Unlock From The Passenger’s Side ............. 23 Fog ..............................................................42 Lug Nuts........................................................ 324
Keyless Entry ................................................... 11 Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 238 Luggage Carrier ................................................77
Keys................................................................. 11 Headlight Switch..........................................40
Replacement ........................................ 14, 19 Headlights ...................................................40 M
Headlights On Reminder .............................41 Maintenance ....................................................66
L High Beam ...................................................40 Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 290
Lane Change And Turn Signals ........................ 42 High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................40 Maintenance Schedule ................................. 279
LaneSense ....................................................218 Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 105 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................125 Instrument Cluster.......................................40 Engine) ......................................................91, 97
Latches ..........................................................155 Intensity Control ..........................................43 Manual
Lead Free Gasoline........................................325 Interior .........................................................43 Service ...................................................... 469
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................155 Lights On Reminder .....................................41
475
Manual Transmission .......................... 163, 300 Where To? — City Center........................... 426 Recommendation ............................ 291, 329
Fluid Level Check ......................................300 Where To? — Go Home ............................. 425 Viscosity ........................................... 291, 329
Frequency Of Fluid Change .......................300 Where To? — Main Menu .......................... 415 Onboard Diagnostic System .............................96
Lubricant Selection ...................................300 Where To? — Phone .................................. 426 Operating Navigation .................................... 415
Shift Speeds ..............................................163 Where To? — Point of Interest .................. 421 Operating Precautions .....................................96
Master Cylinder Where To? — Point on Map ....................... 424 Operator Manual
Brakes .......................................................299 Where To? — Trips .................................... 423 Owner's Manual ....................................9, 469
Media Mode ........................................ 389, 390 Navigation Mode ........................................... 415 Outside Rearview Mirrors .................................38
Methanol .......................................................326 Navigation, Emergency ................................. 439 Overheating, Engine ...................................... 273
Mirrors Navigation, Information Menu ...................... 437
Heated ........................................................ 40 New Vehicle Break-In Period ......................... 158 P
Outside ........................................................ 38 Paint Care ..................................................... 320
Rearview ............................................38, 238 O Parking Brake ............................................... 159
Vanity .......................................................... 40 Occupant Restraints ..................................... 123 ParkSense
Modifications/Alterations Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 325, 330 Front And Rear.......................................... 194
Vehicle ........................................................ 10 Oil Change Indicator ........................................81 ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................ 204
Monitor, Tire Pressure System.......................117 Reset ...........................................................81 ParkSense System, Rear ............................... 191
Mopar Parts ...................................................468 Oil Filter, Change .......................................... 292 Personalized Main Menu Bar ............... 373, 441
Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 292 Pets ............................................................... 153
N Oil Pressure Light .............................................89 Phone Mode .................................................. 393
Navigation Oil, Engine ............................................ 291, 330 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 306
Before Route Guidance .............................427 Capacity.................................................... 329 Point of Interest
Information ...............................................437 Change Interval ........................................ 291 All Points of Interest.................................. 422
Map Updates.............................................440 Checking................................................... 289 Restaurants .............................................. 423
View Map...................................................428 Dipstick .................................................... 289 Spell Name ............................................... 422
View Map — Main Menu ............................428 Disposal ................................................... 292 Power
View Map — Settings .................................429 Filter ................................................ 292, 330 Brakes ...................................................... 324
View Map — Settings — Guidance ..............434 Filter Disposal........................................... 292 Door Locks...................................................22 11
View Map — Settings — Map Setup ...........431 Materials Added To .................................. 292 Inverter ........................................................74
Where To? .................................................415 Pressure Warning Light ...............................89 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet).................73
476
Sunroof ....................................................... 64 Refrigerant .................................................... 293 S

Windows ...................................................... 60 Registering SiriusXM Guardian ..................... 442 Safety ............................................................ 374
Power Seats Reminder, Lights On ........................................41 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ........................ 154
Forward ....................................................... 31 Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 124 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...................... 155
Rearward..................................................... 31 Remote Control Safety Defects, Reporting ............................. 468
Recline ........................................................ 31 Starting System ...........................................16 Safety Features ............................................. 374
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts...................128 Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ... 451, 460 Safety Information, Tire................................. 302
Preparation For Jacking .................................263 Remote Features, Horn And Lights ............... 454 Safety Tips .................................................... 153
Presets ..........................................................379 Remote Features, Starting ................... 453, 463 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...................................... 153
Pretensioners Remote Keyless Entry ...............................11, 12 Satellite Radio............................................... 380
Seat Belts..................................................129 Arm The Alarm .............................................20 Saved Radio Stations .................................... 379
Disarm The Alarm ........................................21 Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 279
R Keyless Enter-N-Go ......................................23 Seat Belt Reminder ..........................................89
Radial Ply Tires ..............................................310 Programming Additional Key Fobs ........14, 19 Seat Belts ............................................ 124, 154
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............298 Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ......... 376 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 128
Radio Remote Starting Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Presets ......................................................379 Uconnect Customer Programmable Anchorage ............................................ 128
Radio Controls ...............................................377 Features ..................................................18 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 129
Radio Mode ...................................................377 Uconnect Settings .......................................18 Child Restraints ........................................ 141
Radio Operation .................................. 377, 463 Remote Starting System ..................................16 Energy Management Feature ................... 129
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ........................... 46 Removing SiriusXM Guardian ....................... 457 Front Seat ...............................124, 125, 126
Rear Camera .................................................222 Replacement Keys .................................... 14, 19 Inspection ................................................. 154
Rear Cross Path .............................................110 Replacement Tires ........................................ 312 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 126
Rear ParkSense System ...................... 191, 194 Reporting Safety Defects .............................. 468 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 127
Rear Window Defroster ................................... 47 Restraints, Child ........................................... 141 Lap/Shoulder Belts................................... 125
Rear Wiper/Washer ......................................... 47 Restraints, Head ..............................................33 Operating Instructions .............................. 126
Rearview Mirror ............................................... 38 Roadside Assistance ............................ 447, 458 Pregnant Women ...................................... 128
Reclining Front Seats ...................................... 29 Roll Over Warning .............................................. 9 Pretensioners ........................................... 129
Recreational Towing ......................................233 Roof Type Carrier .............................................77 Rear Seat.................................................. 125
Reformulated Gasoline ..................................326 Rotation, Tires .............................................. 317 Reminder .................................................. 124
477
Seat Belt Pretensioner ..............................129 Sirius Satellite Radio..................................... 380 Speed Control
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................124 Favorites................................................... 384 Distance Setting (ACC Only) ...................... 178
Untwisting Procedure ................................127 Replay ...................................................... 383 Mode Setting (ACC Only) ........................... 178
Seat Belts Maintenance ................................322 SiriusXM Traffic ........................................ 441 Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...................... 176
Seats ........................................................ 28, 31 SiriusXM Travel Link ................................. 440 Starting ......................................................... 156
Adjustment ........................................... 28, 31 Traffic & Weather ..................................... 384 Button..........................................................15
Head Restraints .......................................... 33 SiriusXM Guardian ........................................ 458 Cold Weather ............................................ 157
Rear Folding ................................................ 28 SiriusXM Guardian FAQ ................................. 458 Engine Fails To Start ................................. 156
Reclining ..................................................... 29 SiriusXM Guardian Trial Period ..................... 442 Remote ........................................................16
Seatback Release ....................................... 28 SiriusXM Guardian, Getting Started .............. 442 Starting And Operating .................................. 156
Tilting .......................................................... 28 SiriusXM Guardian, Introduction ................... 441 Starting Procedures ...................................... 156
Security Alarm .......................................... 20, 90 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Steering
Arm The System .......................................... 20 Browse in SXM ......................................... 384 Tilt Column...................................................35
Disarm The System ..................................... 21 Favorites................................................... 384 Wheel, Heated .............................................35
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................330 Replay ...................................................... 383 Wheel, Tilt ....................................................35
Send & Go ........................................... 448, 458 Traffic and Weather .................................. 384 Steering Wheel Audio Controls...................... 376
Sentry Key Smart Watch ................................................. 457 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Key Programming ........................................ 19 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 316 Controls ........................................................ 376
Sentry Key Replacement .......................... 14, 19 Snow Tires .................................................... 314 Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................... 450, 459
Service Assistance .........................................466 SOS Call ........................................................ 444 Storage, Vehicle ...............................................58
Service Contract ............................................467 Spare Tire Changing ..................................... 262 Store Radio Presets ...................................... 379
Service Manuals ............................................469 Spare Tire Stowage ....................................... 264 Stuck, Freeing ............................................... 275
Settings, Audio ..............................................386 Spare Tires .......................................... 314, 315 Sun Visor Extension .........................................71
Shift Lever Override .......................................274 Spark Plugs................................................... 330 Sunroof .....................................................64, 66
Shifting Specifications Closing .........................................................64
Manual Transmission ................................163 Fuel (Gasoline) ......................................... 330 Opening .......................................................64
Shoulder Belts ...............................................125 Oil ............................................................. 330 Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .... 132
Side View Mirror Adjustment ........................... 38 Sway Control, Trailer ............................ 107, 227 11
Signals, Turn ....................................42, 96, 155 System, Remote Starting .................................16
478
T Sizes ......................................................... 303 U

Telescoping Steering Column .......................... 35 Snow Tires ................................................ 314 Uconnect
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ............ 57 Spare Tires ...................................... 314, 315 Phone Call Features ................................. 400
Tilt Steering Column ........................................ 35 Spinning ................................................... 311 Things You Should Know About Your
Time Delay Trailer Towing ........................................... 230 Uconnect Phone ................................... 405
Headlight..................................................... 42 Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 312 Uconnect Settings ...........18, 333, 344, 356
Tip Start .........................................................156 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 229 Uconnect App ................................................ 443
Tire And Loading Information Placard ...........306 Tow Hooks Uconnect Phone ................................... 395, 397
Tire Markings .................................................302 Emergency................................................ 277 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
Tire Safety Information ..................................302 Towing .......................................................... 226 Call Currently In Progress ..................... 403
Tire Service Kit ..............................................268 Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 276 Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No
Tire Stowage ..................................................264 Guide ........................................................ 229 Call Currently In Progress ..................... 402
Tires...................................155, 309, 314, 318 Recreational ............................................. 233 Bluetooth Communication Link ................ 407
Aging (Life Of Tires) ...................................312 Weight ...................................................... 229 Call Continuation ...................................... 404
Air Pressure ...............................................309 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 107 Call Controls ............................................. 401
Chains .......................................................316 Trailer Towing ............................................... 226 Call Termination ....................................... 404
Changing ......................................... 262, 302 Cooling System Tips ................................. 233 Cancel Command ..................................... 395
Compact Spare .........................................314 Hitches ..................................................... 228 Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
General Information ........................ 309, 314 Minimum Requirements ........................... 230 Or Audio Device After Pairing................ 398
High Speed ................................................310 Trailer And Tongue Weight........................ 229 General Information ................................. 407
Inflation Pressure ......................................310 Wiring ....................................................... 231 Help Command ......................................... 395
Jacking ............................................ 262, 302 Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 229 Join Calls .................................................. 404
Life Of Tires ...............................................312 Trailer Weight................................................ 229 Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Load Capacity.................................. 306, 307 Transmission Favorite ................................................ 399
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..92, 117 Automatic ........................................ 165, 301 Making A Second Call While Current Call
Quality Grading..........................................318 Fluid ......................................................... 331 Is In Progress........................................ 403
Radial ........................................................310 Manual ..................................................... 163 Managing Your Favorites .......................... 400
Replacement .............................................312 Transporting Pets.......................................... 153 Natural Speech ......................................... 395
Rotation ....................................................317 Tread Wear Indicators .................................. 312 Operation .................................................. 394
Safety .............................................. 302, 309 Turn Signals ..............................................42, 96 Overview ................................................... 393
479
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile V Washing Vehicle ............................................ 321

Phone ...................................................395 Vanity Mirrors ..................................................40 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 315
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device..397 Vehicle Finder ...................................... 449, 459 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 315
Phonebook Download ...............................399 Vehicle Health Alert ...................................... 456 Wi-fi ............................................................... 449
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold ...............403 Vehicle Health Report ................................... 455 Wind Buffeting ...................................61, 63, 65
Power-Up ...................................................407 Vehicle Loading ................................... 225, 307 Window Fogging ...............................................58
Recent Calls ..............................................402 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................10 Windows
Redial ........................................................404 Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 456 Power...........................................................60
To Remove A Favorite ...............................400 Vehicle Storage ................................................58 Windshield Defroster .................................... 154
Toggling Between Calls .............................404 Viscosity, Engine Oil ...................................... 291 Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 293
Touch-Tone Number Entry .........................402 Voice Command............................ 36, 410, 413 Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 293
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ..405 Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................36 Wipers, Intermittent .........................................45
Voice Command ........................................405 Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................46
Uconnect Settings W Wrecker Towing............................................. 276
Customer Programmable Warning Flashers, Hazard ............................. 238
Features............... 18, 26, 333, 344, 356 Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Passive Entry Programming................26, 365 Descriptions)....................................................94
Uconnect System ...........................................371 Warnings And Cautions ....................................10
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...........................318 Warnings, Roll Over ........................................... 9
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Warranty Information .................................... 468
Connector ........................................................ 72 Washer
Unleaded Gasoline ........................................325 Adding Fluid .............................................. 290
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ....................127
11
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves any device or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
used in substitution therefore. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by comply with all local laws.
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s convenient reference source for common questions.
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
use public transportation.
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area WARNING!
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
2 02 0 REN EGAD E
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
202 0 RE N E G A D E
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle.
OWNER’S MANUAL
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE

OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
20_BV_OM_EN_USC_N
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
Third Edition
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.

2020 Renegade

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2020 Renegade

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2020 Renegade

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2 02 0 REN EGAD E

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................................................11 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ........................................................78 3

5 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 156 5

6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 238 6

7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ...................................................................................... 279 7

INTRODUCTION SENTRY KEY.......................................................... 19 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK

WIPERS AND WASHERS ....................................45 HOOD .................................................................... 66 WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Rollover Warning Label

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13

1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the

Emergency Key Removal Key Fob Battery Replacement

14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15

IGNITION SWITCH NOTE:

16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

SENTRY KEY If the vehicle security light turns on during

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

 The turn signals will flash.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

To Disarm The System The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Power Door Locks

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

Arming The Dead Lock Device Child Locks NOTE:

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

SEATS Manual Front Seats Manual Front Seats Forward/Rearward

Forward/Rearward Adjustment Bar

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29

Height Adjustment mid-track position. Be sure that the front

 Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may be

30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31

32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

 Press the heated seat button a second

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33

Fold Center Armrest Forward

34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Head Restraints

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35

STEERING WHEEL To lock the steering column in position, pull the

36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37

38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39